You are on page 1of 468

Users Guide to UNITY

Version 5.7

POWER

TEC DOC # LIT-TD-1000 08/2001


Table of Contents Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
The documentation contained in this publication is the exclusive property of Johnson Controls, Inc., and its use is restricted
to the licensed software with which it is furnished. This publication may not be used for any other purpose without the
express written consent of Johnson Controls, Inc. Johnson Controls, Inc., reserves the right to update specifications when
appropriate. Information contained in this document is based on specifications believed to be correct at the time of
publication.

Echelon , Coactive, Windows NT, and General Electric are registered trademarks and service marks of companies other
than Johnson Controls, Inc. FSC, CPL and NexSys are trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

2001 Johnson Controls, Inc. All Rights Reserved

System Products www.johnsoncontrols.com


9410 Bunsen Parkway Revised 08/2001
Louisville, KY 40220 Printed in U.S.A.

2
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Table of Contents

Chapter 1: UNITY Basics ......................................................15


1 Overview of UNITY ................................................................................. 16
1.1 PC-Based .................................................................................................. 16
1.2 Graphic User Interface .............................................................................. 16
1.2.1 The Logical Group Tree ............................................................................ 17
1.3 UNITY Networking .................................................................................. 17
1.4 UNITY Hot Backup .................................................................................. 17
2 OS/2 WARP Summary ............................................................................. 18
2.1 The OS/2 Window ................................................................................... 18
2.2 Multi-Tasking ............................................................................................ 18
3 The Hardware ........................................................................................... 19
3.1 The Keyboard ........................................................................................... 19
3.2 The Mouse ................................................................................................ 19
4 Screen Breakdown ..................................................................................... 21
4.1 Desktop .................................................................................................... 21
4.2 WARP Center ........................................................................................... 21
4.3 Cursor ....................................................................................................... 22
4.4 Windows ................................................................................................... 22
4.4.1 Open/Close a Window .............................................................................. 22
4.4.2 Resize a Window ....................................................................................... 22
4.4.3 Move a Window ........................................................................................ 22
4.4.4 Maximize a Window .................................................................................. 22
4.4.5 Restore a Window ..................................................................................... 23
4.4.6 Minimize a Window................................................................................... 23
4.4.7 Window List .............................................................................................. 23
4.4.8 Pop Up Windows ...................................................................................... 23
4.4.9 Select an Open Window ............................................................................ 23
4.5 Scroll Bars ................................................................................................. 23
5 Access Information ................................................................................... 24
5.1 Pull-Down Menus ..................................................................................... 24
5.1.1 Select a Pull-Down Menu .......................................................................... 24
5.1.2 Cancel a Menu Selection ........................................................................... 24
5.1.3 Select a Pull-Down Menu (with cursor keys) .............................................. 24
5.1.4 Select a Pull-Down Menu (with text keys) ................................................. 25
5.1.5 Cancel a Menu Selection (with text keys) ................................................... 25
5.2 Pop Up Menus .......................................................................................... 25
5.3 Submenus.................................................................................................. 25
5.4 Conditional Cascade Window .................................................................... 25
5.5 Dialog Boxes ............................................................................................. 26
5.5.1 Keyboard Operation in Dialog Boxes ........................................................ 26
5.5.2 Mouse Operation in Dialog Boxes ............................................................. 27
6 Accessing UNITY Information .................................................................. 28
6.1 Revision Number ...................................................................................... 28
6.2 Program Directory ..................................................................................... 28
6.3 Message Directory ..................................................................................... 29
6.4 Graphics Directory .................................................................................... 29
6.5 IMS Directory ........................................................................................... 29

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved. 3


Table of Contents Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6.6 System Status ............................................................................................ 30


6.7 System Map ............................................................................................... 30
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY ..........................................31
1 Enter and Exit the UNITY Environment................................................... 32
1.1 Start UNITY from the OS/2 Desktop ....................................................... 32
1.2 Log On to UNITY .................................................................................... 32
1.3 Log Off from UNITY ................................................................................ 33
1.4 Exit the UNITY Environment ................................................................... 33
2 The UNITY User Interface ........................................................................ 34
2.1 UNITY Windows ...................................................................................... 34
2.1.1 Header Window ........................................................................................ 34
2.1.2 Logical Group Tree/Graphics Window ...................................................... 34
2.1.3 Alarm Window .......................................................................................... 35
2.2 UNITY Dialog Boxes ................................................................................ 35
2.2.1 Acknowledge Alarms................................................................................. 35
2.2.2 Point Command ........................................................................................ 36
2.2.3 Auto Event Initiated Messages (EIMs) ...................................................... 36
2.2.4 Alert Boxes ............................................................................................... 37
2.2.5 Warning Boxes .......................................................................................... 37
2.2.6 Miscellaneous Dialog Boxes ...................................................................... 37
2.3 Menus ....................................................................................................... 37
2.3.1 Logs Menu ................................................................................................ 38
2.3.2 Edit Menu ................................................................................................. 38
2.3.3 IMS Menu ................................................................................................. 39
2.3.4 Card Menu ................................................................................................ 39
2.3.5 Setup Menu ............................................................................................... 39
2.3.6 Commands Menu ...................................................................................... 41
2.3.7 Logical Menu ............................................................................................ 41
2.3.8 System Menu ............................................................................................. 42
2.3.8.1 Single Subsystem ....................................................................................... 42
2.3.8.2 Multiple Subsystem ................................................................................... 42
2.3.9 Misc. Menu ............................................................................................... 42
2.3.10 Log Off ..................................................................................................... 43
2.3.11 Remote Log Off ........................................................................................ 43
3 UNITY Points ........................................................................................... 44
3.1 The UNITY Point Command Dialog Box ................................................. 44
3.2 Look up UNITY Points by Address ........................................................... 45
3.3 Look up UNITY Points by Descriptor ....................................................... 46
3.4 Request Status for a Point ......................................................................... 46
3.5 Command UNITY Points .......................................................................... 47
3.5.1 Command Points from the Menu ............................................................... 47
3.5.2 Command UNITY Points from Graphic..................................................... 47
3.5.3 Command Points from a Log ..................................................................... 48
3.6 Advance Schedules for Points.................................................................... 49
3.6.1 Modify only existing schedules................................................................... 49
3.6.2 When will changes take effect? .................................................................. 49
3.6.3 Add an Advance Schedule to a Point ......................................................... 50
3.6.4 Delete an Advance Schedule ..................................................................... 52

4 2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Table of Contents

4 UNITY Alarms.......................................................................................... 53
4.1 Acknowledge Alarms................................................................................. 53
4.2 Print Alarms .............................................................................................. 53
4.3 Clear the Alarm Window ........................................................................... 54
4.4 Alarm Types .............................................................................................. 54
5 Event Initiated Messages and Event Initiated Graphics ............................. 55
5.1 Stop Auto EIM Displays ........................................................................... 55
5.2 Start Auto EIM Displays ........................................................................... 55
5.3 Acknowledge an Auto EIM ...................................................................... 56
5.4 Acknowledge a Normal EIM ..................................................................... 56
5.5 Acknowledge an Event Initiated Graphic (EIG) ........................................ 57
6 Generate Logs (Reports) with UNITY ....................................................... 58
6.1 Log Types ................................................................................................. 58
6.2 Single Group Log ...................................................................................... 58
6.3 Groups Log ............................................................................................... 59
6.4 Group Type Log ........................................................................................ 60
6.5 Logical Group Log .................................................................................... 61
6.6 Print Tree .................................................................................................. 62
7 UNITY E-Mail .......................................................................................... 63
7.1 Send an E-Mail.......................................................................................... 63
7.2 Receive E-Mail .......................................................................................... 64
7.3 Read E-Mail .............................................................................................. 64
7.4 Print an E-Mail Message ............................................................................ 65
7.5 Delete an E-Mail Message ......................................................................... 66
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup ...................................................... 67
1 UNITY Operational Setup ........................................................................ 68
1.1 Passwords ................................................................................................. 68
1.1.1 Add/Edit a Password Setup ...................................................................... 68
1.1.2 Remove a Password................................................................................... 71
1.1.3 Change a Password .................................................................................... 71
1.1.4 Print the Password File .............................................................................. 72
1.1.5 Copy a Password Setup ............................................................................. 72
1.2 Printer ....................................................................................................... 74
1.3 Header Data .............................................................................................. 75
1.4 Time/Date ................................................................................................ 76
1.5 Daylight Savings Time Setup ..................................................................... 76
1.5.1 Set up the Holiday Schedule for H8 and H9 .............................................. 77
1.5.2 Set up UNITY Programs to Start and Stop DST ........................................ 78
1.5.3 Set up the TIPs to Activate the DST Schedules ......................................... 79
1.6 Holiday Schedules ..................................................................................... 80
1.7 Beeper Setup ............................................................................................. 82
1.8 Point Segregation ...................................................................................... 83
1.8.1 Add/Modify a Point Segregation File ......................................................... 84
1.8.2 Copy a Segregation File ............................................................................. 85
1.8.3 Delete a Segregation File ........................................................................... 86
1.9 Energy Management System (EMS) Defaults ............................................. 86
1.10 Alarm Colors ............................................................................................. 87
1.11 Tree Colors ............................................................................................... 87

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved. 5


Table of Contents Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.12 Auto Event Initiated Message (EIM) ......................................................... 88


1.13 Update Intervals ........................................................................................ 88
1.14 Station Setup ............................................................................................. 88
1.14.1 Assign a Station to a Terminal ................................................................... 89
1.14.2 Add/Modify a Descriptor .......................................................................... 89
1.15 Command Trace ........................................................................................ 90
1.15.1 Command Trace Setup .............................................................................. 90
1.15.2 Command Trace Options .......................................................................... 93
2 User Interface Setup .................................................................................. 94
2.1 Logical Group Tree Setup .......................................................................... 94
2.1.1 Add a Logical Group ................................................................................. 94
2.1.2 Add a Point to a Logical Group ................................................................. 95
2.1.3 Add a Bar Chart to a Logical Group ........................................................... 96
2.1.4 Add a Cut Out to a Logical Group ............................................................ 97
2.1.5 Use Flood Fill in a Logical Group .............................................................. 98
2.1.6 Add Text to a Logical Group ................................................................... 100
2.1.7 Remove a Logical Group ......................................................................... 101
2.1.8 Remove a Point from a Logical Group ..................................................... 102
2.1.9 Rename a Logical Group ......................................................................... 102
2.1.10 Modify Points in a Logical Group ............................................................ 103
2.1.11 Open/Close Groups in Logical GroupTree .............................................. 103
2.1.12 Move Groups in the Logical Group Tree.................................................. 104
3 Graphics ................................................................................................. 106
3.1 Graphics Setup ........................................................................................ 106
3.2 Detailed Graphics Information ................................................................ 106
3.3 Graphic Creation ..................................................................................... 106
3.4 Run the Graphics Editor ......................................................................... 106
3.4.1 Open a Graphic File ................................................................................ 107
3.4.2 Save the Graphic ..................................................................................... 107
3.4.3 Draw a Graphic with an Existing File ...................................................... 107
3.4.4 Draw a New Graphic............................................................................... 108
3.5 View Multiple Logical Group Tree/Graphics Windows............................ 109
Chapter 4: System Data Trace ............................................. 111
1 UNITY System Data Trace Utility ........................................................... 112
1.1 Enter the System Data Trace Utility ........................................................ 112
2 Set up the System Data Trace Utility ....................................................... 113
2.1 The TRACEDB Executable File ............................................................. 113
2.2 System Data Trace Setup......................................................................... 113
2.3 Set Report Parameters ............................................................................. 114
2.4 Change Report Parameters ....................................................................... 118
2.5 Delete a Report ....................................................................................... 120
2.6 Generate a Report ................................................................................... 121
3 Read a Command Trace Report ............................................................... 122
3.1 Point Commands ..................................................................................... 123
3.2 Commanded By ....................................................................................... 123
3.3 Logon/Logoff ......................................................................................... 124
3.4 Database Edits ........................................................................................ 124

6 2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Table of Contents

3.5 Card Command ....................................................................................... 125


3.6 System Status .......................................................................................... 125
3.7 Program Execution .................................................................................. 126
3.8 Acknowledged Alarms ............................................................................. 126
3.9 Misc. Commands ..................................................................................... 127
4 Read an Alarm Manager Report ............................................................... 128
5 Read a Card Activity Report .................................................................... 129
Chapter 5: Programming Procedures .................................. 131
1 System Programs ..................................................................................... 132
1.1 Program Types ........................................................................................ 132
2 General Programming Procedures ............................................................ 133
2.1 Add/Modify a Program ........................................................................... 133
2.2 Delete a Program ..................................................................................... 134
2.3 Copy a Program ....................................................................................... 134
2.4 Print a Program's Commands ................................................................... 135
2.5 Enable/Disable a Program ...................................................................... 136
2.6 Run a Program ........................................................................................ 136
3 Detailed Programming Procedures ........................................................... 137
3.1 Add Commands to a Program .................................................................. 137
3.2 Delete Commands from a Program .......................................................... 138
4 Program Commands ................................................................................ 139
4.1 Point Commands ..................................................................................... 139
4.2 Limit Commands ..................................................................................... 141
4.3 Log Commands ....................................................................................... 142
4.4 Run Programs .......................................................................................... 143
4.5 Time Delays ............................................................................................ 144
4.6 Form Feed ............................................................................................... 145
4.7 Print Text ................................................................................................ 145
4.8 Set Segregation ........................................................................................ 147
4.9 Run REXX .............................................................................................. 148
5 Program Exercise .................................................................................... 149
5.1 Create the Program .................................................................................. 149
5.2 Run the Program ..................................................................................... 151
6 Messages ................................................................................................. 152
6.1 Add/Modify a Message ........................................................................... 152
6.2 Delete a Message ..................................................................................... 153
6.3 Copy a Message ....................................................................................... 154
6.4 Print Message Text .................................................................................. 155
7 Time Initiated Program Schedules ........................................................... 156
7.1 Add/Modify a TIP Schedule .................................................................... 156
7.1.1 Add a Program to a Schedule ................................................................... 157
7.1.2 Delete a Program from a Schedule ........................................................... 158
7.1.3 Change a Programs Priority ..................................................................... 159
7.2 Delete a TIP Schedule ............................................................................. 159
7.3 Copy a TIP Schedule ............................................................................... 160
7.4 Print TIP Schedules ................................................................................. 161
7.5 TIP Exercise ........................................................................................... 161
8 Time of Day Schedules ............................................................................ 164

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved. 7


Table of Contents Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

8.1 Add a TOD Schedule .............................................................................. 164


8.2 Display TOD Schedules .......................................................................... 167
8.3 Print Group TOD Information ................................................................ 167
8.4 Edit a Strategy on a TOD Schedule ......................................................... 168
8.5 Delete a Strategy from a TOD Schedule .................................................. 169
8.6 Detailed TOD Strategy Information ........................................................ 170
8.7 TOD Schedule Exercise .......................................................................... 171
8.7.1 Create the TOD Schedule ....................................................................... 171
9 Advance Schedules ................................................................................. 175
9.1 Advance Schedule Exercise ..................................................................... 175
10 Event Initiated Activities ........................................................................ 178
10.1 Print EIA Information ............................................................................. 178
10.2 Edit Point EIAs ...................................................................................... 179
10.3 Detailed EIA Procedures ......................................................................... 180
10.3.1 Add/Delete an EIM ................................................................................ 180
10.3.2 Add/Delete an EIP ................................................................................. 182
10.3.3 Disable EIPs ........................................................................................... 183
10.3.4 Change a Programs Priority ..................................................................... 184
10.3.5 Add/Modify an EIG................................................................................ 185
10.3.6 Delete an EIG ......................................................................................... 186
10.3.7 Copy Activities to Other Events ............................................................. 187
11 REXX Programs ...................................................................................... 189
11.1 Use REXX Programs with UNITY .......................................................... 189
11.2 REXX Program Template........................................................................ 189
Chapter 6: Calculation Points ............................................. 191
1 Calculation Point Inputs .......................................................................... 192
2 Calculation Point Operators .................................................................... 194
2.1 Absolute Difference (ABS DIFF) A ......................................................... 194
2.2 Absolute Value (ABS) A ......................................................................... 194
2.3 Centigrade to Fahrenheit (C to F) A ......................................................... 194
2.4 Dew Point to Relative Humidity (dp to rh) A........................................... 194
2.5 Divide (/) A ............................................................................................ 194
2.6 Enthalpy using Dew Point (ent_dp) A ..................................................... 195
2.7 Enthalpy using Relative Humidity (ent_rh) A .......................................... 195
2.8 Equal (=) D ............................................................................................ 195
2.9 Exponent (EXP) A .................................................................................. 195
2.10 Fahrenheit to Centigrade (F to C) A ......................................................... 195
2.11 Flow Rate (FLOW) A .............................................................................. 195
2.12 Flow Rate using Square Root (FLOWSQRT) A ....................................... 195
2.13 Greater Than (>) D ................................................................................. 196
2.14 Greater Than or Equal (>=) D ................................................................ 196
2.15 Heat Index (HEAT) A ............................................................................. 196
2.16 Less Than (<) D ...................................................................................... 196
2.17 Less Than or Equal (<=) D ..................................................................... 196
2.18 Logical And (AND) D ............................................................................. 197
2.19 Logical And Not (ANDNOT) D ............................................................. 197
2.20 Logical Exclusive Or (XOR) D ............................................................... 197

8 2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Table of Contents

2.21 Logical Not And (NAND) D ................................................................... 198


2.22 Logical Not Or (NOR) D ........................................................................ 198
2.23 Logical Or (OR) D .................................................................................. 198
2.24 Logical Or Not (ORNOT) D .................................................................. 199
2.25 Maximum (MAX) A................................................................................. 199
2.26 Minimum (MIN) A .................................................................................. 199
2.27 Minus () A ............................................................................................. 199
2.28 Modulo (MOD) A ................................................................................... 199
2.29 Multiply (*) A .......................................................................................... 200
2.30 Natural Log (LN)A .................................................................................. 200
2.31 Not Equal (<>) D .................................................................................. 200
2.32 Plus (+) A ............................................................................................... 200
2.33 Random (RAND) A................................................................................. 200
2.34 Relative Humidity to Dew Point (rh to dp) A........................................... 200
2.35 Square Root (SQRT) A ............................................................................ 200
2.36 Time Delay (DELAY) D ......................................................................... 201
2.37 Truncation (TRUNC)A ........................................................................... 201
2.38 Wind Chill (WIND) A ............................................................................. 201
3 Calculation Point Functions .................................................................... 202
3.1 Absolute Difference (ABS DIFF) ............................................................ 203
3.2 Absolute Value (ABS) A ......................................................................... 205
3.3 Accumulator ........................................................................................... 206
3.4 Addition .................................................................................................. 207
3.5 Average ................................................................................................... 208
3.6 Centigrade to Fahrenheit (C to F) ............................................................ 208
3.7 Change of State ....................................................................................... 209
3.8 Consumption ........................................................................................... 210
3.9 Degree Day ............................................................................................. 212
3.10 Degree Days ............................................................................................ 213
3.11 Demand Control ...................................................................................... 214
3.12 Dew Point to Relative Humidity (dp to rh) .............................................. 214
3.13 Division .................................................................................................. 215
3.14 Enthalpy Using Dew Point (ent_dp) ........................................................ 216
3.15 Enthalpy Using Relative Humidity (ent_rh) ............................................. 217
3.16 Exponent (EXP) ..................................................................................... 218
3.17 Fahrenheit to Centigrade (F to C) ............................................................ 219
3.18 Flow Rate (FLOW) ................................................................................. 220
3.19 Flow Rate Using Square Root (FLOWSQRT) .......................................... 222
3.20 Heat Index (HEAT) ................................................................................ 223
3.21 Maximum (MAX) .................................................................................... 225
3.22 Minimum (MIN) ...................................................................................... 226
3.23 Multiplication .......................................................................................... 227
3.24 Natural Log (LN) .................................................................................... 227
3.25 Optimum Start Time ............................................................................... 228
3.26 Optimum Stop Time ............................................................................... 229
3.27 Percent of Scale....................................................................................... 230
3.28 Random (RAND) .................................................................................... 231
3.29 Relative Humidity to Dew Point (rh to dp) .............................................. 233

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved. 9


Table of Contents Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.30 Rolling Average ....................................................................................... 234


3.31 Run Time ................................................................................................ 236
3.32 Select High .............................................................................................. 238
3.33 Select Low .............................................................................................. 239
3.34 Square Root (SQRT) ............................................................................... 240
3.35 Subtraction .............................................................................................. 241
3.36 Totalizer Difference ................................................................................ 242
3.37 Truncate (TRUNC) ................................................................................. 243
3.38 Wind Chill (WIND) ................................................................................. 244
4 Detailed DCP Information ....................................................................... 246
4.1 If-Then-Else Format................................................................................ 246
4.1.1 If Statement Structure .......................................................................... 247
4.1.2 Then & Else Commands ................................................................... 247
4.2 An Example dcp Exercise........................................................................ 248
4.2.1 Create the Digital Calculation Point ......................................................... 248
5 Detailed ACP Information ....................................................................... 255
5.1 Formula Format ...................................................................................... 255
5.2 ACP Statement Structure......................................................................... 255
5.3 An Example ACP Exercise ...................................................................... 256
5.3.1 Set up the Formula .................................................................................. 256
5.3.2 Create the Analog Calculation Point ........................................................ 256
5.3.3 Test the Analog Calculation Point ........................................................... 263
6 Detailed FCP Information ....................................................................... 265
6.1 An Example FCP Exercise ...................................................................... 265
6.1.1 Create the Function Calculation Point ..................................................... 265
6.1.2 Test the Function Calculation Point ........................................................ 269
7 Example Calculation Group .................................................................... 270
7.1 Calculation Group Setup ......................................................................... 270
7.2 Run the Calculation Group ...................................................................... 275
8 Calculation Point Programming ............................................................... 280
8.1 Add a Calculation Group ......................................................................... 280
8.2 Add a Calculation Point .......................................................................... 281
8.3 Delete a Calculation Point ....................................................................... 282
Chapter 7: Information Management System .....................283
1 Set Up the IMS ........................................................................................ 284
1.1 Store IMS Information ............................................................................. 284
1.2 Select Alarms to be Stored ....................................................................... 284
1.3 Add/Modify Trend Points ....................................................................... 285
1.4 Delete Trend Points ................................................................................ 286
2 IMS Reports ............................................................................................ 287
2.1 Set Up IMS Reports ................................................................................. 287
2.2 Run IMS Reports ..................................................................................... 291
2.2.1 IMS Screen Report .................................................................................. 292
2.2.2 IMS Graph Report ................................................................................... 293
2.2.3 IMS SDF Report ...................................................................................... 296
2.2.4 IMS ASCII Report ................................................................................... 296
2.2.5 Print an IMS Report................................................................................. 297

10 2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Table of Contents

2.2.6 Cancel Printing ........................................................................................ 298


2.3 View the IMS Data File Statistics ............................................................ 298
2.4 View the IMS Directory ........................................................................... 298
Chapter 8: Demand Control Program..................................299
1 Overview ................................................................................................ 300
1.1 Demand Terms ........................................................................................ 301
2 Setup....................................................................................................... 302
2.1 Point 1 Setup Procedure .......................................................................... 302
2.2 Point 2 Setup Procedure .......................................................................... 304
2.3 Point 3 Setup Procedure .......................................................................... 305
2.4 Point 4 Setup Procedure .......................................................................... 306
2.5 Point 5 Setup Procedure .......................................................................... 306
2.6 Points 6-99 Setup Procedure ................................................................... 307
3 UNITY Demand Control Programming Forms ......................................... 309
Appendix A: Glossary.......................................................... 311
Appendix B: Maintenance.................................................... 315
1 Scheduled Maintenance ........................................................................... 316
1.1 Annual Maintenance................................................................................ 316
1.2 Semi-Annual Maintenance ....................................................................... 316
1.3 Monthly Maintenance .............................................................................. 316
2 Hardware Maintenance ............................................................................ 317
2.1 Clean Floppy Diskette Drive ................................................................... 317
2.2 Clean the PC ........................................................................................... 317
2.3 Clean the PC Keyboard ........................................................................... 317
2.4 Clean the PC Video Monitor .................................................................... 318
2.5 Replace the Printer Ribbon ...................................................................... 318
2.6 Clean the Printer Carriage Area ................................................................ 318
2.7 Clean the PC Mouse ................................................................................ 318
3 Software Maintenance ............................................................................. 319
3.1 Before You Backup ................................................................................. 319
3.2 Prepare Files for Backup ......................................................................... 319
3.3 Back Up Files to Floppy Disks ................................................................ 320
3.4 Restore Files from Floppy Disks .............................................................. 320
3.5 Restore Files from the Hard Drive ........................................................... 320
3.6 Purge IMS Files ....................................................................................... 321
3.7 Backup Graphics Files ............................................................................. 321
Appendix C: DataBase Dump ............................................323
1 Overview ................................................................................................ 324
1.1 Installing the DataBase Dump Utility ...................................................... 324
1.2 Using the DataBase Dump Utility ............................................................ 324
2 An Example Report ................................................................................. 326
2.1 Reading the Report .................................................................................. 326
Appendix D: Alarm Manager ...............................................327
1 What is the Alarm Manager ..................................................................... 328
2 Set Up Alarm Manager ............................................................................ 329

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved. 11


Table of Contents Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.1 Add a Responder ..................................................................................... 329


2.2 Change or Delete a Responder ................................................................. 330
2.3 Add a Response ....................................................................................... 331
2.4 Change or Delete a Response .................................................................. 332
3 Respond with the Alarm Manager ........................................................... 333
4 Refresh the Alarm Manager .................................................................... 335
Appendix E: ALFAPAGE .....................................................337
1 Overview ................................................................................................ 338
2 Installation .............................................................................................. 339
3 Setup Tips ............................................................................................... 342
3.1 Printer Tips ............................................................................................. 342
3.2 Modem .................................................................................................... 342
3.3 Pager ....................................................................................................... 342
3.4 Points ...................................................................................................... 343
3.5 Screen ..................................................................................................... 343
3.6 ChipChat Installation Note ...................................................................... 343
Appendix F: Comcall............................................................345
1 Start Comcall .......................................................................................... 346
2 Set Up Comcall ....................................................................................... 347
2.1 Printer Setup ........................................................................................... 347
2.2 Modem Setup .......................................................................................... 347
2.3 Pager Setup ............................................................................................. 348
2.4 Point Setup ............................................................................................. 349
2.5 Screen Setup ........................................................................................... 349
2.6 Save the Settings ..................................................................................... 350
2.7 Load Settings .......................................................................................... 350
3 View Log ................................................................................................ 351
4 Comcall Help .......................................................................................... 352
4.1 Help Search Method 1 ............................................................................. 352
4.2 Help Search Method 2 ............................................................................. 353
4.3 About Comcall ........................................................................................ 354
5 Activate/Deactivate Comcall .................................................................. 355
5.1 Activate Comcall ..................................................................................... 355
5.2 Deactivate Comcall ................................................................................. 355
Appendix G: Hot Backup ...................................................357
1 Overview ................................................................................................ 358
1.1 Theory of Operation................................................................................ 358
1.2 Software Requirements ............................................................................ 359
1.3 Hardware Requirements .......................................................................... 359
1.4 Definition and Location of Files .............................................................. 359
2 Watchdog Timer Board Setup .................................................................. 360
2.1 Timer Reset Input ................................................................................... 360
2.2 CPU Reset Output .................................................................................. 360
2.3 External Device Reset ............................................................................. 360
2.4 Switch Pack S1 ........................................................................................ 360
3 Switch Box Setup .................................................................................... 361
4 Hot Backup Setup ................................................................................... 363

12 2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Table of Contents

4.1 UNITYINI.EXE* ................................................................................... 364


4.2 SETPIPES.EXE ..................................................................................... 368
4.3 STATECHG.CMD ................................................................................. 369
5 Hot Backup Status .................................................................................. 370
5.1 View the Hot Backup Status ................................................................... 370
5.2 Reset the Masters .................................................................................... 370
6 Normal Startup with HotBackup ............................................................. 373
Appendix H: Backtrace .......................................................375
1 Backtrace Overview ................................................................................ 376
1.1 Add Backtrace to UNITY........................................................................ 376
UNITY User's Guide Index ................................................9

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved. 13


Table of Contents Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

14 2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Chapter 1: UNITY
Basics

Chapter Overview
This chapter of the Users Guide to UNITY will tell you:
Basic information about UNITY
A brief description of the UNITY architecture
Basic information about OS/2 WARP

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Chapter 1: UNITY Basics Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Overview of UNITY
UNITY is a Graphic User Interface that simplifies access to building data.
UNITY also lets you customize the appearance and operation of the system
to suit your particular application.
1.1 PC-Based
UNITY uses the newest line of Pentium personal computers, and IBMs
newest PC operating system OS/2 WARP. These microprocessors give
personal computers enough power and speed to handle the complex tasks
required by building automation.
OS/2 WARP, the operating system software UNITY uses, coordinates the
functions performed by the microprocessor to allow true multi-tasking. You
can be working in a spreadsheet, writing a letter in a word processor, and
using UNITY to interface with your building, all at the same time.

1.2 Graphic User Interface


Personal computers combine high-resolution screen images with screen-
pointing devices (i.e., mouse, tablet, light pen, etc.) to create what is
commonly called a Graphic User Interface (GUI). The GUI creates a more
realistic on-screen model of the activity in the computer. See 2.2 - The
UNITY User Interface for more information.
UNITY combines the power of the personal computers, the flexibility of the
OS/2 WARP operating system, and the ease-of-use of a Graphic User
Interface.
Figure 1-3 shows a typical UNITY screen display:

Figure 1-3. Typical UNITY Screen Display.

16 2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 1: UNITY Basics

1.2.1 The Logical Group Tree


Just as an outline is a map of a written document, the Logical Group Tree is
a map of a building automation control system. Figure 1-4 shows a sample
Logical Group Tree.

Figure 1-4. Logical Group Tree.


Naturally, each system will be different, and will require a certain amount of
custom programming to have an accurate map. See Chapter 2 for more
information.
Note: The more time you spend designing and programming your Logical Group Tree
the less time operators will spend searching the Tree for information.
1.3 UNITY Networking
The UNITY Server and User PCs communicate with each other using Local
Area Networks (LANs) or modems. LANs are used for same-site (single
building or building cluster) communication while modems are used for
remote-site communication. UNITY supports Novell Netware, IBM
LANServer, and OS/2 Peer to Peer. In addition UNITY supports the
following communications protocols: EthernetII, 802.2, 802.3, IPX, Token
Ring, and Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
Note: While UNITY supports TCP/IP you wont be able to access the Internet.
UNITY uses this protocol strictly for LAN communications. Modem (WAN)
communication is performed through the UNITY S-driver.
UNITY modem communications supports a maximum baud rate of 14.4K.
1.4 UNITY Hot Backup
Hot Backup is a feature that ensures the maintenance of current system data
in the event that the primary PC (system server) goes down. Hot Backup
provides a secondary PC that contains Global Data files identical to those on
the primary PC. The Global Data files backed up to the secondary PC are:
Edit/Groups Edit Programs Edit TIP Schedules
Edit Events/EIPs Edit Schedules Edit Segregation Files
Card Parameters Card Edit Schedules Card Edit Groups
Card Edit Card Purge Card Change Field Setup Passwords Edit
Setup Passwords Change Setup Time and Date Setup Holiday Schedule
Delta 1000 Edit Channels Setup Station Setup Setup Command Trace
System Subsystem Enable Setup EMS Defaults Misc. Reset Priorities
System Subsystem DisableSystem CSI Save DCUMisc. Datafile Backup

2001 Johnson Controls, Inc. 17


Chapter 1: UNITY Basics Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2 OS/2 WARP Summary


This is an overview of OS/2 WARP version 4.0. Refer to the OS/2 WARP
manuals for more information.
OS/2 WARP is the personal computers traffic cop. OS/2 WARP decides
when things happen and when they dont. If a program (like UNITY) needs
information from a floppy disk, OS/2 WARP controls the movement of the
information.
Note: If you are unfamiliar with OS/2 WARP operations, spend some time viewing
the Tutorial on the Desktop.
2.1 The OS/2 Window
The OS/2 window appears as an icon in the OS/2 System window in the
command prompts folder and looks like the example to the left. To access
an OS/2 window, double click on that icon. An OS/2 screen will look like
the one in Figure 1-10.

Figure 1-10. OS/2 Screen.


2.2 Multi-Tasking
The main difference between OS/2 WARP and DOS is multi-tasking. Multi-
tasking describes a system that can perform more than one task at a time.
With UNITY, multi-tasking is important because it guarantees that alarms,
Time Initiated Programs, and other critical operations are always given
proper attention.

18 2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 1: UNITY Basics

3 The Hardware
The keyboard and the mouse are the primary instruments used to input data,
command points, modify the system, etc. This section will detail the proper
use of those items.
3.1 The Keyboard
There are six types of keys on the keyboard:
1) Standardkeys- These are the keys that correspond to typewriter keys (a, b, 1, 2, SHIFT,
TAB, RETURN, etc.). Use the standard keys to enter and edit text.
2) Cursor keys - These include the four arrow keys (Left, Right, Up, and
Down) and the six page keys (Insert, Delete, Home, End, Page Up, and
Page Down) to the right of the text and numeric keys.
3) Keypad keys - These keys correspond with the regular calculator functions
(1, 2, 3, +, *, ENTER, etc.) and are located on the right side of the
keyboard.
4) Function keys - These are special keys that may be custom defined by
applications. Some applications provide an overlay sheet to remind you
of the function key assignments.
5) Modifier keys - These are two special keys that may alter the operation of
other keys. The CTRL or Control key must be held down with the key
being modified. The ALT or Alternate key can either modify the next key
that is pressed if it is first released, or it can be held down with another
key being modified.
6) Escape key - This is a special key used to abandon a current operation.
Note: Control/Escape function - When the Control and Escape keys are held
down together, a list of all currently running programs is shown. You can then
select a listed program to be the foreground application. (Or, place the cursor on
a blank area of the desktop and click both mouse buttons simultaneously to
display the Window List.) For more information about the Window List
window, see the OS/2 WARP documentation.
3.2 The Mouse
The mouse (Figure 1-7) is a small hand-held device that allows a user to
interface with the computer. The mouse lets you move an on-screen cursor
up, down, left or right. The mouse also has two buttons.
Buttons

Cable

Roller Ball
Figure 1-1. Mouse.
Note: The mouse operates by measuring the rotation of a small rubber roller ball on its
bottom surface. Therefore, the roller ball on the bottom must touch a clean dry
surface (the top of a table or desk, a mouse pad, etc.) for the mouse to work
(Figure 1-2).

Figure 1-2. Using the Mouse.


On the next page is an explanation of the five basic mouse actions:
2001 Johnson Controls, Inc. 19
Chapter 1: UNITY Basics Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.2 The Mouse - continued


Pointing - Move the mouse until the tip of the cursor rests on a specific
item or area. Pointing alone does nothing.
Clicking or Selecting - Point at an item, then press and release the left or
right mouse button. Clicking is used to select an on-screen item.
Double-Clicking - Press and release the left mouse button twice in rapid
succession. Double-Clicking is used to select an item from a list.
Dragging - Point at an item to be moved, press and hold down the left or
right mouse button, and then move the mouse (and therefore the cursor-
item) to a new location. Release the left button only when the cursor-item
is in the correct position.
Swiping (Highlighting) - This is basically the same technique used for
dragging, but is used for selecting text. Point to the left of the first
character to include, press and hold down the left mouse button. Drag
the pointer to the right and/or down until the pointer passes the last
character to include, then release the button.
Dual Clicking - When the cursor is positioned over the desktop, press
both mouse buttons at the same time and release. Dual clicking is used
to call up a Window List.
Right Clicking - Click the right mouse button only. This is used to display
the pop up menu of the item (folder, window, or icon) that the cursor
is positioned on. If no menu exists for the item, none will be displayed.

20 2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 1: UNITY Basics

4 Screen Breakdown
An OS/2 display should be similar to the example shown in Figure 1-3. A computer
screen has several components discussed in the next few pages.

Figure 1.3 OS/2 WARP Display.


4.1 Desktop
The solid color background area of the screen is known as the Desktop. It
appears when OS/2 WARP is running. When other programs are running
or windows are open, the desktop can still be found underneath the other
windows. Just as the top of your desk is where work is done, the OS/2 WARP
Desktop area is where your computer work is done. On the Desktop are icons
representing the various programs, data files, and folders (operating systems
utilities, applications, etc.) on the hard drive. In addition there are icons
representing the floppy drives and other peripherals. To open a file, open a
folder, or start a program, double click on the icon with the left mouse
button. Or, choose the icon by clicking once and open by pressing enter.
Move an Object - To move an icon on the desktop, click on the icon with
the right mouse button and drag it to the new position. By dragging an icon,
it can be repositioned on the screen, placed in a new folder or, if it
is dragged to the shredder, deleted.
Copy an Object - To make a duplicate copy of a file, hold down the control
button while clicking on the right mouse button. Drag the copy to its new
location.
4.2 WARP Center
The WARP center is a status bar located at the top or bottom of the screen.
With it you can access other programs that are running, find lost files, check
on the printer, etc. Drag the cursor slowly across the status bar to determine
what each icon represents, or click on a icon to display a pull down menu.
When UNITY is running, the WARP Center is hidden. To display the Warp
Center in UNITY, press Ctrl-Esc to display the window list and select Warp
Center.

Figure 1-5 Typical WARP Center Status Bar.

2001 Johnson Controls, Inc. 21


Chapter 1: UNITY Basics Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.3 Cursor
The cursor is the on-screen representation of the mouses position. When the
mouse is moved to the left, the cursor will move to the left. When the mouse
is moved to the right, the cursor will move to the right, and so on. Typically,
the mouse and cursor are used to select objects on the screen, pull down
menus, push buttons, and select text to be edited. In some situations, the
shape of the cursor (normally an arrow) will change to show that the cursor
has a different function. Typically, the cursor will be one of the following
shapes:
Arrow - Used for pointing and selecting

Alarm Clock - Used to indicate that you must wait before proceeding

Double Arrows - Used to change the size of a resizable window (The


orientation of the arrows reflects the window dimension being changed.)

Vertical Line - Used to enter text

Pointing Hand - This shows that the cursor is currently on a


commandable point
4.4 Windows
Windows are rectangular areas of the screen that contain a group of objects
or text. Windows may be resizable, fixed in size, or a full screen (where the
edges of the window cannot be seen). A title bar is located at the top of each
window. When necessary, scroll bars will appear on the bottom and/or left
edges of each window.
4.4.1 Open/Close a Window
Windows can be opened in three ways. First, it can be opened by double
clicking on its icon. Second, highlight the icon by clicking once and then
press enter. Third, select the item from a pop up window. If the window is
already open, display the Window List and select the desired program. Be
sure that only one copy of UNITY is in use.
A window can be closed several ways. These are the three most common
ways. Click on the (close button) on the right side of the title bar. Double
click on the system menu icon on the left side of the title bar. Or, click once
on the icon on the left side of the title bar to display the pop up menu and
choose .
4.4.2 Resize a Window
To make a window smaller or larger, place the cursor on the windows border.
When the double ended arrow appears, drag the edge or corner of the window
to resize appropriately. Dragging the edge of a window will change only one
dimension of the window. Dragging the corner of the window will change
both the width and the height of the window.
4.4.3 Move a Window
Move a window on the screen by placing the cursor on the title bar and
holding down the left mouse button while dragging the window to a new
position.
4.4.4 Maximize a Window
The window can be maximized to take up the entire screen. Click on the
(maximize button) on the right side of the title bar.

22 2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 1: UNITY Basics

4.4.5 Restore a Window


To restore a maximized screen to the original size, click on the (restore
button) on the right side of the title bar.
4.4.6 Minimize a Window
By clicking on the (minimize button), the current window can be hidden.
It will continue running in the background. To reopen that window, call up
the Window List and choose the desired program. (See 3.4.7)
4.4.7 Window List
The Window List is a list of programs that are currently running. Some of
those windows are running in the background, and others have been mini-
mized. This list can be accessed by dual clicking (clicking both mouse
buttons) in the desktop area. Or, call the list by pressing the control (CTRL)
and escape (ESC) keys at the same time. Double clicking on an item in the
list will bring that window back to the foreground.
4.4.8 Pop Up Windows
Right click on an icon, a file, a name or a window to activate its pop up menu.
If no menu exist for that item, none will appear.
4.4.9 Select an Open Window
Any open window can be brought to the front of the viewing screen by
clicking on any visible part of that window. An open window can also be
brought to the front by selecting it from the Window List (CTRL-ESC).
4.5 Scroll Bars
A Scroll Bar (Figure 1-5) is a window control that lets you see a document
that is larger than the current window. Scroll bars may be vertical or
horizontal. Scroll Bars contain three elements:
Scroll Arrows - The rectangular buttons with arrows on them at both ends
of a scroll bar
Scroll Box - A solid rectangle somewhere between the arrows of the scroll
bar
Page Areas - The areas of the scroll bar between the scroll box and each
of the scroll arrows
Page area Thumb box Page area

Scroll Arrows

Figure 1-6. Scroll Bar.

2001 Johnson Controls, Inc. 23


Chapter 1: UNITY Basics Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5 Access Information
5.1 Pull-Down Menus
Menu Name

Selected
Pull-down menus are groups of commands or phrases that are not visible
Menu Item until a menu name is selected. For example: To display the statistics of the
Main Items IMS (Information Management System) Datafile, the menu name IMS is
selected. Selecting IMS causes a list of the available IMS commands to
appear. Now Statistics can be selected from this list. This is shown in the
example at left.
Note 1: Unavailable menu items will be displayed in gray (or a light shade of the current
Menu-text color).
Note 2: If other options exist within a menu, selecting a given menu item may lead to
an additional submenu. Items with submenus are marked with an arrow .
See the Reports submenu to the right.
5.1.1 Select a Pull-Down Menu
1) Point to the appropriate menu name.
Move the mouse around on the table or mouse pad until the cursor arrow
points to the middle of the menu name.
2) Click on the menu name.
The menu is displayed with the top menu item highlighted.
3) Point to the appropriate menu item.
Move the mouse towards you on the table or mouse pad until the cursor
arrow rests on the middle of the menu item.
4) Click on the menu item to be selected.
Press once on the left mouse button. The menu item will highlight
(highlighted items have a different shading than non-highlighted items)
and the menu action will occur.
5) If the selected item has a submenu, repeat steps 3 - 4 for the
submenu.
Note: Each menu has a default selection which can be chosen by pressing the return or
enter key on the keyboard. The default selection will be the highlighted or raised
button.
5.1.2 Cancel a Menu Selection
1) Place the mouse outside the menu area and press the right mouse
button.
Press the right mouse button to cancel the most recent step of a menu
selection.
5.1.3 Select a Pull-Down Menu (with cursor keys)
Access the pull down menus through the keyboard in one of the following
ways.
1) Press the ALT key and the letter key for the appropriate menu name.
Each menu name has one letter underlined (the L in Logs for example).
The underlined letter is the menus command letter. The menu name on
the left will be highlighted.

24 2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 1: UNITY Basics

5.1.3 Select a Pull-Down Menu (with cursor keys) - continued


2) Use the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate menu.
Pressing the right arrow highlights the menu name to the right of the
current menu. Pressing the left arrow highlights the menu name to the left
of the current menu.
3) Select the currently highlighted menu.
Press either the down arrow key or the RETURN key to open the menu.
4) Use the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate menu item.
Press the up or down arrow keys as necessary until the appropriate menu
item is highlighted. (If the appropriate menu item is the parent of a
submenu, press the right arrow key to open the submenu, and repeat this
step.)
5) Press the RETURN key to select the menu item.
5.1.4 Select a Pull-Down Menu (withtextkeys)
1) Press the ALT key and the letter key for the appropriate menu name.
Each menu name has one letter underlined (the L in Logs for example).
The underlined letter is the menus command letter.
The menu name on the left will be highlighted.
2) Press the letter key for the appropriate menu item
Each menu item has one letter underlined (the A in Alarm Summary [Logs
Menu] for example). The underlined letter is the menu items command
letter (if the appropriate menu item is the parent of a submenu, repeat this
step for the submenu).
5.1.5 Cancel a Menu Selection (with text keys)
1) Press the ESC key.
Pressing the Escape (ESC) key cancels the most recent step of a menu
selection.
5.2 Pop Up Menus
Click the right mouse button on an icon to show its pop up menu. Or, right
click in a window to access the windows pop-up menu. If an icon or window
has no pop up menu, none will be displayed.
Note: The Escape key will cancel the most recent step of a menu selection.
5.3 Submenus
A submenu is a menu accessed through another menu. A submenu can be
found in a pull-down menu or a pop-up menu and it is indicated by a small
arrow on the right side of the menu. Clicking on a menu item with a submenu
will call up the submenu.
5.4 Conditional Cascade Window
A conditional cascade window looks similar to a submenu, however, the small
indicator arrow at the right side of the main menu has a box around it (
). Clicking on top of the arrow inside the box will bring up the conditional
cascade menu. Clicking anywhere else on that menu item will not access that
menu but will automatically select the default item in the cascade menu.

2001 Johnson Controls, Inc. 25


Chapter 1: UNITY Basics Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5.5 Dialog Boxes


Dialogs or dialog boxes (Figure 1-6) are a special type of window used to enter
specific information. For example, when setting up a printer the following
dialog is used to select the printer type, printer port, baud rate and report
segregation:
Dialog Box Text Field Radio Button

Check Box Button Spin Box List Box


Figure 1-7. Dialog Box.
Dialogs may contain one or more of the following:
Buttons - Shaded rectangles with a name in the middle
List Boxes- A rectangular box of text items with a scroll bar along the right
side
Dropdown List Boxes - A small rectangular box with an arrow on the side.
Clicking on the arrow causes the box to drop down an item selection list.
Radio Buttons - Small circles with a name to the side
Spin Boxes - A small rectangular box with a pair of arrows on the side.
Clicking on an arrow causes the box to spin through the items contained
in the box.
Checkboxes - Small squares with a name to the side
Edit Fields - Short, wide, rectangular boxes, with a name to the side
Using the mouse or the keyboard with these items is covered in the next
section.
5.5.1 Keyboard Operation in Dialog Boxes
The following keys perform specific functions in dialog boxes:
Return key - The RETURN key selects the default button in any dialog box
(The default button is signified by a thick border).
Escape key - The Escape (ESC) key selects the CANCEL button in any
dialog box.
Tab key - The TAB key advances the cursor to the next available field in
the dialog box.

26 2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 1: UNITY Basics

5.5.2 Mouse Operation in Dialog Boxes


Items (buttons, checkboxes, text fields, text, etc.) display differently when
they are selected and when they are not selected. Below are descriptions and
examples of the appearance change for each object:
Buttons - Buttons are spring loaded (when the mouse is released, they
change back to the normal state). When clicked on with the mouse, the
shading of the button will change slightly and the text of the button will move
down and to the right as shown below:
Not Selected Selected
List Boxes- Lists show the selected item as a reversed image (white-on-
black instead of black-on-white).
Menus - When a menu item is selected its shading changes, giving it the
appearance of being pressed in.
Radio Buttons - When a radio button is selected, a small black dot appears
in its center.
Not Selected Selected
Checkboxes - When a check box is selected a small appears in its center.
Not Selected Selected
Edit Fields - A small, vertical flashing bar appears at the left side of a
selected empty field.
Not Selected Selected

2001 Johnson Controls, Inc. 27


Chapter 1: UNITY Basics Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6 Accessing UNITY Information


This section describes how to access and display specific information
concerning your UNITY system. This includes software revision codes;
directory information showing the names of your Program, Message, Graph-
ics, and IMS files; the current status of the UNITY software modules; and a
map showing which Group Series have been assigned to specific subsystems
or as Calculation Groups.
6.1 Revision Number
To access revision codes for the software programs that make up your
UNITY system, select Revision from the Misc. menu. The Revision Informa-
tion window (Figure 1-8) is displayed, showing the revision code and date of
each program, as well as the serial number for your UNITY system. To close
the window, click .

Figure 1-8. Revision Information Window.


6.2 Program Directory
The Program Directory window (Figure 1-9) lists all user-defined programs
in the UNITY system. To access this window, select Directory from the Misc.
menu, then choose Programs. To close the window, click .

Figure 1-9. Program Directory Window.

28 2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 1: UNITY Basics

6.3 Message Directory


The Message Directory window (Figure 1-10) lists all user-defined messages
in the UNITY system. To access this window, select Directory from the Misc.
menu, then choose Messages. To close the window, click .

Figure 1-10. Message Directory Window.


6.4 Graphics Directory
The Graph Directory window (Figure 1-11) lists all graphic files available to
the user. To access this window, select Directory from the Misc. menu, then
choose Graphics. To close the window, click .

Figure 1-11. Graph Directory Window.


6.5 IMS Directory
The IMS Directory window (Figure 1-12) lists the dates when IMS informa-
tion was saved for this UNITY system. To access this window, select
Directory from the Misc. menu, then choose IMS. To close the window, click
.

Figure 1-12. IMS Directory Window.

2001 Johnson Controls, Inc. 29


Chapter 1: UNITY Basics Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6.6 System Status


The System Status window (Figure 1-13) displays the current status of the
IRM (Information Routing Module), as well as the software (System) and
hardware (CPU) in each subsystem. To access this window, select System
Status from the Misc. menu. To close the window, click .

Figure 1-13. System Status Window.


6.7 System Map
The System Map window (Figure 1-14) displays the Group Series mapping
that was set up during the installation of the UNITY system. To access this
window, select System Map from the Misc. menu. To close the window, click
.

Figure 1-14. System Map Window.

30 2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


Chapter 2: Working with
UNITY

Chapter Overview
This chapter of the Users Guide to UNITY will tell you:
How to enter and leave the UNITY system
The different parts of the UNITY environment
How to command points, acknowledge alarms and gen-
erate logs

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Enter and Exit the UNITY Environment


1.1 Start UNITY from the OS/2 Desktop
To start UNITY from the OS/2 desktop:
1) Double-click on the UNITY folder icon (Figure 2-2)
The UNITY Icon View window opens (Figure 2-1).

Figure 2-1. UNITY Icon View Window. Figure 2-2. UNITY Folder
Icon.
2) Before running UNITY the first time, double-click on the Readme
icon (Figure 2-3). Changes to UNITY 5.5 make this step imperative,
even if youve installed UNITY before.
3) If you are upgrading to UNITY 5.5 from a previous version, you must
double-click on the Delete old Btrieve*.PRE files icon (Figure 2-4)
prior to running UNITY the first time.
4) Double-click on the Start UNITY icon (Figure 2-5) to begin loading.

Figure 2-3. Readme Icon.Figure 2-4. Delete old Btrieve*.PRE files Icon.

Figure 2-5. Start UNITY Icon.


1.2 Log On to UNITY
Once UNITY is started, an identifier message box appears for a few seconds.
Then the System Log On dialog box will appear (Figure 2-6).

Figure 2-6. System Log On Dialog Box.


To log on to the UNITY system:
1) Enter your User Name in the User Name: field.
2) Enter your Password in the Password: field and click .
Note: If you have received E-Mail, an E-Mail notification will appear (Figure 2-7).
Click to acknowledge the notification.

Figure 2-7. E-Mail Notification.


32
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

1.3 Log Off from UNITY


1) Select Log Off from the Log Off menu.
The System Log Off warning box appears (Figure 2-8).

Figure 2-8. System Log Off Warning Box.


2) Click to log off from UNITY.
You are logged off from the UNITY system. The System Log On dialog
box appears.

WARNING! Log off from UNITY if you will be away from the
UNITY workstation for an extended period. This is
necessary to prevent unauthorized use of the worksta-
tion.

Auto Log Off Feature - UNITY has an Auto Log Off feature that increases
the security of the system. Auto Log Off will automatically log off the current
user if no operator activity occurs on the system after a set period. This period
is determined when the users password is set up. See Chapter 3, Section 1.1,
Password Setup, for more information.
1.4 Exit the UNITY Environment
It may be necessary to completely exit the UNITY system (e.g., if it is
necessary to run another application from the OS/2 desktop).
1) Select Exit from the Log Off menu.
The System Exit dialog box appears (Figure 2-9).

Figure 2-9. System Exit Dialog Box.


2) Enter your password in the Password: field.
3) If necessary, halt the IRM by clicking on the Stop IRM on exit
check box.
When this check box has been selected a will appear in the box.
Halting the IRM causes the User Interface to completely shut down. When
the IRM is halted UNITY will not perform any functions. If UNITY is
exited without shutting down the IRM, it will continue to function
normally, with the exception that it will not print logs on the User PC that
is shut down.

WARNING! The IRM should be halted only when new UNITY


software is being installed or during a full system
backup or system restore. Halting the IRM shuts down
all UNITY functions.

4) Click to close UNITY and return to the desktop.


33
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2 The UNITY User Interface


The UNITY User Interface is the part of the UNITY system that you, the user, see. The
UserInterfacehasthreemajorcomponents:windows,dialogs,andmenus.
2.1 UNITY Windows
UNITY has three window areas: the Header window, the Logical Group
Tree/Graphics window and the Alarm window. Each of these window areas
serve specific functions in UNITY, which are outlined below.
2.1.1 Header Window
The Header window (Figure 2-10) displays information about the present
condition of the UNITY system.

Figure 2-10. Header Window.


ThefollowinginformationispresentedintheHeaderwindow:
Date - This is the current date.
Header Point 1 and Header Point 2 - Although the header can show the status of any
twopointsinthesystem,usuallytheseareanalogpoints,oneoutsideairtemperature
andonerelativehumidity. Thesepointsareoptional.
CompanyName-ThisisusuallyusedforthenameofthecompanyinwhichtheUNITY
system is installed. It could also be the building name.
Time - This is the current time.
Current User - This displays the name of the user currently logged on to the UNITY
system.
AlarmsPending-Thisshowsthenumberofalarms,messages,orgraphicsremainingto
beacknowledged.
SystemStatus-Thisshowsthecurrentstatusofthesystem,e.g.,IRMdown,CPUdown,
etc.
SeeChapter3,Section1.3,HeaderData,forinstructionsdetailingHeaderwindowsetup.
2.1.2 Logical Group Tree/Graphics Window
The Logical Group Tree/Graphics window (Figure 2-11) displays the Logi-
cal Group Tree and graphics assigned to the logical groups on the tree.

Figure 2-11. Logical Group Tree/Graphics Window.


See Chapter 3, section 3.1, Logical Group Tree Setup, and Chapter 3, section
4.6, Viewing Multiple Logical Group Tree/Graphics Windows, for more
information on the Logical Group Tree/Graphics window.

34
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

2.1.3 Alarm Window


The Alarm window (Figure 2-12) appears at the bottom of the UNITY screen. It can
be sized to display between 2 and 19 alarms. This window displays the most recent
alarms received by UNITY. Any alarm exceeding the 19 alarm limit of this window
simply scrolls out of view. Excess alarms are still present in the system and appear as
part of the Alarms Pending count in the Header window. To change the size of the
Alarm window:
1) Position the cursor on the top edge of the window.
When the cursor is positioned correctly the cursor arrow will change to a
double-ended arrow.
2) Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the arrow up to
increase the size of the window or down to decrease it.
Point Address Alarm Status Point Data Time of Alarm

Figure 2-12. Alarm Window.


The Alarm window displays the following information:
Point Address - This is the address of the point that is in alarm.
Alarm Status - This is the type of alarm that was returned to the system
from the point.
Point Data - This is the most recent information returned from the point.
The information can be digital status, analog value or the name of the
operator that acknowledged the alarm.
TimeofAlarm- This shows the time the point went into alarm. In this instance alarm
refers to any change of a points status. This includes whenever a point returns to
normalorisacknowledgedbyanoperator.
2.2 UNITY Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes display at different times in UNITY. Some dialog boxes, like the
Auto EIM dialog box, appear automatically without any action on your part. Most
dialog boxes, however, appear in direct response to a menu selection, the press of
a function key, or selection of an item in a graphic with the mouse.
2.2.1 Acknowledge Alarms
The Acknowledge Alarms dialog box (Figure 2-13) appears when you select
the F12 function key on the keyboard, or when you select Alarm from the
Acknowledge submenu (part of the Commands menu).

Figure 2-13. Acknowledge Alarms Dialog Box.


This dialog box lets you acknowledge the next pending alarm, or quit the
dialog box. Quitting the dialog box does NOT acknowledge the current
pending alarm, it merely makes the dialog box disappear.

35
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.2.2 Point Command


The Point Command (Figure 2-14) dialog box appears when you select a
point number in a graphic or a Log (either Single Group or Group Log), when
you select Point from the Commands menu, or when you press F5.

Figure 2-14. Point Command Dialog Box.


This dialog box lets you view the status or value of a selected point, send
commands to the point, set up an Advance Schedule for a Time-of-Day
Schedule point, edit a point, enable/disable a point, or set up an Event
Initiated Program. You can also click on one of the red arrows to use the
lookup function and select a point from a list of all system points. The
lookup list may be in numerical (by point address), or alphabetical (by point
descriptor) order.
Note: This dialog box displays only the commands appropriate for the selected point.
As you select different types of points, different commands become available.
2.2.3 Auto Event Initiated Messages (EIMs)
The Auto EIM dialog box (Figure 2-15) appears when an event occurs that
is set up to display an Event Initiated Message (EIM). The text appearing in
the Auto EIM dialog box is a user-defined message that instructs or informs
the operator about a specific situation in the system.

Figure 2-15. Auto EIM Dialog Box.


This dialog box lets you read the text of the message and then view the next
pending EIM by clicking . When there are no more EIMS to display,
the Auto EIM dialog box disappears.
If you want to skip the next pending message, click to make the dialog
box disappear without proceeding to the next message.

36
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

2.2.4 Alert Boxes


Occasionally, a hardware or software problem may occur that prevents
UNITY from operating normally. In this case, an error message will appear
in a simple dialog box called an Alert Box (Figure 2-16). Clicking tells
UNITY that you have read and understood the error message.

Figure 2-16. Alert Box.


The purpose of the error message is to tell what went wrong and possibly why.
The most common error messages appear when you try to do something that
UNITY does not allow.
2.2.5 Warning Boxes
If you attempt to make a permanent change in the UNITY data files or
programming (deleting a group of points for example), UNITY will stop you
and confirm the action with a Warning Box (Figure 2-17). Clicking
proceeds with the action. Clicking stops the action and takes you back
to the previous dialog box.

Figure 2-17. Warning Box.


The purpose of this confirmation is to prevent you from accidentally making
a major change in your system that would be difficult to recover from.
2.2.6 Miscellaneous Dialog Boxes
All other dialog boxes in UNITY appear in direct response to the selection
of a menu item or a button in another displayed dialog box.
Note: There are many situations where selecting a button in a given dialog box displays
another dialog box, which displays another and so on. This is not intended to
be confusing, but is intended to limit your choices to those that are appropriate.
2.3 Menus
This section contains an explanation and an example of each menu with
instructions for finding more information. There are several Hot Keys that
provide a shortcut to many of the most common UNITY functions.
F1 - On-Line Help - Press the F1 function key at any time and you will see
a window that provides context-sensitive help for the current task. In
addition, you will find help for related subjects and actions that are linked to
each help screen.
F2 - Tree/Graphics Switch - Press the F2 function key to toggle between
the Logical Group Tree and the Graphics Window.
F5 - Point Commands - Press the F5 function key to check a points status
or value, or send a point command.
F9 - Acknowledge EILGS - Press the F9 function key to acknowledge or
view an Event Initiated Logical Graphic when the Logical Group Tree/
Graphics Window is visible.
F11 - Acknowledge EIMS - Press the F11 function key to acknowledge or
view an Event Initiated Message.
F12 - Acknowledge Alarms - Press the F12 function key to acknowledge a
point alarm.

37
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.3.1 Logs Menu


The Logs menu lets you print different types of reports.
1) Single Group - Single Group Logs print the status or value of each point in a given
group.
Enter: UNITY Group Number; Printer 1, 2, 3, or screen

2) Groups - Groups Logs print three different report types for a range of groups:
Normal (similar to a single group log), Alarms (all points in alarm), or Status (all digital
points).
Enter: Starting UNITY Group Number (optional); Ending UNITY Group
Number (optional); Printer 1, 2, 3, or screen
Note 1: If you do not enter a starting group number, the log will begin with the first group in the
system.
Note 2: If you do not enter an ending group number, the log will end with the last group in the system.
3) Group Type - Group Type Logs print the Group Number, Type (Delta 2000,
Calculation, Trane, etc.), and group status for either the group series specified, or all
group series in the system.
Enter: Starting UNITY Group Number (optional); Ending UNITY Group
Number; Printer 1, 2, 3, or screen
Note 1: If you do not enter a starting group series, the log will begin with the first series in the system.
Note 2: If you do not enter an ending group series, the log will end with the last series in the system.
4) Logical Group - Logical Group Logs print the status or value of each point in
a given Logical Group.
Select: Logical Group; Printer 1, 2, 3, or screen.
2.3.2 Edit Menu
The Edit menu lets you change Groups, Messages, Programs, Event Sched-
ules, Segregation Files, and TIP Schedules.
1) Groups - Editing Groups lets you add, modify, delete, copy, or print
UNITY Groups.
Enter: UNITY Group Number
Note: The Group Number determines the type of group (Delta 1000, Delta 2000,
Calculation, etc.) based on the Group Series programming of the entire system.
These group numbers were assigned when UNITY was installed. Check the
system map for the group numbers assigned to each subsystem.
2) Messages - Editing Messages lets you add, modify, delete, copy, or print
UNITY Messages. Messages are stored locally and are sent only to the PC
they are written on.
Enter: Message Name
Note: Messages are used with Event Initiated Messages (EIM S).
3) Programs - Editing Programs lets you add, modify, delete, copy, or print
UNITY Programs. All programs are global, shared by every PC in the UNITY
network.
Enter: Program Name
Note: Programs can be used with Event Initiated Programs (EIPS), and Time
Initiated Programs (TIP S).
4) TIP Schedules - Editing TIP Schedules lets you add, modify, delete, copy,
or print Schedules for Time Initiated Programs.
Enter: Time of Day; Day List
Note: TIP Schedules are used with Programs.
5) Events - Edit Events lets you add, modify, delete or copy events.
6) Schedules - Edit Schedules lets you add, modify, delete or copy Time-of-
Day (TOD), Holiday and Advance Schedules.
7) Segregation Files - Edit Segregation Files lets you add, modify, delete
or copy point segregation information. These files are available for global use.

38
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

2.3.3 IMS Menu


The Information Management System menu lets you setup and use the IMS
to store and print historical data from your system.
1) Reports - IMS Reports allow you to report your systems trend or alarm
activity for a specified set of circumstances. The System Data report is a list
of commands issued by UNITY users and programs.
Enter: Segregation File, Alarms to include; Individual Points to Include;
Cards to Include; Alarm or Trend report; Screen, Graph, SDF ASCII, or
Printer 1, 2, or 3; Time/Date Range to include
2) Cancel Printing - Cancelling Printing of IMS reports stops the CPU
processing of IMS data for a report.
Note: Printing may not stop immediately! This is because each of the printers has a local
buffer that stores portions of each printout.
3) Alarm Types To Store - Setting the Alarm Types to Store determines
what data will be in the IMS data file for later use in the IMS reports.
Select: A segregation file, then add or delete alarms to be stored in the
selected segregation file.
Note: If you choose not to set important alarm types to store in the IMS data file, you
will not be able to include those alarms in ANY IMS reports!
4) Statistics - Displaying the IMS Statistics shows you detailed information
about the current size of the IMS data file, and the rate its size is increasing.
5) Trend Points - Setting Trend Points determines which points will have
their status or value stored in the IMS data file.
Enter: UNITY Point Number; Trend Interval (time between trends);
Starting Time (when trending will begin); Ending Time (when trending will
end)
2.3.4 Card Menu
The Cards Menu is explained in the Card Access Supplement.
2.3.5 Setup Menu
The Setup menu lets you change settings for general system operation.
1) Passwords - Setup Passwords lets you add, modify, delete, copy, or print
passwords and user names.
2) Printers - Setup Printers lets you specify the type of printer(s) connected
to your system.
Enter: Printer Type; Connection (Serial Port #, Parallel Port); Baud Rate
(if serial); Segregation
Note 1: Some UNITY functions are not available unless there is at least one printer
active.
Note 2: The printer setup must match the emulation mode on the printer. If no matching
selections are available, select Other.
3) Header Data - Setup Header Data lets you specify the information that
appears at the top of the screen.
Enter: Your Company Name; Header Point #1; Header Point #2
4) Time /Date - Setup Time/Date lets you set the Time and Date that each
UNITY Workstation will use.
Enter: Time of Day; Month/Day/Year
Note: Many activities (TIPs, TOD Schedules, etc.) are time oriented, and will be
affected by an adjustment of the Time and/or Date.
5) Holiday Schedule - Setup Holiday lets you specify the days of the year
that will be considered holidays.
Enter: Month; Days; Holiday
Note: You may specify up to nine different holidays types.

39
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.3.5 Setup Menu - continued


6) Beeper Setup - Setup Beeper lets you specify what types of alarms will
trigger the Sonalert beeper.
Select: Segregation File; Point Type; Alarm Types
7) Point Segregation - Setup Point Segregation lets you specify the point
categories and/or individual points that are available to or assigned to
specific user(s) of this Workstation.
Select: Segregation File
Note: Segregation files are defined in the segregation file editor.
8) EMS Defaults - Setup EMS Defaults lets you specify the settings that the
EMS software uses to perform calculations and initiate strategies.
Enter: Season (Winter, Spring, Summer, Fall); Mode (Heating, Cooling,
No Heat/No Cool); Heat Comfort Temperature; Cool Comfort Tempera-
ture; Heat Design Temperature; Cool Design Temperature; Start Window;
Stop Window; Outside Air Point; Deadband.
Note: The Season and the Mode are live settings that will immediately affect EMS points.
All other settings are defaults used when new TOD Schedules are created.
9) Alarms Colors - Setup Alarm Colors lets you specify the screen colors
used to display different alarm types.
Select: Alarm Type; Alarm Color
Note: If this is a UL system the default alarm colors may NOT be altered.
10) Tree Colors - Setup Tree Colors lets you specify the screen colors used
to display elements of the Logical Group Tree.
Select: Tree Element; Element Color
11) Auto EIM - Setup Auto EIM (Event Initiated Messages) lets you specify
whether or not EIMS will be automatically displayed on the screen.
Select: Automatic EIM to Screen (yes or no)
Enter: Hold Delay (till Auto EIMS are re-displayed)
12) Update Intervals - Setup Update Intervals lets you specify the amount
of time (in seconds) between updates of point statuses on a Logical Graphic
and updates of the Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) datafile.
Enter: Graphic Update Interval; DDE Update Interval
Note: All Logical Graphics are affected by this command. The default for both
Graphic Update Interval and DDE Interval is 30 seconds.
13) Station Setup - Station Setup identifies each station to the PC, and must
be setup at the user station. Proper Station Setup settings will produce more
accurate, informative reports.
Enter: Station name assignment
14) Command Trace - Command Trace defines the information to be saved
for display in a Command Trace report. The Command Trace Report is a list
of all commands issued by UNITY programs and users. The command trace
report can be printed as it occurs. Information saved does not necessarily
have to be what is printed.
Enter: Command Trace settings
15) Alarm Manager - Alarm Manager is a UNITY utility program sold
separately that is used to monitor critical system points.
See Appendix D of the Users Guide for more detailed information.

40
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

2.3.6 Commands Menu


The Commands menu lets you initiate basic control functions.
1) Programs - Programs lets you perform a series of commands and delays
(a program) by selecting a program name.
Enter: Program Name
2) Acknowledge - Acknowledge lets you tell the system you have recognized
an Alarm, Event Initiated Message (EIM), or Event Initiated Graphic (EIG).
Select: Alarm, next EIM, or next EIG
3) Point - Point Commands let you request a status/value of a point, send
a command to a control point, edit a point, enable/disable a point, or set up
an Advance Schedule on a TOD Schedule point.
Enter: Point Number or Descriptor
Select: Command (type) or Status request; Enable/Disable (only if state
needs to change); Advance Schedule (only if necessary on a TOD Schedule
point)
4) Card - The Card command is explained in the Card Access Supplement.
5) REXX Script - REXX Script lets you run macros (short programs similar
to batch files) created with the REXX programming language.
Note: REXX Script files must be stored in the UNITY/UI/REXX directory.
Enter: Argument
Select: REXX file from list
6) Alarm Manager - The Alarm Manager command is explained in the
Alarm Manager Supplement. See Appendix D of the Users Guide for more
detailed information.
7) E-Mail - E-Mail lets you send a message to another operator. You can
also read, delete, and print messages sent to you.
Enter: Operator(s), subject, message
2.3.7 Logical Menu
The Logical menu lets you change and print the organization of your system
(i.e., the Logical Group Tree).
1) Run - Run puts UNITY in its normal mode.
2) Edit w/o Grid - Edit w/o Grid lets you edit a logical group.
3) Edit w/Grid - Edit w/ Grid lets you edit a logical group. Any items added
to the group will be aligned to a grid (Note: The grid is not visible to the user).
4) Rename - Rename lets you rename an existing logical group or assign a
graphic to a logical group.
5) Save - Save lets you save a logical group.
6) Open View - Open View lets you open additional group windows. Up to
four group windows can be open at one time. Each window can display either
the logical group tree or a logical group.
7) Close View - Close View closes the currently selected logical group
window.
8) Print Tree - Printing the Logical Group Tree lets you make a hardcopy
record to use as a reference when you are not working at the UNITY
Workstation.
Select: Printer 1, 2, or 3

41
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.3.8 System Menu


The appearance of the System Menu depends on the type and number of
subsystems in your system. There are two formats to the System Menu: Single
Subsystem, and Multiple Subsystem.
2.3.8.1 Single Subsystem
In a Single Subsystem installation, the System menu contains all of the
Subsystem specific commands. An example of this is shown to the left (the
example is a Metasys only system).
2.3.8.2 Multiple Subsystem
In a Multiple Subsystem installation, the System menu contains a name or
descriptor for each of the Subsystems. Each Subsystem menu item has a
corresponding submenu that contains all of the Subsystem specific com-
mands (the example is a Delta 1000, Delta 2000, Trane, EST, CSI, Excel
Classic, Johnson Controls 85, Excel Plus, Powers, and 5600 mixed system).

2.3.9 Misc. Menu


The Misc. menu is a catchall for miscellaneous commands that dont belong
in any of the other menus.

1) Form Feed - Form Feed advances a selected printers paper to the


beginning of the next page.
Select: Printer 1, 2, or 3
2) Revision - Revision displays the software revision codes for your system.
Electronic Systems USA personnel may ask for these codes when providing
support over the phone.
3) Clear Alarms - Clear Alarms removes the alarm information from the
Alarm Window allowing you to determine if new alarms are coming in.
Note: This command does not acknowledge alarms.
4) Kill Logs - Kill Logs stops the CPU processing of log data for a report.
Note: Printing may not stop immediately! This is because each of the printers has a local
buffer that stores portions of each printout.
Enter: Printer 1, 2, or 3
5) Directory - Directory lets you see the names of the files in the Program,
Message, Graphics, and IMS data files.
Select: IMS, Program, Message, or Graphics
6) System Status - System Status shows the current condition of UNITY
software modules. Electronic Systems USA personnel may ask for this
information when providing support over the phone.
7) System Map - System Map lets you see which Group Series have been
assigned to specific subsystems or as Calculation Groups.
8) Data file Backup - Datafile Backup lets you save the existing UNITY
database to a backup directory on the hard disk. This command backs up all
the PCs at once to the UNITY\BACKUP directory. Later, you can backup
these files to a floppy disk.
9) Reset Priorities - Reset Priorities (available only to Emergency Opera-
tors) lets you reset the command priority of all points in the system. This way,
points that have been controlled by an Emergency Program can be returned
to the control of normal operators.
10) Backup Status - Backup Status (available only for UNITY Systems that
have the Hot Backup feature) lets you check the status of backup links.

42
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

2.3.10 Log Off


The Log On/Off menu lets you register yourself as a user of the UNITY
system, and shut down the system when necessary.
1) Log Off - Log Off lets you tell the system that you are no longer working
at this Workstation.
2) Exit - Exit lets you shut down the system for maintenance or software
upgrades.
Enter: Password, Stop IRM on Exit (only at the instruction of Electronic
Systems USA personnel)
2.3.11 Remote Log Off
If your system has a remote user, the Log off menu of the remote PC will have
Dial and Hang up, in addition to Log Off and Exit. It will look like the menu
to the left.
1) Log Off - Log Off lets you tell the system that you are no longer working
at this Workstation.
2) Exit - Exit lets you shut down the system for maintenance or software
upgrades.
Enter: Password, Stop IRM on Exit (only at the instruction of Electronic
Systems USA personnel)
3) Dial - Dial lets the remote site call up the UNITY IRM.
Enter: Phone number of primary PC.
Note: When a remote users dials up and makes contact with the UNITY IRM, the
user must Logoff of his system and Logon to the primary PCs UNITY system.
4) Hang Up - Hang Up lets the remote site terminate call to the UNITY
IRM.

43
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3 UNITY Points
UNITY points are accessed by six-digit address numbers. These numbers
consist of a Group Series, group, and point assignment. The first digit of the
address is the group series assignment. Group Series run from 0 to 9 and from
A to Z yielding a total of 36 Group Series. The second and third digits are the
group assignment. Groups run from 00 to 99. The last three digits are the
point assignment. Points run from 000 to 999.
Note: Point 000 is part of the base group address and controls the groups intercom,
provided the group has an intercom. This point assignment can only be changed
by deleting the group (in which case the point will no longer exist).
3.1 The UNITY Point Command Dialog Box
Figure2-18showstheUNITYPointCommanddialogbox.TheUNITYPointCommand
dialog box is used to request point status and to command points.
Point Address Field Point Descriptor Field
Point Address
Lookup Arrow Point Descriptor
Lookup Arrow
Tree Path

Commands Area

Detail Area
Status Area

Figure 2-18. UNITY Point Command Dialog Box.


Point Address Lookup Arrow - The Point Address Lookup Arrow is
located on the Left side of the UNITY Point Command dialog box. This
arrow lets the user view the UNITY Point list by address number. Numbers
are listed in numeric order.
Point Descriptor Lookup Arrow - The Point Descriptor Lookup Arrow is
located on the Right side of the UNITY Point Command dialog box. This
arrow lets the user view the UNITY Point list by descriptor. Descriptors are
listed in alphabetical order.
Point Address Field - The Point Address field is used to enter or display the
address number of a UNITY Point.
To enter a point address into the field, click on the field with the mouse.
When the field is selected a vertical line will appear at the left side of the field.
When this line appears, enter the point address.
Point Descriptor Field - The Point Descriptor field is used to enter or
display the descriptor of a UNITY Point. To enter a point descriptor into the
field, click on the field with the mouse. When the field is selected a vertical
line will appear at the left side of the field. When this line appears, enter the
point descriptor.
Commands Area - The Commands area displays the commands available
for a selected point. The commands available are determined by the type of
point selected. For more details on the available commands consult the
appropriate subsystem supplements.

44
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

3.1 The UNITY Point Dialog Box - continued


Status Area - The Status area displays the current status of the selected point.
Status includes the point type (e.g., analog or digital), current value of an analog
point, digital status of a digital point, alarm status, etc.
Detail Area - The Detail area displays information specific to the type of
point selected. The information can include high and low limit levels for
analog points, the source of the last command issued to the point (e.g.,
operator, TIP, EIP), the command priority at which the last command was
issued (e.g., Terry @ 3), the subsystem that uses the point (e.g., Delta 1000,
Tracer 100), and the field point to which the software point is assigned.
Tree Path - The Tree Path gives the location of the point within the Logical
Group Tree. The Root of the Tree is on the left followed by the intervening
levels of the Tree and ending with the group containing the point. See
Appendix H.
3.2 Look up UNITY Points by Address
1) Select the Point Address Lookup Arrow.
The Point Lookup window appears with the points listed numerically by
point number (address) (Figure 2-19).

Figure 2-19. Point Lookup Window.


2) Select the point with the desired number.
Type the number at the keyboard, or use the scroll bar to highlight a point
and click on it.

45
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.3 Look up UNITY Points by Descriptor


1) Select the Point Descriptor Lookup Arrow.
The Point Lookup window appears with the points listed alphabetically by
descriptor (Figure 2-20).

Figure 2-20. Point Lookup Window.


2) Select the point with the desired descriptor.
Either type the descriptor at the keyboard or use the scroll bar to display
the correct point and click on it.
3.4 Request Status for a Point
1) Select Point Commands from the Commands Menu or choose F5.
The Point Command dialog box appears.
2) Enter the point address.
As it is typed, the point address will appear in the Point text box. (Figure
2-21).
Note: Use the Point Lookup feature to search for an unknown point address.

Figure 2-21. Point Command Dialog Box.


3) Click .
The Descriptor, Alarm Condition, Status, and Mode of the point appear
in the Point Status area.
4) Click when finished to close the Point Command dialog box.

46
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

3.5 Command UNITY Points


3.5.1 Command Points from the Menu
1) Select Point Commands from the Commands Menu.
The Point Command dialog box appears (Figure 2-22).
2) Enter the point address.
As it is typed, the point address will appear in the Point text box. (Figure
2-22).
Note: Use the Point Lookup feature to search for an unknown point address.

Figure 2-22. Point Command Dialog Box.


3) Select the button for the desired command.
The command is sent to the point.
4) Click when finished to close the Point Command dialog box.
For more information on commanding specific point types consult the
UNITY subsystem supplements.
3.5.2 Command UNITY Points from Graphic
To command a point from within a UNITY graphic:
1) Position the cursor on the point receiving the command.
When the cursor is properly positioned over the point it will change from
an arrow to a pointing hand (Figure 2-23).

Figure 2-23. Graphic Showing Arrow Positioned Over a Point. (Note: due to
the limitations of the capture software used to produce this figure the cursor
appears as an arrow and not as a pointing hand as described in the text.)

47
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.5.2 Command UNITY Points from Graphic- continued


2) Click on the point.
The Point Command dialog box appears (Figure 2-24).

Figure 2-24. Point Command Dialog Box.


3) Click on the button appropriate to the command being issued.
The command will be sent to the point.
4) Click to close the Point Command dialog box.
3.5.3 Command Points from a Log
Points can be commanded from within a log. To command points from a log:
1) Open the Log.
When a point is selected, a box will appear around the point (Figure 2-25).

Figure 2-25. Log Showing Selected Point.


2) To select a point in the log, double click on it or click on it with the
mouse and choose .
The Point Command dialog box appears (Figure 2-26).

48
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

3.5.3 Command Points from a Log - continued

Figure 2-26. Point Command Dialog Box.


3) Click on the button appropriate to the command being issued and
click to close the dialog box.
The command will be sent to the point.
3.6 Advance Schedules for Points
Generally speaking, Advance Schedules will behave just like normal TOD
Schedules (see Chapter 5 Section 8 - Time of Day Schedules). However, there
are some unusual aspects of Advance Schedules to be aware of.
3.6.1 Modify only existing schedules
The schedule for any ONE of the programmed Seasons can be modified. This
will force that Season to be in effect on the Advance Schedule date.
For example, if a point has a TOD Schedule for Monday-Friday in the Spring
and Summer Seasons, you will NOT be able to add Winter or Fall Season
actions in an Advance Schedule.
Note: Advance Schedules will always run, no matter what season you choose to modify,
and no matter what the current season is.
3.6.2 When will changes take effect?
Normally, you will create Advance Schedules for a day in the near future. If,
however, the day to be changed is today, Advance Schedules will change the
behavior of the point today.
If you create an Advance Schedule for the current day, that schedule becomes
effective between one (1) and two (2) minutes later. The first minute of delay
is due to the need to save the Advance Schedule and then update the current
days file. Schedule updates occur at one minute intervals. The second
minute of delay is due to the update process of the point itself. Point updates
also occur at one minute intervals.
Therefore, Advance Schedules created for the current day will never become
effective less than one minute after creation, and will always become effective
by two minutes after creation.

49
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.6.3 Add an Advance Schedule to a Point


1) Select Point from the Commands menu.
The Point Command dialog box appears (Figure 2-27).
2) Enter the Point Address or click on one of the red arrows to use the
point Lookup feature.
As you type the point address, it will appear in the Point text box.

Figure 2-27. Point Command Dialog Box.


3) Click .
The Advance Scheduling calendar dialog box appears (Figure 2-28).

Figure 2-28. Advance Scheduling Calendar Dialog Box.


4) Select a month for the advance schedule.
After you select a radio button, the arrangement of the day buttons
changes appropriately.
5) Select a day for the advance schedule.
If there is a Time of Day (TOD) Schedule already set for this point, the
Select Season dialog box will appear. (Figure 2-29). If this point has no
TOD, the Advance Schedule dialog box appears (Figure 2-28), skipping
Step 6.

50
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

3.6.3 Add an Advance Schedule to a Point -continued

Figure 2-29. Select Season Dialog Box.


6) Select a season and click .
After you click , the Advance Schedule dialog box appears (Figure
2-30).
Note 1: You can check the message area in the lower, right corner of the Advance
Schedule dialog box for an existing Advance Schedule.
Note 2: The TOD schedule for the point appears in the large window on the Advance
Schedule dialog box.

Figure 2-30. Advance Schedule Dialog Box.


7) You can now modify the existing TOD schedule to make the advance
schedule. Or, if no TOD exists, use the Action and Time boxes to
enter the appropriate information.
If you want the advance schedule to have the point start at 8:15, highlight
the 8:00 Start TOD schedule in the large window by clicking on it. Now
make the changes you need by selecting a different action, or by putting
the appropriate time in. In this example, you would go to the time box and
type 0815. Then click . The change should now be reflected in the
window. Follow this process for the changes you need to make to get the
correct advance schedule.
You may choose the following actions: Start, Set Back, Set Up, Optimum
Duty Cycle, Optimum Stop, Optimum Start, Duty Cycle, Auto, and Stop.
These can be selected by using the arrows on the Action box.
If you modify existing actions, change the action information and click
. As you add new actions, choose the action and click .
Note: All times must be entered in a 24 hour format, omitting the colon (:).
8) Click to close the Advance Schedule dialog box.
9) Click to close the Command Point dialog box.

51
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.6.4 Delete an Advance Schedule


1-6) Complete Steps 1-6 of Section 3.6.3 to open the Advance Schedule
dialog box. (Figure 2-31)

Figure 2-31. Advance Schedule Dialog Box.


7) Delete all of the strategies listed.
One by one, you must highlight each strategy listed in the large window.
Then click . For example, if you wanted to delete the advance
schedule in Figure 2-41, you would highlight the 8:15 Start strategy in the
large window. Then you would click . Now you would have to
highlight the 9:00 Stop strategy in the large window. Click .
8) Click .
An empty schedule warning appears (Figure 2-32).

Figure 2-32. Empty Schedule Warning.


At this point, UNITY erases the Advance Schedule and resets the normal
TOD Schedule for this day to run.
9) Click to close the warning box.
10) Click to close the Point Commands dialog box.

52
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

4 UNITY Alarms
4.1 Acknowledge Alarms
1) Select Acknowledge from the Commands menu or use the F12 key.
The Acknowledge submenu appears directly to the right.
Note: If you use the F12 key, the Acknowledge Alarm dialog appears.
2) Select Alarm from the Acknowledge submenu.
The Acknowledge Alarm dialog box appears (Figure 2-33).

Figure 2-33. Acknowledge Alarm Dialog Box.


3) To acknowledge an alarm, click .
4) Repeat Step 3 until there are no more alarms to acknowledge.
As you acknowledge each alarm, the pending alarm count decreases by one.
The number of alarms pending displays in white text in the header area (at the
top of the screen). The ID of the operator who acknowledged the alarm
appears in the alarm window next to the alarms point (Figure 2-34).

Figure 2-34. Alarm Window Showing Users ID.


5) Click .
There are no more alarms to acknowledge.
4.2 Print Alarms
1) Select Groups from the Logs menu.
The Groups Log dialog box appears (Figure 2-35)

Figure 2-35. Groups Log Dialog Box.


2) If necessary, enter a beginning UNITY group in the Groups: box.
As you type, the three-digit number appears in the box. This is the number of
the first UNITY group to print. If you do not enter a value, the log will begin
with the first group in the system.
3) If necessary, enter an ending UNITY group in the to: box.

53
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.2 Print Alarms - continued


As you type, the three-digit number appears in the box. This is the number
of the last UNITY group to print. If you do not enter a value, the log will
end with the last group in the system.
4) Select the appropriate radio button for the destination of the log.
UNITY formats the printouts just like Status Reports. For more informa-
tion on logs, see chapter 2 Section 6 - Generating Logs (Reports) with
UNITY.
5) Select the Alarm radio button for the type of log.
This will print all points in the selected range of groups that are in alarm.
6) If appropriate, select the Include Remote Points check box.
Including remote points dials up modem connected panels and includes
points on those panels in the log.
Note: This may cause a log to take a long time. The length of time depends on the number
of remote panels, and the number of remote points.
7) Click to print the log.
This sends the log to the selected destination.
4.3 Clear the Alarm Window
1) Select Clear Alarms from the Misc. menu.
This removes all 19 displayed alarms from the window, but does not
acknowledge them. You must acknowledge all alarms individually. After
clearing the alarm window, you will be able to determine if new alarms
have come in.

4.4 Alarm Types


Each UNITY subsystem has alarm types specific to the subsystem.

54
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

5 Event Initiated Messages and Event Initiated Graphics


5.1 Stop Auto EIM Displays
1) Select Auto EIM from the Setup menu.
The Auto EIM dialog box appears (Figure 2-36).

Figure 2-34. Auto EIM Dialog Box.


2) Remove the from the Automatic EIM to Screen check box.
If Automatic EIM to Screen is active (a in the box), click on the box.
If it was not active, leave it alone.
3) Click .
Now, EIMS will not display immediately on the screen.
5.2 Start Auto EIM Displays
1) Select Auto EIM from the Setup menu.
The Auto EIM dialog box appears (Figure 2-37).

Figure 2-37. Auto EIM Dialog Box.


2) Add a to the Automatic EIM to Screen check box.
If Automatic EIM to Screen is not active (there is no in the box), click
on the box. If it is active, leave it alone.
3) Select the Hold Delay field.
Press the tab key or drag across the Hold Delay field.
4) Enter a Hold Delay value.
Type in the number of seconds that you want the system to wait before
displaying Auto EIMS, when you press the Hold button in an Auto EIM
display.
5) Click .
Now, EIMS will display immediately on the screen.

55
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5.3 Acknowledge an Auto EIM


Auto EIMS display on the screen automatically when an appropriate event occurs
(Figure 2-38). Before you can take any other actions, you must acknowledge all
pending Auto EIMS.

Figure 2-38. Typical Auto EIM Display.


1) Read the text of the EIM carefully.
Note any special instructions given by the EIM. Since all printers segre-
gated for alarms will also print EIMS it may not be necessary to write down
the text of each EIM.
2) Click .
This acknowledges the previous EIM, and the next pending EIM automati-
cally displays.
3) Repeat Steps 1 - 2 until the EIM screen disappears.
5.4 Acknowledge a Normal EIM
1) Select Acknowledge from the Commands menu or use the F11 key.
The Acknowledge submenu appears.
Note: If you use the F11 key, then the next EIM automatically displays.
2) Select EIM from the Acknowledge submenu.
The next pending EIM automatically displays (Figure 2-39).

Figure 2-39. Typical EIM Display.


3) Read the text of the EIM carefully.

56
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

5.4 Acknowledge a Normal EIM - continued


Note any special instructions given by the EIM. Remember, all printers
that you segregate for alarms will also print EIMS. Therefore, it may not
be necessary to write down the text of each EIM. Make sure that you
understand the meaning of the message.
4) Click .
This acknowledges the previous EIM, and automatically displays the next
pending EIM.
5) Repeat Steps 1 - 4 until the EIM screen disappears.
5.5 Acknowledge an Event Initiated Graphic (EIG)
1) Select Acknowledge EIG from the Command menu or use the F9 key
to display the EIG on-screen.
2) Click the center of the Navigation icon in the upper left corner.
The graphic closes.

57
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6 Generate Logs (Reports) with UNITY


6.1 Log Types
See Chapter 2 section 2.3.1 to generate Single Group, Groups, Group Type,
and Logical Group Logs. See Chapter 7 section 3.2 for information on IMS
reports. See Chapter 2 section 2.1.2 for information on Logical Group Tree
and Chapter 3 section 3.1 for information on Logical Group Tree Setup.
6.2 Single Group Log
1) Select Single Group from the Logs menu.
The Single Group dialog box appears (Figure 2-40).

Figure 2-40. Single Group Dialog Box.


2) Enter the group that you want to print in the text field (at the top of the
dialog box).
The number you type appears in the Group text box.
3) Select the appropriate radio button for the destination of the log.
4) Click to send the log to the selected printer or screen.
The following is an example of a Single Group Log.

Figure 2-41. Single Group Log.

58
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

6.3 Groups Log


1) Select Groups from the Logs menu.
The Groups Log dialog box appears (Figure 2-42).

Figure 2-42. Group Log Dialog Box.


2) If necessary, enter a beginning UNITY group into the Groups:
box.
As you type, the three-digit number appears in the box. This is the first
UNITY Group to print. If you do not enter a value, the log will begin with
the first group in the system.
3) If necessary, enter an ending UNITY group into the To: box.
As you type, the three-digit number appears in the box. This is the number of
the last UNITY Group to print. If you do not enter a value, the log will end
with the last group in the system.
4) Select the appropriate radio button for the destination of the log.
This is where the log will be printed.
5) Select the appropriate radio button for the type of log.
A Normal log will print out all points in the specified group(s). A Digital
Status log will print only digital points in the specified group(s). An Alarm
log will print out only points that are in alarm.
6) If appropriate, select the Include Remote Points check box.
Including remote points dials up modem connected panels and includes
points on those panels in the log.
Note: This may cause a log to take a long time. The length of time depends on the number
of remote panels, and the number of remote points.
7) Click to print the log.
This sends the log to the screen or the selected printer.
The following figures are examples of the different types of Groups Logs:

Figure 2-43. Groups Log Normal Type.

59
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6.3 Groups Log - continued

Figure 2-44. Groups Log Digital Status Type.

Figure 2-45. Groups Log Alarm Type.

6.4 Group Type Log


1) Select Group Type from the Logs menu.
The Group Types Log dialog box appears (Figure 2-46).

Figure 2-46. Group Type Log Dialog Box.


2) If necessary, enter a beginning UNITY Group Series in the Group
Series: box.
As you type, the number appears in the box. This is the number of the first
UNITY Group Series to print. If you do not enter a value, the log will begin
with the first Group Series in the system.

60
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

6.4 Group Type Log - continued


3) If necessary, enter an ending UNITY Group Series in the to: box.
As you type, the number appears in the box. This is the number of the last
UNITY Group Series to print. If you do not enter a value, the log will end with
the last Group Series in the system.
4) Select the appropriate radio button for the destination of the log.
5) Click to print the log.
This sends the log to the screen or the selected printer.
The following figure is an example of a Group Type Log.

Figure 2-47. Group Type Log.


6.5 Logical Group Log
1) Select Logical Group Log from the Logs menu.
The Logical Group dialog box appears (Figure 2-48).

Figure 2-48. Logical Group Dialog Box.


2) Select the Logical Group that you want to print from the Logical Group
Tree display.
UNITY highlights the selected group.
3) To print a log of the subgroups within the group, click on the Print
Sub Group check box.
4) Select the destination of the log from the Print to: box.
5) Click to send the log to the printer or screen.
The following is an example of a Logical Group Log.

61
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6.5 Logical Group Log - continued

Figure 2-49. Logical Group Log.


6.6 Print Tree
1) Select Print Tree from the Logical Menu.
The Select Printer dialog box appears (Figure 2-50).

Figure 2-50. Select Printer Dialog Box.


2) Select the appropriate printer.
3) Click to print a hardcopy version of the Logical Group Tree
on the selected printer.

62
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

7 UNITY E-Mail
UNITY E-Mail is a means to communicate with other operators you may not
have opportunities to contact during normal working hours.
7.1 Send an E-Mail
To send an E-Mail:
1) Select E-Mail from the Commands menu.
The UNITY E-Mail (Mail List) dialog box appears (Figure 2-51).

Figure 2-51. UNITY E-Mail (Mail List) Dialog Box.


2) Click .
The UNITY E-Mail (Create) dialog box appears (Figure 2-52).

Figure 2-52. UNITY E-Mail (Create) Dialog Box.


3) Click .
The Select Users dialog box appears (Figure 2-53).

Figure 2-53. Select Users Dialog Box.


4) Select the person(s) who will receive the E-Mail from the Available
Users list, then click .
The name(s) disappears from the Available Users list and appears in the
Selected Users list.

63
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7.1 Send an E-Mail - continued


5) Click to close the dialog box.
6) Enter the subject in the Subject: box.
7) If a confirmation receipt is necessary click the Yes radio button for
Confirm:.
8) Enter the message in the Message: area.
9) Click to close the dialog box.
The E-Mail is sent to the selected users.
10) Repeat steps 2 - 9 for each E-Mail being sent.
11) When you have finished sending E-Mail click .
The UNITY E-Mail (Mail List) closes.
7.2 Receive E-Mail
When you first log on to UNITY you will be notified if you have received E-
Mail (Figure 2-54).

Figure 2-54. E-Mail Notification Dialog Box.


1) Click to close the dialog box.
7.3 Read E-Mail
1) Select E-Mail from the Commands menu.
The UNITY E-Mail (Mail List) dialog box appears (Figure 2-55).

Figure 2-55. UNITY E-Mail (Mail List) Dialog Box.


An N indicates unread mail. A C indicates a confirmation of an E-
Mail you sent to another user.
2) Select an E-Mail to read, then click .
The UNITY E-Mail (Read) dialog box opens (Figure 2-56).

64
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 2: Working with UNITY

7.3 Read E-Mail - continued

Figure 2-56. UNITY E-Mail (Read) Dialog Box.


3) After reading the E-Mail click to close the dialog box.
4) Repeat steps 2 - 3 for each unread E-Mail in the list (or if you want
to reread an E-Mail).
5) When you have finished reading your E-Mail click to close
the dialog box.
7.4 Print an E-Mail Message
1) Select E-Mail from the Commands menu.
The UNITY E-Mail (Mail List) dialog box appears (Figure 2-57).

Figure 2-57. UNITY E-Mail (Mail List) Dialog Box.


2) Select an E-Mail from the Mail List.
3) Click .
The Select Printer dialog box appears (Figure 2-58).

Figure 2-58. Select Printer Dialog Box.


4) Select the printer to which the E-Mail will be sent.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
The E-Mail is sent to the selected printer.
6) Repeat steps 2 - 5 for each E-Mail being printed.
7) When you have finished printing E-Mail click to close the
dialog box.

65
Chapter 2: Working with UNITY Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7.5 Delete an E-Mail Message


1) Select E-Mail from the Commands menu.
The UNITY E-Mail (Mail List) dialog box appears (Figure 2-59).

Figure 2-29. UNITY E-Mail (Mail List) Dialog Box.


2) Select an E-Mail from the Mail List.
3) Click to remove the E-Mail from the Mail List.
4) Repeat steps 2 - 3 for each E-Mail being deleted.
5) When you have finished printing E-Mail click to close the
dialog box.

66
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

Chapter Overview
This chapter of the Users Guide to UNITY will tell you:
How to set up the UNITY system
How to set up the UNITY User Interface

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 UNITY Operational Setup


This section outlines procedures for initial UNITY system setup. These proce-
dures will only be used occasionally (new software installed, hardware malfunctions,
etc.)
1.1 Passwords
1.1.1 Add/Edit a Password Setup
1) Select Passwords from the Setup Menu.
The Password submenu appears.
2) Select Edit from the Passwords submenu.
The Edit Passwords dialog box appears (Figure 3-1).

Figure 3-1. Edit Passwords Dialog Box.


3) Enter 1-8 characters for the name of the user in the User Name field then
click . Or, select the user to edit from the list and click .
The Edit User Password dialog box appears (Figure 3-2).

Figure 3-2. Edit User Password Dialog Box.


4) Enter the users password (4-8 characters) in the Password field.
5) Click the arrow on the right of the Seg. File field.
The Segregation File list appears (Figure 3-3).

68
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.1.1 Add/Edit a Password Setup - continued

Figure 3-3. Segregation File List.


6) Select the segregation file for the user, if necessary.
7) Click the arrow on the right side of the Operator Type field.
The Operator Type list appears (Figure 3-4).

Figure 3-4. Operator Type List.


8) Select the users operator type from the list.
9) Enter the time (in minutes) in the Auto Logoff field.
This sets the period of user inactivity UNITY will wait before automatically
logging off.
Note: 0 disables the auto logoff feature.
10) Use the spin box to select the operators command priority level.
The priority number can range from 0-99, where 99 is the highest priority, and
0 is the least. This number designates the level of command authority this
operator will have. Programs, and schedules are also assigned command and
residual priorities. If the operator has a higher priority number than the
program or schedule, the operator will be able to enable, disable, or modify the
program or schedule. If the operator is to command alarms (i.e., disable a fire
alarm) the operator must have a higher priority than the alarm programs.
11) Click .
The Menu Items Password Editor dialog box appears (Figure 3-5). This is the
list of UNITY functions that this operator will have access to.

69
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.1.1 Add/Edit a Password Setup - continued

Figure 3-5. Menu Items Password Editor Dialog Box.


12) Change the status of any items in the list by double-clicking on the item.
The items status changes from Yes to No (or from No to Yes).
Note: Selecting an item and clicking performs the same function as double-clicking
on the item.
13) Click to close the dialog box.
14) Click .
The System Items Password Editor dialog box appears (Figure 3-6).

Figure 3-6. System Items Password Editor Dialog Box.


15) Change the status of any items in the list by double-clicking on the item.
Note: Selecting an item and clicking performs the same function as double-clicking
on the item.
16) Click to close the System Item Password Editor dialog box.
17) Click to close the Edit User dialog box.
18) Click to close the Edit Passwords dialog box.

70
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.1.2 Remove a Password


1) Select Passwords from the Setup Menu.
The Password submenu appears.
2) Select Edit from the Passwords submenu.
The Edit Passwords dialog box appears (Figure 3-7).

Figure 3-7. Edit Passwords Dialog Box.


3) Select a user to delete and click .
The Delete User warning appears (Figure 3-8).

Figure 3-8. Delete Password Warning.


4) Click to delete the selected user.
5) Repeat steps 3 - 4 for each user being deleted.
6) Click to close the dialog box.
1.1.3 Change a Password
For increased security it is recommended that users occasionally change their
passwords. The user that is currently logged onto the system can change his or her
password without entering the Edit Password dialog boxes, if the user has access
to passwords in his/her segregation file. To change the password:
1) Select Passwords from the Setup menu.
2) Select Change from the Password submenu.
The Change Password dialog box appears (Figure 3-15).

Figure 3-15. Change Password Dialog Box.


3) Enter the current password in the Old Password field.

71
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.1.3 Change a Password - continued


4) Enter the new password in the New Password field.
5) Enter the new password in the Confirm Pass. field.
6) Click to change the password.
1.1.4 Print the Password File
1) Select Passwords from the Setup Menu.
The Password submenu appears.
2) Select Print from the Passwords submenu.
The Print Password dialog box appears (Figure 3-16).

Figure 3-16. Print Password Dialog Box.


3) Select the appropriate printer.
4) Click .
This sends the Password Information to the selected printer.
1.1.5 Copy a Password Setup
If you have several people with the same type of access and segregation files, it will
be easier to set up one and copy that file for the rest of the passwords. Only the
set up is copied. Each person is assigned an individual password.
1) Select Passwords from the Setup Menu.
The Password submenu appears.
2) Select Edit from the Passwords submenu.
The Edit Password dialog box appears (Figure 3-17).

Figure 3-17. Edit Password Dialog Box.


3) Select the copy source from the User Name list, and click .
The Copy Password dialog box appears (Figure 3-18).

72
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.1.5 Copy a Password - continued

Figure 3-18. Copy Password Dialog Box.


4) Enter the name of the new user in the To user: edit field, then click
.
The Edit User Password dialog box appears (Figure 3-19).

Figure 3-19. Edit User Password Dialog Box.


5) Enter the password for the new user in the Password: box.
6) Select the segregation file for the user from the Seg. File pull-down list.
7) Select the operator type from the Operator Type pull-down list.
8) Enter the auto logoff time in the Auto logoff: box.
9) Click and to modify the new operators menu and system
access options.
10) Click to close the Edit User Password dialog box.
The new operators name appears in the Edit Password dialog box.
11) Click .

73
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.2 Printer
You can assign up to three printers to any UNITY PC. These printers may
communicate with the PC in parallel or serial mode.
1) Select Printers from the Setup Menu.
The Printer sub-menu appears.
2) Select Printer 1, 2, or 3 from the Printer submenu.
The Setup Printer dialog box appears (Figure 3-24).

Figure 3-24. Setup Printer Dialog Box.


3) Select the appropriate Printer Type radio button for this printer.
This tells UNITY basic information about this printer (Start Bits, Stop Bits,
Parity, etc.). If the printer you want to connect is not in the list, check to see if
it is able to emulate one of the listed printers. Contact Electronic Systems USA,
if you cannot use your printer.
Note: Incorrect connection may damage some printers.
4) Select the Printer Connection radio button for the printer.
This tells UNITY whether the connection will be serial or parallel. If it is a serial
connection, you must also select the COM port and the baud rate. If it is a
parallel connection, you must also select the LPT port.
LPT1 Parallel port #1 LPT2 Parallel port #2
LPT3 Parallel port #3 COM2 Serial port #2
COM3 Serial port #3
Note: Do not use a COM port that is currently being used by a subsystem.
5) Select the Printer Segregation check boxes for this printer.
This tells UNITY what type of information to print.
Fire Alarms with a Fire IPD
Security Alarms with a Security IPD
Automation Alarms with an Automation IPD
Valid Card Access Messages that UNITY generates when a Valid Access occurs
in any card reader (You must also select Security.)
Reports Logs, IMS Reports, and other report type data
Misc. Miscellaneous (everything that isnt covered by the other selections,
e.g., messages)
Status Prints the status of points commanded by the currently running
programs
Command Trace Prints reports generated by the System Data Trace utility

74
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.2 Printer - continued


6) If the printer will use a Segregation File select the Use Seg. File check
box.
A appears in the check box when it has been selected and the Segregation
Files appear in the Segregation Files list.
7) Select the segregation file that will be used by this printer.
Note: The Fire, Security, Automation, and Valid Card Access check boxes will override
the segregation files setup. For example, if the segregation file is setup to report fire
alarms but the Fire check box is not selected, no fire alarms will be printed.
8) Click to close the Setup Printer #? dialog box.
1.3 Header Data
1) Select Header Data from the Setup Menu.
The Set Header Data dialog box appears (Figure 3-25).

Figure 3-25. Set Header Data Dialog Box.


2) Enter your companys name, or other system identification, whichever
you choose.
3) Enter Header Point #1.
Enter the address of the point you want to display in the Header Point #1 area.
The area is between the date display and the company name at the top of the
screen.
Note: Do not use points from remote panels for the header points. Since these points are
remote, the PC must dial out to determine the status of the point. As long as this point
is in the header, the modem will be linked with the remote panel.
4) Enter Header Point #2.
Enter the address of the point you want to display in the Header Point #2 area.
This area is between the time display and the company name at the top of the
screen.
5) Click .

75
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.4 Time/Date
1) Select Time/Date from the Setup menu.
The Set Time/Date dialog box appears (Figure 3-26).

Figure 3-26. Set Time/Date Dialog Box.


2) Enter the correct time in the Time: field.
Enter the time in 24 hour format.
3) Enter the correct date in the Date: field.
Enter the date in Month/Day/Year format.
4) Click .
The Time and Date now update.

WARNING! The Server PC maintains the Time & Date parameters


used by UNITY. If the Time or Date is changed on the
Server, the new Time or Date is used by the entire UNI-
TY system. As new UNITY Clients Log On to the network,
each PCs Time/Date clock will change to the Servers
setting.

1.5 Daylight Savings Time Setup


Follow this procedure to setup Daylight Savings Time (DST) for OS/2 and your
UNITY system. When this is properly configured, a UNITY program will set the
system clock forward 60 minutes in the spring and a second one will set it back 60
minutes in the fall. When the system clock is reset, UNITY will broadcast the new
time to the system, including the users and the field panels which are synchronized
with UNITY. This program must ONLY be set up on the Main IRM. If other
computers are also configured this way, multiple increment/decrement time
commands will be broadcast and incorrect system times will result. Once the
clock is reset for DST in the spring, the REXX program to start DST will not run
again for a year or until the fall reset has been completed, even if UNITY is
shutdown and the system is rebooted. However, the system will retain the correct
time in the event of a system shutdown.
1) You will need to place the DST.URX file in the ..\UNITY\UI\REXX
directory.
2) Set up the holiday schedule for H8 and H9.
See Section 1.5.1.
3) Set up theUNITY programs to run the REXX script which starts and
stops DST.
See Section 1.5.2.
4) Set up the time initiated programs to activate the DST schedules.
See Section 1.5.3.

76
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.5.1 Set up the Holiday Schedule for H8 and H9


For information on holiday schedules, refer to Section 1.6.
1) Select Holiday Schedule from the Setup menu.
The calendar will display (Figure 3-27).

Figure 3-27. Set Holiday Schedule Calendar.


2) Set H8 as the DST start date.
Choose the April radio button and click on the first Sunday. When the Holiday
Type Selection window (Figure 3-28) appears, select Holiday 8 and click
.

Figure 3-28. Holiday Type Selection.


3) Set H9 as the DST stop date.
Choose the October radio button and click on the last Sunday. When the
Holiday Type Selection window (Figure 3-28) appears, select Holiday 9 and
click .

77
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.5.2 Set up UNITY Programs to Start and Stop DST


For information on UNITY programs, refer to Chapter 5 Section 2.
1) Select Programs from the Edit menu.
The Edit Programs window displays (Figure 3-29). Use the following proce-
dure to create two programs. One program starts DST, and the second stops
DST.

Figure 3-29. Edit Program Dialog Box.


2) To create a program, enter the name into the Filename field and click
.
The Edit Program name window appears (Figure 3-30).

Figure 3-30. Edit Program Name Dialog Box.


3) Click .
The Add command window displays (Figure 3-31).

Figure 3-31. Add Command Box. Figure 3-32. Run REXX Dialog Box.

78
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.5.2 Set up UNITY Programs to Start and Stop DST - continued


4) Click to insert a REXX script into the program.
The Run REXX window displays (Figure 3-32).
5) Enter DST.URX into the REXX Script field.
6) Enter the parameter 60 START into the Arguments field for the DST
Start program. Or, enter the parameter 60 STOP into the Arguments
field for the DST Stop program.
The 60 indicates the number of minutes the program will increment/decre-
ment the system time. Click to close the dialog boxes, and click
to exit.
Note: If you prefer, you may also add a few Print Text commands to your program to indicate
to the operator when the program executes. See Figure 3-30.

1.5.3 Set up the TIPs to Activate the DST Schedules


For information on TIPs, refer to Chapter 5 Section 7.
1) Select TIP from the Edit menu.
The Edit TIPs dialog box displays (Figure 3-33).

Figure 3-33. Edit TIPs Dialog Box.


2) Select the H8 checkbox, enter 02:00 in the Time field, and click .
The Edit TIP Schedule dialog box displays (Figure 3-34).

Figure 3-34. Modify TIP Schedules Dialog Box.


3) Click .
The Add Program to TIP dialog box displays (Figure 3-35).

79
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.5.3 Set up the TIPs to Activate the DST Schedules - continued

Figure 3-35. Add Program to TIP Dialog Box.


4) Select the DST Start program from the list and click twice to
return to the Edit TIPs dialog box.
5) Select the H9 checkbox, enter 02:00 in the Time field, and click .
The Edit TIP Schedule dialog box displays (Figure 3-34).
6) Click .
The Add Program to TIP dialog box displays (Figure 3-35).
7) Select the DST Stop program from the list and click .

1.6 Holiday Schedules


1) Select Holiday Schedule from the Setup Menu.
The Set Holiday Schedule dialog box appears (Figure 3-36).

Figure 3-36. Set Holiday Schedule Dialog Box.


2) Select the appropriate Month radio button.
After you select a month, the arrangement of the day buttons changes
appropriately.
Note: UNITY selects the current month automatically.

80
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.6 Holiday Schedules - continued


3) Click the appropriate Day button.
The Holiday Type Selection dialog box appears (Figure 3-37). The holiday type
for the day you selected is set with this dialog box.

Figure 3-37. Holiday Type Selection Dialog Box.


4) Select the type of holiday.
Click on one of the Holidays 1 - 9, or None. A single holiday type can be
assigned to multiple days throughout the year. For example, H1 could be a full
day off. Therefore, you could use it for New Years Day, Thanksgiving, and
Christmas.
5) Click in the Holiday Type dialog box.
UNITY now records your Holiday Type selection. The holiday type now
appears on the calendar on the Set Holiday Schedule dialog box. (Figure 3-38).

Figure 3-38. Set Holiday Schedule Dialog Box.


6) Repeat steps 2 - 4, as necessary.
Enter all of the holidays for the entire year, and assign types.
7) Click in the Holiday Schedule dialog box.
UNITY records the Holiday Schedule and the Set Holiday Schedule dialog box
closes.

81
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.7 Beeper Setup


1) Select Beeper Setup from the Setup menu.
The Beeper Setup dialog box appears (Figure 3-39).

Figure 3-39. Beeper Setup Dialog Box.


2) Select the segregation file from the Segregation File list (Figure 3-40).

Figure 3-40. Beeper Setup Dialog Box with Segregation File List.
3) Select the point type from the list in the Point Type box.
The alarms associated with the point type will appear in the list in the Alarms box.
4) Click in the Point Type box.
The Select Alarms dialog box appears (Figure 3-41).

Figure 3-41. Select Alarms Dialog Box.

82
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.7 Beeper Setup - continued


5) Select the alarms the point type will use to trigger the beeper.
Initially all alarm types associated with the points engineering unit will appear
in the Available box. To move an alarm from the Available list to the Selected
list, click . To move an alarm type from the Selected list to the
Available list, click . Continue adding or deleting until you have
selected the alarms the point type will use to trigger the beeper.
6) Click to close the dialog box.
The selected alarm types appear in the Alarms box of the Beeper Setup dialog
box.
7) Select an alarm that will sound a single beep when an alarm condition
occurs, and click .
An asterisk (*) appears next to the alarm indicating that it has been set for a
single beep. Generally, a single beep will be used for non-critical alarms. (e.g.,
a return-to-normal.)
8) Repeat steps 2 - 7 for each point type. When all point types have been
setup, click to close the dialog box.
1.8 Point Segregation
Point Segregation describes which points or types of points are available to a user.
Points or Point Types that are not segregated for a user are invisible to that user.
1) Select Point Segregation from the Setup menu.
The Set Point Segregation dialog box appears (Figure 3-42).

Figure 3-42. Set Point Segregation Dialog Box.


2) Select a Point Segregation file from the Point Segregation file list then
click .
The Current Point Segregation dialog box appears (Figure 3-43). This is a view-
only window allowing you to see which points are available if the segregation
file is chosen. Selecting a point segregation file here will choose the segregation
file for this particular UI. However, when a user with a different segregation file
logs on to this UI, the users segregation file will replace the segregation file for
the UI.
Note: When you click on , you are selecting the highlighted segregation file for
the terminal you are currently using. You are viewing the highlighted segregation file.
From this screen you do not have the ability to edit the segregation file. That must be
done through the Edit menu. See section 1.8.1

83
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.8 Point Segregation - continued

Figure 3-43. Current Point Segregation Dialog Box.


3) Click to close the Current Point Segregation dialog box.
4) Click to choose the segregation file and close the Set Point
Segregation dialog box.
1.8.1 Add/Modify a Point Segregation File
1) Choose Segregation Files from the Edit menu.
The Edit Segregation Files dialog box appears (Figure 3-44).

Figure 3-44Edit Segregation Files Dialog Box.


2) Click to add a new segregation file, or highlight a segregation file
and click .
The Edit Segregation Files: Add (or Modify) dialog box will appear (Figure 3-
45). If you are adding a segregation file, the Selected field will be blank. If you
are changing an existing file, the Selected field will list all the points currently
available for this segregation file. If you are adding a file, you must enter a file
name into the File field.
3) To select a point for this segregation file, highlight the appropriate point
in the Available field and click . To remove a previously
selected point from the segregation file, highlight the point in the
Selected field and click .
Click to move all the points from the Available list to the Selected list
or click to move all selected points back to the Available list.

84
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.8.1 Add/Modify a Point Segregation File - continued

Figure 3-45. Edit Segregation Files: Modify Dialog Box.


4) Click to accept the changes.
5) Click to close the Edit Segregation Files dialog box.
1.8.2 Copy a Segregation File
1) Choose Segregation Files from the Edit menu.
The Edit Segregation Files dialog box appears (Figure 3-44).
2) To copy an existing segregation file, highlight it and click .
The Edit Segregation Files: Copy dialog box appears (Figure 3-46). The points
in the segregation file of the copied file appear in the Selected list.

Figure 3-46. Edit Segregation File: Copy Dialog Box.


3) Enter a name for the file into the File field.
4) Modify the Selected points file, if necessary.
5) Click to accept the changes and close the dialog box.
The new segregation file appears in the list of the Edit Segregation Files
window.
6) Click to close the Edit Segregation Files dialog box.

85
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.8.3 Delete a Segregation File


1) Choose Segregation Files from the Edit menu.
The Edit Segregation Files dialog box appears (Figure 3-44).
2) To delete an existing segregation file, highlight it and click .
A message box will appear to confirm the deletion (Figure 3-47).

Figure 3-47. Message Box.


3) Click to delete the segregation file.
The segregation file disappears from the list in the Edit Segregation Files
window.
4) Click to close the Edit Segregation Files dialog box.
1.9 Energy Management System (EMS) Defaults
1) Select EMS Defaults from the Setup menu.
The Global EMS Information dialog box appears (Figure 3-48).

Figure 3-48. Global EMS Information Dialog Box.


2) Select the appropriate Season radio button.
The current season will be whatever you set up here. It will remain this season
until you come back here and change it.
3) Select the appropriate Mode radio button.
Selectwhichheating/coolingmodeyoursystemwillbeinduringthisseason.
4) Enter the default parameters for each item into the Defaults area.
These are the default values you set for your system.
5) Select the outside air point.
6) Click to close the Global EMS Information dialog box.

86
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.10 Alarm Colors


If your system is a UL system, Alarm Colors will be grayed out in the Setup menu.
You may not change the default colors of alarms in a UL system.
1) Select Alarm Colors from the Setup Menu.
The Setup Alarm Colors dialog box appears (Figure 3-49).

Figure 3-49. Setup Alarm Colors Dialog Box.


2) Select an Alarm Type to change.
Click on an Alarm Type name (RETURN NORM, HIGH ALARM, LOST ALARM,
etc.) in the left-hand list.
3) Select the color for that Alarm Type.
Click one of the Color names in the right-hand list. The Alarm Type name will
change color.
Note: Clicking will set the Alarm Type colors to the default colors.
4) Repeat steps 2 - 3, as necessary.
5) Click to close the dialog box
1.11 Tree Colors
1) Select Tree Colors from the Setup Menu.
The Setup Logical Tree Colors dialog box appears (Figure 3-50).

Figure 3-50. Setup Logical Tree Colors Dialog Box.


2) Select a Tree Element to change.
Click on an element name (Background Highlighted, Collapse Sign, Tree Link,
etc.) in the left-hand list.
3) Select the color for that Tree Element.
Click one of the Color names in the right-hand list. The Tree Element changes
color.
4) Repeat steps 2 - 3, as necessary.
5) Click to close the Setup Logical Tree Colors dialog box.

87
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.12 Auto Event Initiated Message (EIM)


1) Select Auto EIM from the Setup menu.
The Set Auto EIM dialog box appears (Figure 3-51).

Figure 3-51. Set Auto EIM Dialog Box.


2) If EIMs are to be sent to the screen, select the Automatic EIM to
Screen check box.
A will appear in the Automatic EIM to Screen checkbox.
3) Enter the Hold Delay in the Hold Delay (0-3600 seconds): box.
Hold Delay determines how long an EIM will be put on hold until redisplaying
itself.
Note: Placing an EIM on hold will not acknowledge the EIM.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
1.13 Update Intervals
1) Select Update Intervals from the Setup menu.
The Set Update Intervals dialog box appears (Figure 3-52).

Figure 3-52. Set Update Intervals Dialog Box.


2) Enter the Graphic Update Interval in the Graphic Update Interval (5 -
60
sec.): box.
The Graphic Update Interval determines how frequently the data displayed on
a graphic is updated.
3) Enter the Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) Update Interval in the DDE
Update Interval (5-300 sec.): box.
The DDE Update Interval determines the frequency that UNITY sends point
information to linked applications (such as Microsoft Excel). For more
information on using DDE with UNITY, see Chapter 5 Section 11 - REXX
programs.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
1.14 Station Setup
Station Setup allows multiple UNITY workstations to be assigned the same Point
Segregation files at once. Each terminal may be assigned to only one station at any
time, however, a terminal may have its station assignment changed. The assign-
ment change can be initiated either by a time initiated program (TIP) or an
operator. Station Setup also allows REXX Scripts to be run on specific PCs.

88
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.14.1 Assign a Station to a Terminal


1) Select Station Setup from the Setup menu.
The Station Setup dialog box appears (Figure 3-53).

Figure 3-53. Station Setup Dialog Box.


2) Select a Station Assignment from the list and click .
The new Station Assignment appears next to Current Selection:
3) Click to close the dialog box.
1.14.2 Add/Modify a Descriptor
1) Select Station Setup from the Setup menu.
The Station Setup dialog box appears (Figure 3-54).

Figure 3-54. Station Setup Dialog Box.


2) Select a Station Assignment from the list and click or double click
on the station.
The Station Descriptor dialog box appears (Figure 3-55).

Figure 3-55. Station Descriptor Dialog Box.


3) Enter the new descriptor in the text box.
The Station Descriptor dialog box disappears and the new descriptor appears in
the Station Assignment list.
4) Check the Status Only box if the station is a remote PC.
Checking the Status Only box will display a * beside the Station descriptor
89
5) Click to close the dialog box.
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.15 Command Trace


The Command Trace Setup defines the information available in the Command Trace
report. The Command Trace report is a list of commands issued by UNITY users
and programs.
1.15.1 Command Trace Setup
1) Select Command Trace from the Setup menu.
The Command Trace Settings (Main Screen) dialog box appears (Figure 3-56).

Figure 3-56. Command Trace Settings (Main Screen) Dialog Box.


2) Set File Storage Enabled.
If the report information will be stored in a datafile, set the File Storage Enabled
status to Yes. If the information will not be stored, change the status to No. To
change the status double-click on File Storage Enabled or select File Storage
Enabled and click .
3) Double-click on File Point List File or select File Point List File in the list
box and click .
The Point File Name dialog box appears (Figure 3-57).

Figure 3-57. Point File Name Dialog Box.


4) Select the name for the Point List File and click .
The Point File Name dialog box disappears. The file name appears in the
Command Trace dialog box next to the File Point List File.

90
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.15.1 Command Trace Setup - continued


5) Set On-line Printing Enabled.
If report information will be sent to a printer set On-line Printing Enabled status
to Yes. If the information will not be printed set the status to No. To change the
status double-click on On-line Printing Enabled or select On-line Printing
Enabled and click .
6) Double-click on Print Point List File or select Print Point List File in the
list box and click .
The Point File Name dialog box appears (Figure 3-58).

Figure 3-58. Point File Name Dialog Box.


7) Select the name for the Point List File and click .
The Point File Name dialog box disappears. The file name appears in the
Command Trace dialog box next to the File Point List File.
8) Double-click Print To Which Station or select Print to Which Station and
click .
The Station ID dialog box appears (Figure 3-59).

Figure 3-59. Station ID Dialog Box.


9) Select the Station number to which the report will be printed and click
.
The Station ID dialog box disappears. The station number appears in the
Command Trace dialog box next to Print To Which Station.
Note: If All Stations is selected, on line printing occurs at every station.
10) Click .
The Command Trace Settings (File Options) dialog box appears (Figure 3-60).

91
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.15.1 Command Trace Setup - continued

Figure 3-60. Command Trace Settings (File Options) Dialog Box.


SelecttheFileOptionstheCommandTracereportwilluse.Theseoptionsarediscussed
in more detail at the end of this section. Selected options will have Yes next to their
names.Toselectanoptioneitherdouble-clickonitsnameorselectitsnameandclick
.Thissameprocesscanbeusedtode-selectanoption.De-selectedoptionshave
No next to their names.
Note: The list of options is larger than the list box in the dialog box. To view the other options
available use the scroll bar to scroll through the list.
11) Click .
The Command Trace Settings (Print Options) dialog box appears (Figure 3-
61).

Figure 3-61. Command Trace Settings (Print Options) Dialog Box.


Select the Print Options the Command Trace report will use. These options are
discussed in more detail at the end of this section.
Selected options will have Yes next to their names. To select an option either
double-click on its name or select its name and click . This same process
can be used to de-select an option. Unselected options have No next to their
names.
Note: The list of options is larger than the list box in the dialog box. To view the other options
available use the scroll bar to scroll through the list.
12) After all Command Trace options have been selected click .

92
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

1.15.2 Command Trace Options


Digital Commands - Traces digital commands (e.g., ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE)
Analog Commands - Traces analog commands (e.g., INC, DEC, etc.)
Misc. Commands - Traces miscellaneous commands (e.g., logs, system com-
mands, etc.)
Commanded By Any User - Traces commands issued by any user.
Commanded By Field Operator - Traces commands issued from the field, e.g.,
a command issued from a portable PC.
Commanded By EIP - Traces commands issued by Event Initiated Programs
Commanded By TIP - Traces commands issued by Time Initiated Programs
Commanded By TOD - Traces commands issued by Time Of Day schedules
Commanded By Demand Control - Traces commands issued by the Demand
Control program
Commanded By Calc Point - Traces commands issued by a Calc Point program
Commanded By CIP - Traces commands issued by a Card Initiated Program
Commanded By Auto Restore - Traces commands issued by UNITY to JC85
panels after restoration of communications (Applies only to systems with the
JC85 subsystem)
Note: The Commands and Commanded By options must be used together, i.e., at least one
of each must be selected for either to work. Example: Selecting Digital Commands
and Commanded by Any User will cause Command Trace to trace all digital
commands issued by all users.
Card Commands - Traces card commands (e.g., IN CARD, OUT CARD, LOST
CARD, etc.)
Command Errors from Programs - Records all command errors returned from
programs.
Command Errors from EMS - Records all command errors returned from the
Energy Management System.
Edit Of Groups - Records changes made to group information and identifies
the user who made the change. The changes covered are: Save Group and
Delete Group.
Edit Of Cards - Records changes made to card information and identifies the
user who made the change. The changes covered by Edit of Cards are:
Maximum Number of Cards, Save Card Group, Delete Card Group, Card
Schedule, Save Card, Delete Card.
Edit Of Schedules - Records changes made to schedule information and
identifies the user who made the change. The changes recorded are: Save
Schedule, Delete Schedule, Save Advance Schedule, and Delete Advance
Schedule.
Edit Of Programs - Records changes made to programs and identifies the who
made the change. The changes recorded are: Save Program, Delete Program,
Enable Program, Disable Program, Save EIP, Delete EIP, Save TIP, Delete
TIP, Save CIP and Delete CIP.
Edit Of Misc. - Records changes made to miscellaneous system information and
identifies the user who made the change. The changes recorded are: Edit
Command Trace, Edit Password, and Edit Segregation.
System Status Changes - Records changes in system status. The changes
recorded are: User Up, User Down, System Shutdown, Subsystem Up,
Subsystem Down, IRM up, and IRM Down.
Acknowledges - Records the identity of the users who have acknowledged
pending alarms, EIMs, and EIGs.
Operator Logon/Logoff - Records operator logon and logoff activity
Program Activity - Records program activity. Recorded activity includes: Start
Program, Start OIP, Start CIP, Start TIP, Start EIP, Start EMS, and Stop
Program.
Misc. System Activity - Records miscellaneous system activity. Recorded
activity includes: New Time, Datafile Backup, Scan Field, Reset All Points,
and Run REXX script.
EST Commands - Records all commands issued by the EST subsystem. EST
commands recorded include: EST Actions, EST Sequences, EST Panel Com-
mands, EST System Commands, EST Time Control, and EST Data Line.

93
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2 User Interface Setup


2.1 Logical Group Tree Setup
2.1.1 Add a Logical Group
1) Select Edit w/Grid from the Logical menu.
Edit (Grid) appear beneath the current time (in the header area of the screen).
2) Select a Group.
Determine which group will be the parent of your new group. Click on the name
of the parent group. The parent logical group display appears with the Logical
Group Tool Box in the lower left corner (Figure 3-62).

Figure 3-62. Logical Group Tool Box


3) Add a sub-group.
Click on the New Group Tool (Figure 3-63) in the Tool Box and drag the
Group Marker (the words New Group) to the right and release (the exact
location is not important).

Figure 3-63. New Group Tool.

When you release the mouse button, the Rename: Logical Group/Graph
dialog box appears (Figure 3-64).

Figure 3-64. Rename: Logical Group/Graph Dialog Box.


4) Enter a name into the Logical Group Name field.
As you type the name, the text will replace the name New Group. New Group
is the default name of all new logical groups. Selecting the Cancel button without
entering a new name, enters New Group as the name.
5) Select a graphic from the list of graphics to add.
Use this to assign a graphic to your new group. If you are not assigning a graphic, skip
thisstep.Youcaneitherselectanamefromthedisplayedlist(byclickingwiththemouse),
oryoucantypethenameofthegraphicintotheFilenametextbox.Allgraphicsassigned
must be in .PCX format.
6) Click .
The new Logical Group name appears in the Master Group display.
7) Select Run from the Logical menu.
Edit (Grid) disappear from the header area beneath the time display.

94
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

2.1.2 Add a Point to a Logical Group


1) Select Edit w/ Grid from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) appear beneath the current time (in the header area
of the screen).
2) Select a Group.
Determine which group will contain the new point. Click on the name of that
group. The logical group display appears with the Logical Group Tool Box in
the lower left corner.
3) Add a point.
Click on the New Point Tool (Figure 3-65) and drag the Point Status Display
marker (a box with six asterisks) to the right of the screen (the exact location
is not important for this example).
Note: A maximum of 255 points can be assigned to a graphic.

Figure 3-65. New Point Tool.

When you release the mouse button, the ASCII Option dialog box appears
(Figure 3-66).

Figure 3-66. ASCII Option Dialog Box.


4) Enter the point address.
As you type, the point address appears in the point field.
5) Select the background color.
Select either the Transparent radio button or the Black radio button. If the text
does not display well against the graphic, select the Black radio button.
6) Select the point information to be displayed from the Display Selection box.
Point number - Displays the points address number
Point Descriptor - Displays the points descriptor
Alarm Condition - Displays the points current alarm condition
Analog Value - Displays the analog points value (this will be disabled for digital
points)
Engineering Unit - Displays the points assigned engineering unit
Mode - Displays the points current mode (Normal /Fixed/Test)
7) Select a Font Type for how you want the characters to be displayed.
8) Select a Font Size for the characters to be displayed.

95
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.1.2 Add a Point to a Logical Group - continued


9) Select the number of Decimal Places you want displayed for the analog value.
10) Click .
The point address appears where you placed it on the graphic. When you set the
system back into the Run mode, the Point Status Display will replace the point
address.
11) Select Run from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) disappear from the header area beneath the time
display.
2.1.3 Add a Bar Chart to a Logical Group
1) Select Edit w/Grid from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) appear beneath the current time (in the header area
of the screen).
2) Select a Group.
Determine which group will contain the bar chart. Click on the groups name.
The logical group display appears.
3) Add a bar graph.
Click on either the Horizontal Bar Tool or the Vertical Bar Tool (Figure 3-67)
and drag the Bar Chart marker (a horizontal or vertical box) to the right of the
screen (the exact location is not important for this example).

Figure 3-67. Horizontal and Vertical Bar Tools.

When you release the mouse button, the Bar Option dialog box (Figure 3-68)
appears.

Figure 3-68. Bar Option Dialog Box.


4) Enter the point address or click on one of the red arrows to use the Point
Lookup feature.
As you type, the point address appears in the point field.
Note: Since digital points are only two state the do not work well in bar charts. Bar charts
are only useful with analog data.
5) Select the range for the bar chart.
Enter the low and high limits for the bar chart in the Range: to fields.
6) Select the background and foreground colors for the bar chart.
The background color displays on the left of a horizontal bar chart or at the
bottom of a vertical bar chart.

96
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

2.1.3 Add a Bar Chart to a Logical Group - continued


7) Select the Display Range and/or the Display Value check boxes, if needed.
The Display Range check box causes the high and low limits for the bar chart to
display.
The Display Value check box causes the current analog value for the point to
display.
The background for the range and value numbers is normally black. If this is
not desirable select the Transparent Back check boxes to make the background
transparent.
8) Click .
The bar chart marker appears where you placed it on the graphic. When you set
the system back into the Run mode, the bar chart will replace the bar chart
marker.
9) Select Run from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) disappear from the header area beneath the time
display.
2.1.4 Add a Cut Out to a Logical Group
1) Select Edit/w Grid from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) appear beneath the current time (in the header area
of the screen).
2) Select a Group.
Determine which group will contain the Cut Out. Click on the groups name.
The logical group display appears.
3) Add a cutout.
Click on the Cut Out Tool (Figure 3-69) and drag the Cut Out marker (a square
box) to the right of the screen (the exact location is not important for this
example).

Figure 3-69. Cut Out Tool.

When you release the mouse button, the Cut Out Option dialog box (Figure
3-70) appears.

Figure 3-70. Cut Out Option Dialog Box.


4) Enter the point address.
As you type, the point address appears in the point field.
5) Select the X and Y coordinates for the Cut Out.
The X and Y coordinates determine how far from the bottom left corner the
Cut Out will appear.
2.1.4 Add a Cut Out to a Logical Group - continued
97
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
6) Select the width and height for the Cut Out.
The size of the Cut Out should be made as close to the size of the graphics
displayed by the Cut Out as possible. However, the size can be adjusted later with
the mouse when you are in the Edit mode.
7) If the point is a digital point, select the cutout for each type of digital data
associated with the point (Figure 3-71).

Figure 3-71. Cut Out Option Dialog Box Showing Digital Point Format.
8) If the point is an analog point, enter the Lower and Upper Limits for each
of the cutouts used (Figure 3-72).

Figure 3-72. Cut Out Option Dialog Box Showing Analog Point Format.
9) Click .
The Cut Out marker appears where you placed it on the graphic. When you set
the system back into the Run mode, the Cut Out will replace the Cut Out
marker.
10) Select Run from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) disappear from the header area beneath the time
display.
2.1.5 Use Flood Fill in a Logical Group
1) Select Edit/w Grid from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) appear beneath the current time (in the header area
of the screen).
2) Select a Group.
Determine the group in which you are going to use Flood Fill. Click on the
groups name. The logical group display appears.
2.1.5 Use Flood Fill in a Logical Group - continued

98
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup
3) Add a Flood Fill.
Click on the Flood Fill Tool (Figure 3-73) and drag the Flood Fill marker (a set
of crosshairs) to a solid colored area of the graphic.
Note: If the Flood Fill marker is positioned off-screen the Flood Fill will not work. The Flood
Fill marker must be positioned so that it is visible on screen.

Figure 3-73. Flood Fill Tool.

CAUTION! Use Flood Fill only on small, solid colored areas bounded
by solid colors. The colors used for a Flood Fill should be
different from the colors surrounding the Flood Filled
area. Flood Fill will fill any contiguous (unbroken) area
with color. If Flood Fill does not seem to function correct-
ly it may be that the area it has been placed on is a
dithered color rather than a solid color (this is especially
true if a high res video card is being used). Flood Fill
DOES NOT permanently alter the graphic.

When you release the mouse button, the Flood Fill dialog box (Figure 3-74)
appears.

Figure 3-74. Flood Fill Dialog Box.


4) Enter the point address.
As you type, the point address appears in the point field. The appearance of the
Flood Fill dialog box changes to reflect the type of point selected (Figures 3-
75 and 3-76).

Figure 3-75. Flood Fill Dialog Box for a Digital Point.


2.1.5 Use Flood Fill in a Logical Group - continued

99
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Figure 3-76. Flood Fill Dialog Box for an Analog Point.


5) Select the event type that will change the Flood Fill color.
Select either the Alarm Condition or the Point Status radio button.
6) Select the analog or digital data that will control the color displayed by the
Flood Fill.
Flood Fill can use up to four colors. The colors can represent the condition of a
digital point (e.g., Normal Off, Normal On, Alarm Off, Alarm On) or a range of
analog values.
Note: If Alarm Condition is selected as the event type the systems alarm colors will be used.
The alarm colors cannot be changed using Flood Fill.
7) Click .
The Flood Fill marker appears in-place on the graphic. When you set the system
back into the Run mode, a Flood Fill color will replace the Flood Fill marker.
8) Select Run from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) disappear from the header area beneath the time
display.
2.1.6 Add Text to a Logical Group
1) Select Edit/w Grid from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) appear beneath the current time (in the header area
of the screen).
2) Select a Group.
Determine the group to which you are going to add text. Click on the groups
name. The logical group display appears.
3) Add Text.
Click on the Text Tool (Figure 3-77) and drag the Text marker (a rectangular box)
to the right of the screen (the exact location is not important for this example).

Figure 3-77. Text Tool.

When you release the mouse button, the Text dialog box (Figure 3-78) appears.
2.1.6 Add Text to a Logical Group - continued

100
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

Figure 3-78. Text Dialog Box.


4) Enter the text in the Text Descriptor field.
As you type, the text appears in the Text Descriptor field.
5) Select whether or not the text will have a transparent background.
If the text will have a transparent background, check the Transparent Background
check box. If Transparent Background is not checked the text will have a black
background.
6) Select the text color from the Text Color: box.
7) Select the background color from the Background Color: box.
Skip this step if Transparent Background was selected.
8) Select the font type for the text from the Font Type list.
9) Select the font size for the text from the Font Size list.
10) Click .
The Text marker appears in place on the graphic. When you set the system back
into the Run mode, the entered text will replace the Text marker.
11) Select Run from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) disappear from the header area beneath the time
display.
2.1.7 Remove a Logical Group
1) Select Edit/w Grid from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) appear beneath the current time (in the header area
of the screen).
2) Select a Group.
Determine which group is the parent of the group you want to remove. Click
on the name of the parent group. The parent logical group display appears.
3) Remove a sub-group.
Click on the Group Marker of the group you want to remove, drag it to the Trash
Can icon located in the lower-right-hand corner of the screen (Figure 3-79). When
the lid of the Trash Can pops up, release the mouse button.

Figure 3-79. Trash Can Icon.


2.1.7 Remove a Logical Group - continued

101
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
Note: If the group contains any sub-groups it cannot be removed. To remove a group containing
sub-groups, the sub-groups must be removed first.
4) Select Run from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) disappear from the header area beneath the time
display.

2.1.8 Remove a Point from a Logical Group


1) Select Edit/w Grid from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) appear beneath the current time (in the header area
of the screen).
2) Select a Group.
Determine which group contains the point that you want to remove. Click on
the name of that group. The logical group display appears.
3) Remove a point.
Click on the Point Marker of the point you want to remove and drag it to the
Trash Can icon located in the lower-right-hand corner of the screen (Figure 3-
80). When the lid of the Trash Can pops up, release the mouse button.

Figure 3-80. Trash Can Icon.


4) Select Run from the Logical menu.
The words Edit (Grid) disappear from the header area beneath the time
display.
2.1.9 Rename a Logical Group
1) Select Rename from the Logical menu.
The word Rename appears beneath the current time (in the header area of
the screen).
2) Select a Group.
Determine which group you want to assign a different graphic or rename. Click
on the name of that group. The Rename: Logical Group/Graph dialog box
appears (Figure 3-81).

Figure 3-81. Rename: Logical Group/Graph Dialog Box.


2.1.9 Rename a Logical Group - continued

102
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup
3) If necessary, select a new graphic from the list.
You can either select a name from the displayed list (by clicking with the mouse),
or you can type the name of the graphic into the File Name text box. Clicking
keeps the current graphic (or none).
4) If necessary, enter a new name in the Logical Group Name field.
As you type the name, the text will replace the existing name. Clicking keeps
the current group name.
5) Click .
The new Logical Group name appears in the Master Group display.
2.1.10 Modify Points in a Logical Group
You must have the graphic displayed on screen to modify its points.
1) Select Edit w/Grid from the Logical menu.
2) Double-click on the point being edited.
The appropriate dialog box for the point type being edited appears.
3) Make needed changes to the point.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
5) Select Run from the Logical menu.
2.1.11 Open/Close Groups in Logical GroupTree
Branches (collections of groups and sub-groups) can be opened or closed as
necessary. Opening and closing branches lets you see only the tree sections you
need. Closing unneeded branches reduces screen clutter making it easier to view
on-screen information.
Figure 3-82shows a tree with all branches closed. Note that only the Master Group
and its branches are visible. This is the lowest level of the Logical Group Tree.

Figure 3-82. Master Group and Branches.


To open a branch, click the arrow at the left of the branchs name. Figure 3-83
shows the Logical Group Tree with an open branch.

Figure 3-83. Master Group with New Group 1 Branch Opened.


To close a branch, click the arrow at the left of the branchs name. Branches at the
highest level of the Tree cannot be opened (they contain no sub-groups).
2.1.12 Move Groups in the Logical Group Tree

103
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
The Logical Group Tree can be rearranged after all groups have been added to it. To
move groups to other branches use the following procedure.
1) Select Edit w/Grid from the Logical menu.
2) Select a group to move by pressing and holding the right mouse button.
When you move a group a duplicate of its name appears with a rubberband
(a connecting line) attached to it (Figure 3-84).

Figure 3-84. Group Name with Rubberband.


Position the group so that the end of the rubberband connects to the desired
location for the group, then release the mouse button. The group appears in its
new location (Figure 3-85).

Figure 3-85. Logical Tree Showing Group in its New Location.


Groups can be moved anywhere within the Logical Tree (except to the same
level as the main group).
A special symbol appears to indicate the group has been moved to an invalid
position (Figure 3-86).

Figure 3-86. Invalid Position Symbol.

Figure 3-87 shows a the group being positioned as a sub-group of another


group. To make a group into a sub-group align its rubberband with the name
of the group that will contain it.

Figure 3-87. Logical Tree Showing Group Being Positioned as a Sub-group.


Note that the group containing the moved group now has an arrow to the left
of its name. Whenever a group contains sub-groups it will have an arrow next to
its name (Figure 3-88).
2.1.12 Move Groups in the Logical Group Tree - continued

104
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

Figure 3-88. New Location of Group as a Sub-group.

105
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3 Graphics
Graphics are pictures imported into the UNITY datafile. UNITY uses graphics to
help the user understand the function of a group of points. Graphics appear in the
same UNITY Main Window as the Logical Group Tree. You create graphics with
a paint application, and import them into the UNITY database as .PCX files.
3.1 Graphics Setup
Graphics used with UNITY can be made using the paint application. Any graphics
used by UNITY must be located in the UNITY\UI\GRAPH directory.
3.2 Detailed Graphics Information
When you add a graphic to UNITY, it comes in as a unit. If you want to make
changes to a graphic, you must make changes to the original .PCX file, and then
import the graphic back into UNITY
3.3 Graphic Creation
You will always create graphics with the third-party paint program, but you can
create the graphics in a number of ways. The most popular methods are listed
below:
Drawing the graphic from scratch This is the slowest method of creating a graphic,
but in some situations it is also the only way to enter a graphic into the system.
Redrawing an existing graphic This method works best when you are trying to
create a number of similar graphics (i.e., multiple air handling units, chillers,
etc.).
Scanning an image This method uses a scanner to copy an image from a drawing
into a paint file.
Capturing a screen image This uses a third party program to take a snapshot of
a screen displayed by another program (AutoCAD for example).
3.4 Run the Graphics Editor
UNITY only creates the folder for the paint program. You must install the paint
program. UNITY is currently shipped with MGI PhotoSuite, a powerful software
package designed for photo editing. It also includes tools for drawing and editing
graphics. Once the program is installed, you can run it in the following manner.
1) Open the UNITY 5.5 folder.
From the OS/2 Desktop, double-click on the UNITY 5.6 folder icon. This
brings up the UNITY 5.6 - Icon View window.

Figure 3-89. Icon. Figure 3-90. UNITY 5.5 - Icon View Window.
2) Double-click on the Graphic Editor icon (Figure 3-91) to run the graphic
application.
This starts the graphics application. The MGI PhotoSuite window appears. See
Figure 3-83. Click the button to run the program. The
PhotoSuite program window with the toolbars will display.

106
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

3.4 Run the Graphics Editor - continued

Figure 3-91. Figure 3-92. Photo Suite Window.


3.4.1 Open a Graphic File
If you would like to open a file, select File from the title bar and choose Open
or click to display an existing graphic. When you chose Open, the dialog
box shown in Figure 3-93 displays. Choose the directory where the file is stored
from the Look in field. The files will display. Highlight the appropriate file and
click . The file opens in the paint program.

Figure 3-93. Open Dialog Box.


3.4.2 Save the Graphic
1) Select Save from the File menu to save the graphic.
2) Select Exit from the File menu to leave the application.
3.4.3 Draw a Graphic with an Existing File
1) Open a file in the .\UNITY\UI\GRAPH directory using the procedure above.
2) Alter the graphic as needed.

Use the text tool ( ) to insert words. Use the line tool ( ) to draw lines.

Use the cut ( ), copy ( ), and paste ( ) buttons to edit the image.

107
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.4.3 Draw a Graphic with an Existing File - continued


3) Save the file by selecting Save As from the File menu. The Save an Image
to Disk dialog box displays (Figure 3-94).

Figure 3-94. Save an Image to Disk Dialog Box.


3) Choose the .\UNITY\UI\GRAPH directory.
Note: The .PCX files MUST be stored in the .\UNITY\UI\ GRAPH directory . If the graphics
are stored anywhere else on the disk, UNITY will not be able to find them!
4) Enter a name for the graphic into the File Name box.
5) Select PCX Files (*.pcx) from the Save as type drop down list and click
.
6) Select Exit from the File menu to leave the application.
3.4.4 Draw a New Graphic
1) Run the paint program according to the directions in 3.4.

2) Choose New from the File menu and select Image or click to
display the New Image dialog box (Figure 3-95).

Figure 3-95. Create a New Picture Dialog Box.


4) Choose the settings for the new graphic and click .
Create the new graphic using the appropriate tools.
5) Save the graphic.
6) Select Exit from the File menu to leave the application.

108
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 3: UNITY Setup

3.5 View Multiple Logical Group Tree/Graphics Windows


As many as four different views can be open in UNITY.
1) To open a view select Open View from the Logical menu.
Two views are now visible in the main screen (Figure 3-96).

Figure 3-96. Main Screen with Two Open Views.


Note: When a view is opened it defaults to a view of the Logical Group Tree. Views have no
effect on the function of the Logical Group Tree or the Logical Groups that are open
within the views.
2) To resize a selected view:
Position the mouse cursor on the border of the view being resized. When a
double-ended arrow appears, hold down the mouse button and stretch the view
to the desired size (Figure 3-97).

Figure 3-97. Resizing a View.


3) To close a selected view select Close View from the Logical menu.
Close View will be an option until you have only one view available.

109
Chapter 3: UNITY Setup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

110
Chapter 4: System
Data Trace

Chapter Summary
This chapter of the Users Guide to UNITY will tell you:

How to setup the System Data Trace Utility


How to read System Data Trace Reports

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Chapter 4: System Data Trace Users Guide to Unity UNITY 5.7

1 UNITY System Data Trace Utility


The UNITY System Data Trace Utility is a DOS based report generating program.
System Data Trace allows you to generate reports on Command Trace, Alarm
Manager, and Card Activity. You can also write the Card Activity information to
a Dbase file. The UNITY System Data Trace Utility software is automatically
installed in the C:\UNITY\TRACE directory. This program can only be run from
the IRM or networked machines with properly mapped drives.
Note: The line SET CLASMOOTH=OFF must appear in the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file before these reports will run. Otherwise, the mouse pointer may get stuck in the
upper right hand corner of the screen.
1.1 Enter the System Data Trace Utility
The System Data Trace utility is a DOS based program and can be entered through
a DOS window or called from UNITY.
To start the System Data Trace utility from DOS:
1) Double-click on the DOS full screen icon in the Command Prompt folder
found on the OS/2 desktop.
The DOS full screen window opens.
2) Change directory to the UNITY\TRACE directory.
3) At the command prompt type CMDTRACE<ENTER>.
UNITY will backup all the Command Trace files and the Card Access data
bases. A popup message will display. Depending on the size of the system, the
backup may take several minutes. Once complete, the System Data Trace
utility begins initialization. The System Data Trace utility screen appears
(Figure 4-1).

Figure 4-1. System Data Trace Utility Screen.


You are now in the System Data Trace utility. To call the System Data Trace
utility from UNITY:
4) Select System Data from the IMS Reports submenu.
The System Data Trace utility screen appears (see Figure 4-1 above).

112
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 4: System Data Trace

2 Set up the System Data Trace Utility


The System Data Trace utility can be setup to generate custom reports based on
alarm or command type, point number or point range, date, time of day, range of
days, and card numbers.
2.1 The TRACEDB Executable File
The TRACEDB.EXE file creates the database files used by the System Data Trace
utility. It can be found in the ..\UNITY directory (for example, the C:\UNITY
directory).
TRACEDB.EXE should be run:
when the System Data Trace utility is setup.
whenever a UNITY operator is added to, changed or deleted from the
UNITY system.
whenever an Engineering Unit is changed.
whenever a descriptor is added, changed or deleted.
2.2 System Data Trace Setup
Run TRACEDB.EXE from the OS/2 window before using this procedure. In
most cases the defaults will be used and this procedure can be skipped. If the
defaults will not be used (for example, in case a backup directory is being used),
then follow this procedure.
1) Select Setup from the Menu bar.
The Trace File Paths dialog box appears (Figure 4-2).

Figure 4-2. Trace File Paths Dialog Box.


2) Click on T*.DB Files.
This line designates the directory the System Data Trace utility will search for
the database files created by the TRACEDB.EXE executable file.
3) Enter the pathname of the directory containing the TRACEDB database
files.
4) Click on Command Trace Files.
This line designates the directory the System Data Trace utility will search for
the database files created by the Command Trace utility. (UNITY 5.0 and
subsequent versions only.)
5) Enter the pathname of the directory containing the System Data Trace
Report files.
6) Click on Card Database and Activity Files.
This line designates the directory the System Data Trace utility will search for
the database files created by the Card Access software.
7) Enter the pathname of the directory containing the Card Access database
files.
For ver. 5.7, these files will be located in ..\UNITY\BACKUP\CAM\CAMDBASE.

113
Chapter 4: System Data Trace Users Guide to Unity UNITY 5.7

2.2 System Data Trace Setup - continued


8) Click on Alarm Manager Files.
This line designates the directory the System Data Trace utility will search for
the database files created by the Alarm Manager software.
9) Enter the pathname of the directory containing the Alarm Manager
database files.
10) Click to close the dialog box.
2.3 Set Report Parameters
1) Select Create from the Reports menu.
The Report Parameters Screen appears (Figure 4-3).

Figure 4-3. Report Parameters Screen.


2) Click .
The Select Date Control dialog box appears (Figure 4-4).

Figure 4-4. Select Date Control Dialog Box.


3) Define the days the report will include in one of the following ways.
Select a specific range of days by clicking the Range radio button, then enter
the beginning date and ending date for the range.
Click on the Include Today radio button and enter the number of days for the
report. This will generate a report for the number of days specified with the
current day as the final day of the report.
Click on the Not Include Today radio button and enter the number of days for
the report. This will generate a report for the number of days specified with
yesterday as the final day for the report.
4) Click to close the Select Date Control dialog box.
The specified day range appears in the Date box.
5) Click .
The Select Time Ranges dialog box appears (Figure 4-5).

114
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 4: System Data Trace

2.3 Set Report Parameters - continued

Figure 4-5. Select Time Range Dialog Box.


If the Daily Range check box is not selected, the Start Time is the time the
report will begin on the beginning date, the Stop Time is the time the report
will end on the ending date. The report will be continuous from the Start Date
Start Time to the End Date End Time.
If the Daily Range check box is selected, the Start Time is the time the report
will begin on all dates within the date range, the Stop Time is the time the
report will end on all dates within the date range. I.e., the report will run from
the Start date Start Time to the Start Date End Time. The report will repeat
the time sequences for each date within its range until the End Date End Time
is reached.
6) Enter the Start and Stop times for the report and click to close the
dialog box.
The time range appears in the Time box.
7) Click .
The Select Report Type dialog box appears (Figure 4-6).

Figure 4-6. Select Report Type Dialog Box.


8) Select the radio button for the desired report type and click .
Command Trace, Alarm Manager and Card Activity, reports may be saved to
a text file or printed on screen. Card Activity to DBase reports are saved to the
..\UNITY\TRACE\ACTIVITY.DB file. The report type appears in the Report
Type box.
9) Click .
The Select Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 4-7).

Figure 4-7. Select Point Data Dialog Box.


10) Select the Point Range radio button to specify a range of points to
include in the report, then enter the first and last points in the range or
select the Specific Points radio button and click .
The Select Point dialog box appears (Figure 4-8).

115
Chapter 4: System Data Trace Users Guide to Unity UNITY 5.7

2.3 Set Report Parameters - continued

Figure 4-8. Select Point Dialog Box.


11) Enter the point number in the Point Number box, then click to
close the dialog box.
12) Click to close the dialog box.
The point number or point range appears in the Points list.
13) Click .
The Select Card Data dialog box appears (Figure 4-9).

Figure 4-9. Select Card Data Dialog Box.


14) Select the Card Range radio button to specify a range of cards to include
in the report, then enter the first and last cards in the range.
The Select Card dialog box appears (Figure 4-10).

Figure 4-10. Select Card Dialog Box.


15) Enter the card number in the Card Number box, then click to
close the dialog box.
16) Click to close the Select Card Data dialog box.
The card number or card range appears in the Cards list.
17) Click .
If the report type selected in step 7 was not Command Trace, the Select Alarm
Data dialog box appears (Figure 4-11).

116
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 4: System Data Trace

2.3 Set Report Parameters - continued

Figure 4-11. Select Alarm Data Dialog Box.


If the report type selected in step 7 was Command Trace the Command Trace
dialog box appears (Figure 4-12).

Figure 4-12. Command Trace Dialog Box.


Note: Steps 18 and 19 do not apply to the Command Trace report type.
If you select Commanded By as you Command Trace Report Category, the
Commanded By dialog box will appear. Choose the appropriate operators to
report on and click . Go to Step 21.

Figure 4-13. Commanded By Dialog Box.


18) Select items for the report from the Available list (Figure 4-11).
As you select each item click . The selected item will appear in the
Chosen list.
To select all items in the Available list, click .
To remove an item from the Chosen list, click .
To remove all items from the Chosen list, click .
19) When all items for the report have been selected, click to close
the dialog box.
Note: Step 20 applies only to the Command Trace report type.
20) Click .
The Command Trace dialog box closes.
21) Click .

117
Chapter 4: System Data Trace Users Guide to Unity UNITY 5.7

2.3 Set Report Parameters - continued

Figure 4-14. Set Default Report Dialog Box.


22) To add this report to the default reports, click .
The Add Default dialog box appears (Figure 4-15).

Figure 4-15. Add Default Dialog Box.


23) Enter the reports name into the Name box and click .
The reports name appears in the Alarms/Commands Trace list of the Report
dialog box.
24) Click to close the dialog box.
25) Click to close the Report Parameters dialog box.
Note: The System Data Trace utility supports multiple report setups. If more than one setup
is needed follow steps 1 through 23 for each report.
2.4 Change Report Parameters
1) Select Create from the Reports menu.
The Report Screen appears (Figure 4-16).

Figure 4-16. Report screen.


2) Click .
The Select Default dialog box appears (Figure 4-17).

118
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 4: System Data Trace

2.4 Change Report Parameters - continued

Figure 4-17. Select Default Dialog Box.


3) Highlight the Report to change by clicking on it with the mouse.
4) Click .
The Select Default dialog box closes and the reports name and parameters
appear in the Report Parameters dialog box.
5) Change the necessary parameters following the procedures described in
section 2.2 - Set Report Parameters.
6) After the parameters have been changed click .
The Set Default dialog box appears (Figure 4-18).

Figure 4-18. Set Default Dialog Box.


7) Select the Report Parameter that has been modified then click .
The Change Default dialog box appears (Figure 4-19).

Figure 4-19. Change Default Dialog Box.


8) Click to display a warning dialog box (Figure 4-20).

Figure 4-20. Warning Dialog Box.


9) Click to close the warning dialog box.
10) Click to close the Change Default dialog box.
11) Click to close the Set Default dialog box.

119
Chapter 4: System Data Trace Users Guide to Unity UNITY 5.7

2.5 Delete a Report


1) Select Create from the Reports menu.
The Report Parameters dialog box appears (Figure 4-21).

Figure 4-21. Report Parameters Dialog Box.


2) Click .
The Set Default dialog box appears (Figure 4-22).

Figure 4-22. Set Default Dialog Box.


3) Select the report to delete from the Set Default list then click .
The Delete Default dialog box appears (Figure 4-23).

Figure 4-23. Delete Default Dialog Box.


4) Click to close the Delete Default dialog box.
The report is removed from the Locator Field list.
5) Click to close the Locator Field dialog box.
6) Click to close the Report Parameters dialog box.

120
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 4: System Data Trace

2.6 Generate a Report


1) Choose Run from the Reports menu.
The Choose Report dialog box appears (Figure 4-24).

Figure 4-24. Choose Report Dialog Box.


2) Highlight the report to run and choose , or double click on the report.
The Enter Fields for Report dialog box appears (Figure 4-25).

Figure 4-25. Enter Fields for Report Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Fields for the report and click .
If you are running a Card Activity to DBase report, the Generating Report
message will display (Figure 4-28), and the ..\UNITY\TRACE\ACTIVITY.DB
file will be created. For other reports, the Print Destination dialog box displays.

Figure 4-26. Print Destination Dialog Box.


4) Select the output for the file and click .
If you select File, the data will be stored in a text file. If you save the output
to a file, the File Name dialog box will display (Figure 4-27). If you select
Screen, the output will display on screen and you may skip step 5.

Figure 4-26. Btrieve File Name Dialog Box.


5) If you selected File in the Print Destination dialog box, type in an
appropriate name and click .
Enter a standard eight character filename without the extension (the .TXT file
extension is added automatically) and click . The Generating Data dialog
box (Figure 4-28) displays briefly. Once the report has been generated, it is sent
to the ..\UNITY\TRACE directory.

Figure 4-28. Generating Data Dialog Box.

121
Chapter 4: System Data Trace Users Guide to Unity UNITY 5.7

3 Read a Command Trace Report


System Data Trace reports encompass all report types except the IMS report type.
This includes Command Trace, Alarm Manager, Card Activity, and Card Activity
to DBase reports.
1. The Point Commands Report lists all designated points that have been
commanded.
2. The Commanded By Report lists all commands issued by a specified
operator or program.
3. The Logon/Logoff Report generates a list of the logon/logoff activity of
the system operators.
4. The Database Edits Report generates a list of the database editing activity
of the system operators.
5. The Card Commands Report generates a report of card access activity.
6. The System Status Report generates a report of system and subsystem
activity. This activity include such events as CPU down, subsystem down, etc.
7. The Program Execution Report generates a report of the actions
initiated by programs, including the time and date the program was activated.
8. The Acknowledged Alarms report generates a report of the acknowl-
edged alarms and who acknowledged them.
9. The Misc. Commands Report generates a report on miscellaneous
system command, like password or segregation file changes.
Note: If the Daily Range check box is not selected, the Start Time is the time the report will
begin on the beginning date, the Stop Time is the time the report will end on the ending
date. For example, the report will be continuous from the Start Date Start Time to
the End Date End Time.
Notice that the bottom of the report screen shows the reports path (its location
on the hard disk). The path appears on the left side of the screen as Viewing:
<Pathname>. And, two buttons are also located at the bottom of the screen. The
functions of these buttons are:
- Sends the report to the local printer.
- Leaves the report screen and closes the System Data Trace Utility.
Each report varies in layout and content. So, the reports are discussed individually
here.

122
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 4: System Data Trace

3.1 Point Commands


The Point Commands Report (Figure 4-29) has seven columns. These columns
display the following information:
Point - This is the point address
Description - This is the descriptor assigned to the point
PRI - This is the priority at which the command was sent
Command - This is the type of command issued to the point.
Commanded By - This is the operator who commanded the point
Time - This is the time of day that the command was issued
Date - This is the date the command was issued

Figure 4-29. Point Commands Report.


3.2 Commanded By
The Commanded By Report (Figure 4-30) has five columns. These columns
display the following information:
Point - This is the point address
Description - This is the descriptor assigned to the point
Command - This is the type of command issued to the point.
Time - This is the time of day that the command was issued
Date - This is the date the command was issued

Figure 4-30. Commanded By Report.

123
Chapter 4: System Data Trace Users Guide to Unity UNITY 5.7

3.3 Logon/Logoff
The Operator Activity Report (Figure 4-31) has five columns. These columns display
the following information:
Operator Name - This identifies the operator
From Station - This identifies the workstation the operator has logged on to/
off from
Activity - This tells whether the activity was a log on or a log off
Time - This is the time of day that the activity occurred
Date - This is the date the activity occurred

Figure 4-31. Operator Activity Report.


3.4 Database Edits
The Database Edit Report (Figure 4-32) has five columns. These columns display
the following information:
Operator - This identifies the operator
From - This identifies the workstation the operator has logged on to/off from
Action Taken - This tells the action that the operator performed
Time - This is the time of day that the activity occurred
Date - This is the date the activity occurred

Figure 4-32. Database Edit Report.

124
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 4: System Data Trace

3.5 Card Command


The Card Commands Report (Figure 4-33) has six columns. These columns
display the following information:
Card - This identifies the card number
Commanded By - This is the source of the command issued
Numbers - This represents the user-defined level of the building
Time - This is the time of day that the activity occurred
Date - This is the date the activity occurred

Figure 4-33. Card Commands Report.


3.6 System Status
The System Status Report (Figure 4-34) has four columns. These columns display
the following information:
Station - This identifies the subsystem
Activity - This identifies the current status of the subsystems, UI, IRM, and the
various stations connected UNITY.
Time - This is the time of day that the activity occurred
Date - This is the date the activity occurred

Figure 4-34. System Status Report.

125
Chapter 4: System Data Trace Users Guide to Unity UNITY 5.7

3.7 Program Execution


The Program Execution Report (Figure 4-35) has four columns. These columns
display the following information:
Program - This identifies the program
Action - This identifies who or what initiated the program
Time - This identifies the time of day that the activity occurred
Date - This identifies the date the activity occurred

Figure 4-35. Program Execution Report.


3.8 Acknowledged Alarms
The Acknowledged Alarms Report (Figure 4-36) has five columns. These
columns display the following information:
Point - This identifies the point address that initiated the alarm
Description - This identifies the points descriptor
Commanded By - This identifies the person who acknowledged the alarm
Time - This identifies the time of day the alarm was acknowledged
Date - This identifies the date the alarm was acknowledged

Figure 4-36. Acknowledged Alarms Report.

126
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 4: System Data Trace

3.9 Misc. Commands


The Misc. Commands Report (Figure 4-37) has four columns. These columns
display the following information:
Operator - This identifies the program and who or what initiated it
Station - This identifies the action performed by the program
Action - This identifies the action taken by the operator
Time - This is the time of day that the activity occurred
Date - This is the date the activity occurred

Figure 4-37. Misc. Commands Report.

127
Chapter 4: System Data Trace Users Guide to Unity UNITY 5.7

4 Read an Alarm Manager Report


The Alarm Manager Report lists all selected points in the selected alarm states with
the corresponding Responders and Responses. The Alarm Manager Report
(Figure 4-38) has six columns. These columns display the following information:
Point - This is the point address
Description - This is the descriptor assigned to the point with the time
Responded, the Responder and the Response
Data - This is the alarm state
EU - This is the engineering unit of the point
Time - This is the time of day that the was used
Date - This is the date the card was used.

Figure 4-38. Alarm Manager Report.


The bottom of the report screen shows the reports path (its location on the hard
disk). The path appears on the left side of the screen as Viewing: <Pathname>.
Two buttons are also located at the bottom of the screen. The functions of these
buttons are:
- Sends the report to the local printer.
- Leaves the report screen and closes the System Data Trace utility.

128
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 4: System Data Trace

5 Read a Card Activity Report


The Card Activity Report lists card activity with date, time, card number, and the
corresponding user. The Card Activity Report (Figure 4-39) has five columns.
These columns display the following information:
Date - This is the date the card was used
Time - This is the time of day that the card was used
Card - This is the card number
Name - This is the person who the card was assigned to with the access location
name
Card Activity - This is the access status of the card

Figure 4-39. Card Activity Report.


The bottom of the report screen shows the reports path (its location on the hard
disk).
The path appears on the left side of the screen as Viewing: <Pathname>.
Two buttons are also located at the bottom of the screen. The functions of these
buttons are:
- Sends the report to the local printer.
- Leaves the report screen and closes the System Data Trace utility.

129
Chapter 4: System Data Trace Users Guide to Unity UNITY 5.7

130
Chapter 5: Programming
Procedures

Chapter Overview
This chapter of the Users Guide to UNITY outlines step-by-
step procedures for:
Using Programs
Using Messages
Using Time Initiated Program Schedules (TIPs)
Using Time-Of-Day Schedules

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 System Programs
A program is a series of UNITY commands, that form a unit. You can incorporate
most commonly used commands into a program and add pauses between
commands, if necessary. Once you create a program the commands can be
executed by running the program. This chapter covers different aspects of
programming the UNITY system including:
Programs, which are sequences of commands and delays
Messages, which are text displays sent to the users
TIP Schedules, which are time schedules that run Programs automatically
Calculation Points, which are points whose status or value is determined by
a software calculation. (See Chapter 6: UNITY Calculation Points for more
information.)
Each UNITY program must have a unique name. This name can use from 1 to 31
letters/numbers/spaces.
Note: For security reasons, the program filenames will NOT show up in an MS-DOS or OS/
2 directory.
1.1 Program Types
The three major UNITY program types include Time Initiated Programs (TIP),
Event Initiated Programs (EIP), and Operator Initiated Programs (OIP).
A TIP is a program designed to start at specific time. The program can be run
on a daily basis, on selected days of the week or month, or on selected holidays.
For more information see Chapter 3 -- Holiday Schedules and Section 7 of this
chapter -- Schedules.
EIPs are programs that respond to a specific situation. The initiating event can
be a point in alarm or trouble, a temperature exceeding a selected value, etc. For
more information on Event Initiated Programs see Section 10 of this chapter --
Event Initiated Activities.
OIPs are programs run by the operator. These programs can be started at any time
by the operator, as necessary. OIPs can be set up so that only designated operators
may run them.

132
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

2 General Programming Procedures


2.1 Add/Modify a Program
1) Select Programs from the Edit menu.
The Edit Programs dialog box appears (Figure 5-1).

Figure 5-1. Edit Programs Dialog Box.


2) Enter the name of the program in the Filename field and click ,
or select the program file that you want to modify and click .
The text appears on-screen as you type the name of the new program. The Edit
Program: dialog box appears, with the programs name in the title (Figure 5-2).

Figure 5-2. Edit Program: Dialog Box.


3) Add or delete commands, as necessary.
See Section 3 -- Detailed Programming Procedures for more information.
4) Click in the Edit Program: dialog box.
This saves your new program to the hard disk. The Edit Programs dialog box
reappears with the name of the new program in the File list.
5) Click in the Edit Programs dialog box.

133
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.2 Delete a Program


1) Select Programs from the Edit menu.
The Edit Programs dialog box appears (Figure 5-3).

Figure 5-3. Edit Programs Dialog Box.


2) Select a program file that you want to delete and click .
Click on a file in the list, or enter the program name in the Filename field. The
Delete Programs warning dialog box appears (Figure 5-4).

Figure 5-4. Delete Programs warning Dialog Box.


3) Click .
This deletes the program that you selected, and the Edit Programs dialog box
reappears.
4) Click .
2.3 Copy a Program
1) Select Programs from the Edit menu.
The Edit Programs dialog box appears (Figure 5-5).

Figure 5-5. Edit Programs Dialog Box.

134
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

2.3 Copy a Program - continued


2) Select a program file that you want to copy and click .
Click on a file in the list, or enter the program name in the Filename field. The
Copy Programs dialog box appears (Figure 5-6).

Figure 5-6. Copy Programs Dialog Box.


3) Enter the name of the new program into the To field.
4) Select the Reverse On/Off check box, if appropriate.
Selecting this check box will change all On commands to Off commands, and
all Off commands to On commands (in the new program). All other copied
commands are unchanged.
5) Click .
This creates a new program with all of the old programs commands (unless
reversed in step 4, and saves it to the disk. The Edit Programs dialog box
reappears with the new program name in the File list.
6) Click in the Edit Programs dialog box.
2.4 Print a Program's Commands
1) Select Programs from the Edit menu.
The Edit Programs dialog box appears (Figure 5-7).

Figure 5-7. Edit Programs Dialog Box.


2) Select a program file that you want to print and click .
Click on a file in the list, or enter the program name in the Filename field. The
Print Programs dialog box appears (Figure 5-8).

135
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.4 Print a Program's Commands - continued

Figure 5-8. Print Programs Dialog Box.


3) Select the appropriate radio button for the destination of the printout and
click .
This sends a listing of the commands (in the selected program) to the printer.
The Edit Programs dialog box reappears.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
2.5 Enable/Disable a Program
1) Select Programs from the Commands menu.
The Program Commands window appears. See Figure 5-9. A list of all the
programs written for your UNITY system appear in the File list.

Figure 5-9. Program Commands Window.


2) Click on the program to be enabled/disabled to select it.
The name of the selected program appears in the Filename field.
3) Click to enable the program, or click to disable
the program.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
2.6 Run a Program
1) Select Programs from the Commands menu.
The Program Commands window appears. See Figure 5-9. A list of all the
programs written for your UNITY system appear in the File list.
2) Select the program to run by clicking on it.
The name of the selected program appears in the Filename field.
3) Click to run the program.
4) Click to close the dialog box.

136
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

3 Detailed Programming Procedures


3.1 Add Commands to a Program
1) Select Programs from the Edit menu.
The Edit Programs dialog box appears (Figure 5-10).

Figure 5-10. Edit Programs Dialog Box.


2) Enter the name of a new program in the Filename field and click .
Or, select the program file that commands are to be added to and click
.
The text appears on-screen as you type the name of a new or existing program.
The Edit Program: dialog box appears, with the programs name in the title
(Figure 5-11).

Figure 5-11. Edit Program: Dialog Box.


3) Click , , or .
Click to add a command at the end of the program. Highlight a
command and click to insert a command before the high-
lighted command. Highlight a command and click to insert a
command after the highlighted command. The Add Command dialog box
appears. (Figure 5-12).

137
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.1 Add Commands to a Program - continued

Figure 5-12. Add Command Dialog Box.


4) Select a command from the Add Command dialog box and enter all
necessary information for the command.
See Section 4 -- Program Commands.
5) Click in the Add Command dialog box.
6) Click in the Edit Program: dialog box.
This saves your program with the new commands to the hard disk. The Edit
Programs dialog box reappears.
7) Click in the Edit Programs dialog box.
3.2 Delete Commands from a Program
1) From the Edit Program: dialog box (Figure 5-13), click on the command
that you want to delete.
This highlights the selected command.

Figure 5-13. Edit Program: Dialog Box with command highlighted.


2) Click on the command that you want to remove.
This highlights the selected command.
3) Click .
A warning dialog box appears (Figure 5-14).

Figure 5-14. Warning Dialog Box.


4) Click in the warning dialog box.
This deletes the selected program.

138
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

4 Program Commands
Below is a summary of the different commands that are available as part of a
program.
Note: You cannot have more than 100 commands in a single program. You may, however,
make two (or more) separate programs with the necessary commands, and start them
from inside a third program.
4.1 Point Commands
You can use any of the standard point commands as part of a program (excluding
Advance Schedule). This includes any commands that are available on any of the
installed subsystems. (To find out what commands are available, see the subsystem
section[s].) The following example is for a standard On/Off point.
1) Click from the Add Command dialog box (Figure 5-15).
The Point Command dialog box appears (Figure 5-16).

Figure 5-15. Add Command Dialog Box.

Figure 5-16. Point Command Dialog Box.


Note: Status requests will not display on the screen, but will print on any UNITY printer
with Programs segregation.
2) Enter the point number that you want to command.
Type in the point number or use the point lookup feature. Once you enter the
point number, the available commands for that point appear (Figure 5-17).

139
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.1 Point Commands - continued

Figure 5-17. Point Command Dialog Box with Point Entered.


3) Select the command.
In this example, you would click or button. This adds the
command and the Point command dialog box reappears. Continue selecting
the commands until you have all the commands you need.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
The Add Command dialog box reappears.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Program: dialog box reappears with the point commands listed
(Figure 5-18).

Figure 5-18. Edit Program: Dialog Box with Commands Listed.


6) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Programs dialog box reappears.

140
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

4.2 Limit Commands


Limit Commands lets a program set the high and low alarm limits for a point. The
high and low alarm limits can be either a fixed value or a variable value.
Note: This feature may not be supported for all the subsystems.
1) Click from the Add Command dialog box (Figure 5-19).
The Set Limit Command dialog box appears (Figure 5-20).

Figure 5-19. Add Command Dialog Box.

Figure 5-20. Set Limit Command Dialog Box.


2) Enter a point that you want to set for the high or low limit.
Type in the point number or use the point lookup feature.
3) Enter the value for the limit. If the point uses Limit Following, skip to
step 3.
Type the value of the limit in the Value: box and click either the Set High Limit
or Set Low Limit button.
4) Enter a point for high or low limit follow. If Limit Following is not used,
skip to step 4.
Type in the point number or use the point lookup feature. The point used must
be an analog point. Click on the High Limit Follow or Low Limit Follow button.
Note: Limit Following causes the high or low alarm limit to vary according to the value of the
Limit Follow point. The value used for the alarm limit is the same as the current value
of the Limit Follow point.
5) Click to close the dialog box.

141
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.3 Log Commands


All of the standard Logs are available as part of a program. However, logs
generated by programs can not be printed to the screen.
1) Click from the Add Command dialog box (Figure 5-21).
The Point Log dialog box appears (Figure 5-22).

Figure 5-21. Command. Figure 5-22. Point Log. Figure 5-23. Single Group Log.
2) Select the Log type.
After selecting a Log type, one of the Group Log dialog boxes will appear. Figure
5-23 is an example of a Single Group Log dialog box.
3) Enter the appropriate data (i.e., Group #, Group range, etc.) and select
the destination printer.
4) Click on the Single Group Log dialog box.
The Group Log is added to the program and the Single Group Log dialog box
reappears.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
The Point Log dialog box reappears.
6) Click to close the dialog box.
The Add Command dialog box reappears.
7) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Program: dialog reappears with the Point Log command in the list.
(Figure 5-24).

Figure 5-24. Edit Program: Dialog Box with Point Log Command.
8) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Programs dialog box appears.

142
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

4.4 Run Programs


Any program EXCEPT the current program can be started from within a program.
Note: Any programs started from the current program cannot run the current program
either.
1) Click from the Add Command dialog box (Figure 5-25).
The Programs dialog box appears (Figure 5-26).

Figure 5-25. Add Command . Figure 5-26. Programs Dialog Box.


2) Select the program to run by clicking its name in the program list, or by
entering the program name in the Filename field.
3) Click on the Programs dialog box.
The program to run is added to the list of commands on the Edit Program:
dialog box and the Programs dialog box reappears. Continue adding programs
that you want to run.
4) Click on the Programs dialog box to close the dialog box.
The Add Command dialog box reappears.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Program: dialog box reappears with the Run Program command now
in the list of commands (Figure 5-27).

Figure 5-27. Edit Program: Dialog Box with Run Program Command.
6) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Programs dialog box reappears.

143
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.5 Time Delays


To prevent successive commands from occurring too close together, you can use
time delays between commands in a program.
1) Click from the Add Command dialog box (Figure 5-28).
The Time Delay Command dialog box appears (Figure 5-29).

Figure 5-28. Add Command . Figure 5-29. Time Delay Command Dialog Box.
2) Enter the time delay in the Time Delay in seconds: box.
You can use time delays from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 second to 1 hour).
3) Click to close the dialog box.
The Add Command dialog box reappears.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Program: dialog box reappears with the Time Delay command in the
list of commands (Figure 5-30).

Figure 5-30. Edit Program: Dialog Box with Time Delay Command.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Programs dialog box reappears.

144
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

4.6 Form Feed


The Form Feed command allows the program to execute a form feed. This
command can be used to separate individual logs printed by a program.
1) Click from the Add Command dialog box (Figure 5-31).
This adds the form Feed command to the list of commands. The Add
Command dialog box remains on the screen.

Figure 5-31. Add Command Dialog Box.


2) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Program: dialog box reappears with the Form Feed command in the
list of commands (Figure 5-32).

Figure 5-32. Edit Program: Dialog Box with Form Feed Command.
3) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Programs dialog box reappears.
4.7 Print Text
The Print Text command allows text to be printed by a program. The text can be
used as a header for logs, or as special messages notifying the user that a particular
command has been executed by a program.
1) Click from the Add Command dialog box (Figure 5-33).
The Print Text dialog box appears (Figure 5-34).
2) Enter the text in the Text: box.
Up to 31 characters can be entered.

145
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.7 Print Text - continued

Figure 5-33. Add Command. Figure 5-34. Print Text Dialog Box.
3) Select the width of the characters to be printed.
The width of the characters determines the number of characters that can be
printed on a line. The number of characters for each width is approximately:
Normal - 80. This is the default width.
Compressed - 180. Characters printed using the compressed width will be half
the width of normal characters.
Double Wide - 40. Characters printed using the double wide width will be twice
as wide as normal characters.
Enhanced - 80. Characters printed using the enhanced width will be wider than
normal characters but will still print the same number of characters per line
as normal text.
4) If more than 31 characters are to printed on a single line select the
Continue line check box, otherwise skip to step 5.
The Continue line check box allows additional characters to be printed on a
single line. Once the Text: box has been filled, select the check box and click
. The Print Text dialog box will reappear with the Text: box blank. Enter
the additional text for the line. Repeat this step, as necessary.
5) Click on the Print Text dialog box.
The Print Text dialog box reappears with a blank Text: box. Repeat steps 1 -
3 for additional text, as necessary.
6) Click to close the dialog box.
The Add Command dialog box reappears.
7) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Program: dialog box reappears with the Print Text command in the
list (Figure 5-35).

Figure 5-35. Edit Program: Dialog Box with Print Text Command.
8) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Programs dialog box reappears.

146
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

4.8 Set Segregation


Set Segregation allows a program to change the segregation setup for a selected
station.
1) Click from the Add Command dialog box (Figure 5-36).
The Set Segregation dialog box appears (Figure 5-37).

Figure 5-36. Add Command. Figure 5-37. Set Segregation Dialog Box.
2) Select a station from the Station: list.
3) Select a segregation file from the Segregation File: list.
4) Click on the Set Segregation dialog box.
The Segregation is added to the commands and the Set Segregation dialog box
remains open.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
The Add Command dialog box reappears.
6) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Program: dialog box reappears with the Set Segregation command
in the list of commands (Figure 5-38).

Figure 5-38. Edit Program: Dialog Box with Set Segregation Command.
7) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Programs dialog box reappears.

147
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.9 Run REXX


Run REXX allows a program to run a REXX script.
1) Click from the Add Command dialog box (Figure 5-39).
The Run REXX dialog box appears (Figure 5-40).

Figure 5-39. Add Command. Figure 5-40. Run REXX Dialog Box.
2) Enter the name of the REXX script in the REXX Script: box.
3) Enter the arguments (if any) the REXX script will use in the Arguments:
box.
4) Select a station from the Station ID: list.
This is the station where the REXX Script is actually located.
5) Click the Foreground check box.
If the Foreground check box is selected, you will see the REXX program run.
If it is not checked, the REXX program will run in the background and not be
seen.
6) Click on the Run REXX dialog box.
The Run REXX command is added and the Run REXX dialog box remains
open.
7) Click to close the dialog box.
The Add Command dialog box reappears.
8) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Program: dialog box appears with the Run REXX command in the
list of commands (Figure 5-41).

Figure 5-41. Edit Program: Dialog Box with Run REXX Command.
7) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Programs dialog box reappears. You have finished adding Run
REXX commands to the program.

148
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

5 Program Exercise
The example system has one point, a relay that controls all of the interior lights.
The system uses Lighting System as a descriptor for point 101001.
This exercise has two objectives:
1) Create a program that will turn on the lighting system relay
2) Run the program
5.1 Create the Program
1) Select Programs from the Edit Menu.
The Edit Programs dialog box appears (Figure 5-42).

Figure 5-42. Edit Programs Dialog Box.


2) Enter Lights in the Filename field.
The text appears on-screen as you type the name of the new program.
3) Click .
The Edit Program: Lights dialog box appears (Figure 5-43), with the name of
the program as the dialog boxs title.

Figure 5-43. Edit Program: Lights Dialog Box.


4) Click .
The Add Command dialog box appears (Figure 5-44).

149
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5.1 Create the Program - continued

Figure 5-44. Add Command Dialog Box.


5) Click in the Add Command dialog box.
The Point Command dialog box appears (Figure 5-45).
6) Enter 051003 in the Point field.
As you type, the point number appears in the Point field.

Figure 5-45. Point Command Dialog Box.


7) Click .
Since this point is a commandable digital point, you should only send it digital
commands.
8) Click in the Point Command dialog box.
This stores the command 051003 ON in the Lights program file.
9) Click in the Add Command dialog box.
There are no more commands to add.
10) Click in the Edit Program dialog box.
There are no more changes to be made to this program.
11) Click in the Edit Programs dialog box.
There are no more programs to add.

150
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

5.2 Run the Program


1) Select Programs from the Commands Menu.
The Program Commands dialog box appears (Figure 5-46).

Figure 5-46. Program Commands Dialog Box.


2) Select Lights from the list of programs to run.
You can select a name from the displayed list (by clicking with the mouse), or
you can type the name of the program into the Filename text box.
3) Click on the Program Commands dialog box.
The Lights program now runs.

151
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6 Messages
A message is a series of words or sentences that display together. A message can
be one or two words long, or it can be much longer. Each line of the message can
be up to 65 characters long (including spaces and punctuation), and there can be
up to 20 lines in a message. Each UNITY message must have a unique name. This
name can use from 1 to 31 letters/numbers/spaces.
This section of the UNITY manual covers creating messages. You can find
information on creating the link between an event and a message in the accom-
panying UNITY/Subsystem Supplement(s). The title of this supplement depends
on the type of system UNITY is replacing.
Whenever an EIM event occurs, UNITY automatically sends the message to all
printers that you segregate to print alarms. Even if you do not send Auto EIMS
to the screen, they will print immediately on the user station.
Note: For security reasons, the message filenames will NOT show up in an MS-DOS or OS/
2 directory.
1) EIMs - Messages display in response to events. These are Event Initiated
Messages, or EIMS. You can display EIMS automatically using the Auto EIM
feature, or you can display them by request. There are four steps for displaying
a message with an EIM:
1) An event occurs that is linked to a message.
2) EIMs Pending appears in the right side of the header area.
3) The operator asks for the EIM to be displayed.
4) The operator reads the EIM and clicks to acknowledge it.
2) Auto EIMs - Auto EIMs are Automatically displayed Event Initiated
Messages. If you want immediate, on-screen display of EIMs, you should enable
this feature. If you disable Auto EIMs, the only notification you receive is an
EIMs Pending message in the upper left of the screen. There are three steps for
displaying a message with an Auto EIM:
1) An event occurs that is linked to a message.
2) The message appears on the screen.
4) The operator reads the EIM and clicks to acknowledge it.
6.1 Add/Modify a Message
1) Select Messages from the Edit menu.
The Edit Messages dialog box appears (Figure 5-47).

Figure 5-47. Edit Messages Dialog Box.


2) Enter a name for the file in the Filename field and click . Or, select
the message file that you want to modify and click .
The name appears in the Filename field as you type. The Edit Message: dialog
box appears (Figure 5-48).

152
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

6.1 Add/Modify a Message - continued

Figure 5-48. Edit Message Dialog Box.


4) Enter the text of the message or edit the text, and press the RETURN key
at the end of each separate line.
The text appears in the message field as you type.
5) Click .
This saves the message that you just created. The Edit Message: dialog box
closes and the Edit Messages dialog box reappears. If you added a new
message, the new message filename appears in the File list.
6) Click to close the dialog box.
6.2 Delete a Message
1) Select Messages from the Edit menu.
The Edit Messages dialog box appears (Figure 5-49).

Figure 5-49. Edit Messages Dialog Box.


2) Select a message file to delete and click .
Click on a file in the list, or enter the message name in the Filename field. The
Delete Messages Warning dialog box appears (Figure 5-50).

Figure 5-50. The Delete Messages Warning Dialog Box.


3) Click to delete the message that you selected.
4) Click to close the Edit Messages dialog box.

153
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6.3 Copy a Message


1) Select Messages from the Edit menu.
The Edit Messages dialog box appears (Figure 5-51).

Figure 5-51. Edit Messages Dialog Box.


2) Select a message file that you want to copy and click .
Click on a file in the list, or enter the message name in the Filename field. The
Copy Messages dialog box appears (Figure 5-52).

Figure 5-52. Copy Messages Dialog Box.


3) Enter the name of the new message into the To: field and click .
This creates a new message with all of the old messages text, and saves it to the
disk. The Copy Messages dialog box closes and the Edit Messages dialog box
reappears with the new message filename in the File list.
4) Click to close the dialog box.

154
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

6.4 Print Message Text


1) Select Messages from the Edit menu.
The Edit Messages dialog box appears (Figure 5-53).

Figure 5-53. Edit Messages Dialog Box.


2) Select a message file to be printed.
Click on a file in the list, or enter the message name in the Filename field.
3) Click .
The Print Messages dialog box appears (Figure 5-54).

Figure 5-54. Print Messages Dialog Box.


4) Select the appropriate radio button for the destination of the printout and
click .
This sends a listing of the Message to the printer or the screen.
5) Click to close the Edit messages dialog box.
The text appears in the message field below the previous line.

155
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7 Time Initiated Program Schedules


A Time Initiated Program is a program linked to a TIP Schedule. A TIP Schedule
is simply a time-of-day/day-of-week schedule, and a list of one or more program
names. All of the programs in the TIP Schedule list will run at the times/days in
the schedule. You can run up to 96 programs with a TIP Schedule. The number
of TIP Schedules in a given UNITY system is practically unlimited (The actual
limit is either 94,370,400 or until the disk is full).
7.1 Add/Modify a TIP Schedule
1) Select TIP Schedules from the Edit menu.
The Edit TIPs dialog box appears (Figure 5-55).

Figure 5-55. Edit TIPs Dialog Box.


2) To add a TIP, select the appropriate check box(es) for the day(s) that the
TIP will run, enter the start time for the TIP in the Time field, and click
. To modify a TIP, select a schedule to modify and click
.
A check mark () appears in each check box as you click on it. To enter the
time, click on the Time field, and enter the appropriate start time in 24 hour
(00:00 to 23:59) format. The name of the schedule consists of the start time,
followed by the days of the week (abbreviations) that the Schedule is active.
If you are adding a TIP, the Add TIP Schedule dialog box appears (Figure 5-
56). If you are changing an existing TIP, the Modify TIP Schedule dialog box
appears (Figure 5-57).

Figure 5-56. Add TIP Schedule Dialog Box.

156
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

7.1 Add/Modify a TIP Schedule - continued

Figure 5-57. Modify TIP Schedule Dialog Box.


5) Add programs or modify the schedule, as necessary.
See Section 7.1.1 for more information on adding programs to a TIP Schedule.
6) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit TIPs dialog box reappears with the new TIP schedule listed.
7) Click in the Edit TIPs dialog box.
7.1.1 Add a Program to a Schedule
1) Complete Steps 1-2 of Section 7.1 to open the Add TIP Schedule or Modify
TIP Schedule dialog box.
The Modify TIP Schedule dialog box is shown below. (Figure 5-58)

Figure 5-58. Modify TIP Schedule Dialog Box.


2) Click , , or .
Click to add a command at the end of the program. Highlight a
command and click to insert a command before the highlighted
command. Highlight a command and click to insert a com-
mand after the highlighted command. The Add Program to TIP dialog box
appears (Figure 5-59).

157
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7.1.1 Add a Program -continued

Figure 5-59. Add Program to TIP Dialog Box.


3) Select a program from the list of programs to add and click .
You can either highlight a name from the displayed list, or you can type the
program name into the Filename text box. This adds the program to the
schedule, and the Add Program to TIP dialog box reappears.
4) Click to close the Add Programs dialog box
5) Click to close the Add TIP Schedule dialog box.
6) Click to close the Edit TIPs dialog box.
7.1.2 Delete a Program from a Schedule
1) Complete Steps 1-2 of Section 7.1 to open the Add TIP Schedule or
Modify TIP Schedule dialog box.
The Modify TIP Schedule dialog box is shown below (Figure 5-60).

Figure 5-60. Modify TIP Schedule Dialog Box.


3) Click on the program that you want to remove and click .
This highlights the selected program. The Delete Programs Warning dialog
box appears (Figure 5-61).

Figure 5-61. Delete Programs Warning Dialog Box.


4) Click to delete the program.
5) Click to close the Modify TIP Schedule dialog box.
6) Click to close the Edit TIPs dialog box.

158
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

7.1.3 Change a Programs Priority


1) Complete Steps 1-2 of Section 7.1 to open the Add TIP Schedule or Modify
TIP Schedule dialog box.
The Modify TIP Schedule dialog box is shown below (Figure 5-62).

Figure 5-62. Modify TIP Schedule Dialog Box.


3) Click on the program with the priority you want to change and click
.
The Change Priority dialog box appears (Figure 5-63).

Figure 5-63. The Change Priority Dialog Box.


4) Use the spin boxes to select the command and residual priorities.
The priority number can range from 0-99, where 99 is the highest priority, and
0 is the least. This number designates the priority level of this program. An
operator must have a higher priority number than the program in order to
enable, disable, or modify the program. If the priority of another program or
command is higher than this programs priority, the other program will be
implemented, not this one. The Residual Priority is the priority level the point
resumes after this program has commanded it.
7.2 Delete a TIP Schedule
1) Select TIP Schedules from the Edit menu.
The Edit TIPs dialog box appears (Figure 5-64).

Figure 5-64. Edit TIPs Dialog Box.

159
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7.2 Delete a TIP Schedule - continued


2) Select a schedule to delete and click .
Select a schedule from the displayed list (by clicking with the mouse). A
Warning dialog box appears (Figure 5-65).

Figure 5-65. Warning Dialog Box.


3) Click in the Warning dialog box to delete the TIP.
4) Click to close the Edit TIPs dialog box.
7.3 Copy a TIP Schedule
1) Select TIPs from the Edit menu.
The Edit TIPs dialog box appears (Figure 5-66).

Figure 5-66. Edit TIPs Dialog Box.


2) Select a schedule to copy and click .
Select a schedule from the displayed list (by clicking with the mouse). The Copy
TIPs dialog box appears (Figure 5-67).

Figure 5-67. Copy TIPs Dialog Box.


3) Select the days and time for the new TIP and click .
Click on the appropriate day check boxes, and enter the time in the Time: field.
This creates a new TIP with the entire program list of the old TIP, and saves
it to the disk. The Copy TIP Schedule dialog box closes.
4) Click to close the Edit TIPs dialog box.
160
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

7.4 Print TIP Schedules


1) Select TIP Schedules from the Edit menu to display the Edit TIP dialog
box (Figure 5-68).

Figure 5-68. Edit TIP Dialog Box.


2) Highlight a schedule to print and click to display the Print TIP
dialog box (Figure 5-69).

Figure 5-69. Print TIP Dialog Box.


3) Select the appropriate radio button and click .
4) Click to close the Edit TIPs dialog box.
7.5 TIP Exercise
Now that you know a little about TIP Schedules, lets go through an example using
TIP Schedules in a UNITY system.
Note: This exercise will use the program created in the Programs section of this chapter.
The example system has one point, a relay that controls the lights in the building.
The company is open from 8:00 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday. The
objective of this exercise is to create a TIP Schedule that will run Lights at 8:00
A.M. Monday through Friday. Use the following procedure to create the 8:00
A.M. schedule.
1) Select TIP Schedules from the Edit Menu to display the Edit TIPs dialog
box appears (Figure 5-70).
2) Select the Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, and Fri check boxes.
A check mark appears in each box as you click on it.
3) Enter 8:00 A.M. in the Time field.
Click on the Time field, and type 08:00. The name of this schedule will be:
08:00 Mo Tu We Th Fr
4) Click .
The Add TIP Schedule dialog box appears (Figure 5-71).

161
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7.5 TIP Exercise - continued

Figure 5-70. Edit tips Dialog Box.

Figure 5-71. Add TIP Schedule Dialog Box.


5) Click .
The Add Program to TIP dialog box appears (Figure 5-72).

Figure 5-72. Add Program to TIP Dialog Box.


6) Select Lights from the list of programs to add.
You can select a name from the list (by clicking with the mouse), or you can type
the programs name into the Filename text box.
7) Click .
This adds the program Lights to the schedule. The Add Program to TIP
dialog box reappears.

162
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

7.5 TIP Exercise - continued


8) Click to close the dialog box.
The Add TIP Schedule dialog box reappears with the program LIGHTS in
the list (Figure 5-73).

Figure 5-73. Add TIP Schedule Dialog Box with LIGHTS Program Added.
9) Click to close the dialog box.
10) Click to close the Edit TIP dialog box.

163
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

8 Time of Day Schedules


Time-of-Day (TOD) Schedules are time/date based on/off control programs,
customized for different days and seasons. Because TOD Schedules are on/off
control programs, the points they control must be digital.
You can assign a different TOD strategy for each day of the week and for each of
the nine holiday types. This means that there can be 16 different strategies for a
given point in each season, for a total of 64 unique strategies. A TOD Schedule
consists of a List of Strategies that correspond to a given Day/Season combina-
tion. Each item in the Strategy List appears in order of the time-of-day that it
becomes active. Each strategy implemented with TOD Schedules is assigned a
time-of-day when it will become active (until that time-of-day, that particular
strategy is not in control of the point). UNITY passes control of the point to the
next strategy when it becomes active.
8.1 Add a TOD Schedule
1) Select Schedules from the Edit menu.
The Edit TOD dialog box appears (Figure 5-74).

Figure 5-74. Edit TOD Dialog Box.


2) Enter a point address in the point field or click on one of the red arrows
to use the point Lookup feature and click .
If the point is capable of a TOD, the Time of Day Schedule dialog box appears
(Figure 5-75). If this TOD will not use an Optimum Strategy, skip to Step 7.

Figure 5-75. Time of Day Schedule Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Time Delay value in seconds, if necessary.
UNITY maintains two distinct point command queues. When a command is
issued in UNITY, it goes to the IRM to be processed. Hundreds of points may
be scheduled to start simultaneously. The IRM places them into the first queue
lineup and commands them individually to start until it empties the queue. If,
however, a point has a time delay associated with it, it is placed into the second
UNITY queue when it is commanded. Points in this queue are also started
individually, but each point must wait until the time delay value of the previous
point in the queue has expired before the point command will be executed. In
this way, point commands may be staged. Usually time delays are associated
with TOD or calculation points.

164
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

8.1 Add a TOD Schedule - continued


4) Enter the Deadband value.
The deadband value is a temperature range during which the point will not
change state. This prevents hardware from continually cycling on or off.
Click in the Deadband field. If a number is already there, drag across the
number and enter the correct deadband value. If no number appears in the
field, simply enter the correct value.
5) Select the No Feedback checkbox, if necessary.
If this box is selected, UNITY will issue the point command once. If the box
is not selected, UNITY will check the point every minute to verify that the
command was executed. If the command has not been executed, it will be
issued again.
Note: Some subsystems will become congested when points are statused each minute. If this
becomes a problem, select the No Feedback checkbox here.
6) Enter the address of the outside air sensor.
Click in the Outside Air point field. If a point number is already there, drag
across the number and enter the correct point number. If no point number
appears in the field, simply enter the new point number.
7) Enter the address of the space temperature sensor.
Click in the Monitor point field. If a point number is already there, drag across
the number and enter the correct point number. If no point number appears
in the field, simply enter the new point number.
8) Enter the thermostat settings.
Enter the settings in the Heat Comfort Temp, Cool Comfort Temp, Heat
Design Temp and Cool Design Temp fields.
9) Select Start Program for the schedule.
Click on the Start Program box (Figure 5-76). The Run TOD Program dialog
box appears (Figure 5-77). Steps 7-9 usually only apply to calculation points.
Refer to Chapter 6.

Figure 5-76. Start Program Box and Stop Program Box.

Figure 5-77. Run TOD Program Dialog Box.


10) Enter the Start Program and click .
Select the Start program from the File list or enter the name of the program in
the Filename field. The Run TOD Program dialog box closes and the Time of
Day Schedule dialog box reappears.
11) Repeat steps 7 - 8 for the Stop Program.

165
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

8.1 Add a TOD Schedule - continued


12) Select the appropriate Day of Week check boxes found at the bottom
of the screen in the Action/Time area (Figure 5-78).
13) Select the Seasons check boxes found at the bottom of the screen in the
Action/Time area (Figure 5-79).

Figure 5-78. Day of Week. Figure 5-79. Season Check Boxes.


14) Select an action from the Action list (Figure 5-80).
15) Enter the actions execution time in the Time field (Figure 5-81).

Figure 5-80. Action List. Figure 5-81. Time Field.


16) If Set Back or Set Up was selected for the Action enter the Temperature
(Figure 5-82).

Figure 5-82. Set Back/Set Up Temperature Field.


17) If Optimum Duty Cycle or Duty Cycle was selected as the Action, enter
the Cycle Time and the Off Time (Figure 5-83).

Figure 5-83. Cycle Time and Off Time Fields.


18) Select the holiday check boxes found at the bottom of the screen in the
Action/Time area (Figure 5-84).

Figure 5-84. Holiday Check Boxes.


19) Click to display the new strategy in the Strategy list.

Figure 5-85. New Strategy.


20) Click to close the Time of Day dialog box.
21) Click to close the Edit Schedules dialog box.

166
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

8.2 Display TOD Schedules


TOD schedules can be displayed by selecting one or more days (days of the week and/
or holidays) and one or more seasons. At least one day and one season must be
selected to display a schedule. Figure 5-86 shows a schedule list with Monday selected
for the day and Summer selected for the season. Note that all days on which a schedule
is used are displayed in the list.

Figure 5-86. TOD Schedule Display with Single Day and Season Selected.
Clicking displays information for all days and seasons. Figure 5-87 shows a
schedule list with all days and seasons selected.

Figure 5-87. TOD Schedule Display with All Selected.


To hide all schedules select the None button. Figure 5-88 shows a list after the None
button has been selected.

Figure 5-88. TOD Schedule Display with None Selected.


8.3 Print Group TOD Information
1) Select Groups from the Edit menu.
The Edit Groups dialog box appears (Figure 5-89).

Figure 5-89. Edit Groups Dialog Box.


2) Enter the Group number to print and click .
Type a three digit UNITY Group Series number. The Print Group dialog box
appears (Figure 5-90).

167
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

8.3 Print Group TOD Information - continued

Figure 5-90. Print Group (Number) Dialog Box.


3) Select the destination printer and click .
A complete TOD programming list for this groups points prints at the
destination printer. The Print Group dialog box remains open.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Groups dialog box reappears.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
8.4 Edit a Strategy on a TOD Schedule
1) Select Schedules from the Edit menu.
The Edit TOD dialog box appears (Figure 5-91).

Figure 5-91. Edit TOD Dialog Box.


2) Enter a point address with a TOD schedule in the point field and select
Edit.
Note: If the point address is unknown, use the point Lookup feature to find the point.
The Time of Day Schedule dialog box appears (Figure 5-92).

Figure 5-92. Time of Day Schedule Dialog Box.


3) Select a Day to edit.
Select one of the days of the week or one of the nine holiday types (by clicking
on the appropriate Days check boxes).

168
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

8.4 Edit a Strategy on a TOD Schedule - continued


Note: These are the check boxes at the bottom of the screen.
4) Select a Season to edit.
Select one of the EMS Seasons (by clicking on the appropriate Season radio
button).
5) Select an Action (EMS Strategy).
Select one of the eight EMS Strategies (by clicking on the appropriate Action
button). The corresponding dialog box appears (see Section 8.6 -- Detailed
TOD Strategy Information). You may add up to 255 different EMS Strategies
to a given TOD Schedule.
6) Click to change the strategy in the list.
7) Click to close the dialog box.
Note: Clicking saves the changes you made. Clicking abandons all changes
made to the TOD Schedules.
8) Click to close the Edit Schedules dialog box.
8.5 Delete a Strategy from a TOD Schedule
1) Select Schedules from the Edit menu.
The Edit TOD dialog box appears (Figure 5-93).

Figure 5-93. Edit TOD Dialog Box.


2) Enter a point address with a TOD schedule in the point field and select
Edit or click on one of the red arrows to use the point Lookup feature.
The Time of Day Schedule dialog box appears (Figure 5-94).

Figure 5-94. Time of Day Schedule Dialog Box.


3) Select a strategy to delete and click .
Click on a strategy to select it. The strategy disappears from the list.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
6) Click to close the Edit Schedules dialog box.

169
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

8.6 Detailed TOD Strategy Information


There are eight basic strategies that you can use with TOD Schedules to control a point.
Selecting any one of these strategies causes a dialog box to appear that prompts you
for any necessary information.
Start - The Start Strategy sends an ON command to the point at the specified time.
This implies no control of the point after start.
Input Requirements: Day, Season
Stop - The Stop Strategy sends an OFF command to the point at the specified time.
Input Requirements: Day, Season
Optimized Start - The Optimized Start strategy will calculate the latest possible start
time that will achieve the comfort temperature by Occupancy (Optimized Start)
time. Optimized Starts will begin calculating a start time (Occupancy Start
Window), and will at the latest turn the point ON 10 minutes prior to Occupancy.
Note: Optimized Start will learn from day to day and correct its behavior until the start
time is correct.
Input Requirements: Day, Season, Heat/Cool Design Temperature, Heat/Cool
Comfort Temperature, Outside Air Temperature Point Address, Monitor Temperature
Point Address, Deadband
Optimized Stop - The Optimized Stop strategy will calculate the earliest possible
stop time that will maintain comfort temperature until the end of Occupancy
(Optimized Stop) time. Optimized Stops will begin calculating a Stop time
(End of Occupancy Stop Window), and will at the latest turn the point OFF
at the end of Occupancy.
Input Requirements: Day, Season, Heat/Cool Design Temperature, Heat/Cool
Comfort Temperature, Outside Air Temperature Point Address, Monitor Temperature
Point Address, Deadband
Duty Cycle - At target time, begin using the cycle-time/off-time ratio to control
the point. At the Duty Cycle start time, the point turns OFF for the number
of Off Time minutes specified. The point then turns ON for the remainder
of the Cycle Time (the difference between the Cycle Time and the Off Time).
The cycle then repeats.
Input Requirements: Day, Season
Optimized Duty Cycle (Temp Override) - At target time, start using the on-
time/off-time ratio to control the point. If the Monitor Temp rises above or
falls below the Deadband range of the Comfort Temp, force the point on until
the next scheduled off cycle or until another strategy becomes active. You
would typically use this to switch the power on a local thermostat system. For
example, if a rooftop unit (RTU) with local thermostatic control is a point that
will be Optimized Duty Cycled, the following will occur:
Below the comfort limit, the RTU will turn on, enabling local control.
Within the comfort limits, the RTU will Duty Cycle using the OFF time and
Cycle time specified. The beginning of a cycle will always be the next
scheduled time, whether or not the system exceeds the comfort limits.
Above the comfort limit, the RTU will turn on, enabling local control.
Input Requirements: Day, Season, Monitor Temperature Point Address, Deadband
Setup - At Setup Start Time, use the specified Setup Temperature as a target to
maintain until another strategy becomes active.
Note 1: All Setup strategies will run ONLY when the system is in the Cooling mode.
Note 2: Setup and Setback are the only strategies that maintain a given temperature.
Input Requirements: Day, Season, Monitor Temperature Point Address, Deadband
8.6 Detailed TOD Strategy Information - continued

170
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming
Setback - At Setback Start Time, use the specified Setback Temperature as a target
to maintain until another strategy becomes active.
Note 1: All Setback strategies will run ONLY when the system is in the Heating mode.
Note 2: Setup and Setback are the only strategies that maintain a given temperature.
Input Requirements: Day, Season, Monitor Temperature Point Address, Deadband
8.7 TOD Schedule Exercise
Now that you know something about Time-of-Day Schedules, lets go through an
example using TOD Schedules. The example system has three hardware points:
A rooftop unit (RTU) cooling system with local thermostatic control, an outside
air temperature sensor (11203), and a space temperature sensor (50507). The
example assumes that this is the summer season and the UNITY system is in the
cooling mode. This example also assumes the following about the RTU point:
You have already programmed the point as part of a Delta 1000 group (1000
Series panel) called Rooftop Unit Group.
The point descriptor is Rooftop Unit #1.
The point is a digital with an engineering unit of On/Off (2 Pos).
Relay #3 has been assigned to this point.
The local thermostat setting is 70F with a built-in Deadband of 4.
The objective of this exercise is to create the following Summer TOD Schedule
for the RTU located at point 101001:
Sunday: No strategies
Monday: Optimum Start at 7:45 AM/Optimum Stop at 6:00 PM.
Tuesday - Saturday: No strategies
8.7.1 Create the TOD Schedule
1) Select Schedules from the Edit menu.
The Edit TOD dialog box appears (Figure 5-95).

Figure 5-95. Edit TOD Dialog Box.


2) Enter the point address (101001) in the point field and select Edit.
The Time of Day Schedule dialog box appears (Figure 5-96)

Figure 5-96. Time of Day Schedule Dialog Box.


8.7.1 Create the TOD Schedule - continued.

171
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
3) Enter the Deadband value.
Click in the Deadband field. If a number is already there, drag across the number and
type 4. If no number appears in the field, simply type 4.
4) Enter the address of the outside air sensor.
Click in the outside air point field. If a point number is already there, drag across
the number and type 101011. If no point number appears in the field, simply
type 101011.
5) Enter the address of the space temperature sensor.
Click in the Monitor point field. If a point number is already there, drag across
the number and type 101012. If no point number appears in the field, simply
type 101012.
6) Enter the thermostat setting.
Click in the Cool Comfort Temp field, drag across the current number and type
70. Click in the Heat Comfort Temp field, drag across the current number and
type 64.
7) Select Monday as the current Day to program.
Click on the M check box in the Action/Time area (Figure 5-97).

Figure 5-97. Monday Check Box Location.


8) Select Summer as the current Season to program.
Click on the second check box in the Action/Time area (Figure 5-98).

Figure 5-98. Summer Check Box Location.


9) Select Optimum Start from the Action list (Figure 5-99).

Figure 5-99. Action List Location.


10) Enter the Start time.
Enter an occupancy time of 7:45 AM by typing 7:45 in the Start time field
(Figure 5-100).

Figure 5-100. Time Field Location.


11) Click (Figure 5-101).
The new strategy appears in the Strategy list (Figure 5-102).
8.7.1 Create the TOD Schedule - continued.

172
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

Figure 5-101. Add Button Location.

Figure 5-102. New Strategy.


12) Select Optimum Stop from the Action list (Figure 5-103).

Figure 5-103. Action List Location.


13) Enter the Stop time.
Enter an end of occupancy time of 6:00 PM by typing 18:00 in the Stop time
field (Figure 5-104).

Figure 5-104. Time Field Location.


14) Click (Figure 5-105).

Figure 5-105. Add Button Location.


The new strategy appears in the Strategy list (Figure 5-106).
8.7.1 Create the TOD Schedule - continued.

173
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Figure 5-106. New Strategy.


15) Click to close the dialog box.
16) Click to close the Edit Schedules dialog box.

174
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

9 Advance Schedules
Advance Schedules are TOD Schedules that you modify in advance. In other words,
you can temporarily change an existing TOD Schedule for a given date (day/
month). After an Advance Schedule runs, UNITY erases it. In other words,
Advance Schedules will not make any permanent changes to a TOD Schedule for
a given point. Up to 99% of your Advance Schedules will probably affect the
current day or a day within the next two weeks. However, you can enter Advance
Schedules for dates up to 11 months and 31 days from the current date. In this
way, you can think of programming Advance Schedules as similar to programming
a VCR. Even though you can program some models in advance for up to a year,
most people will not program beyond two weeks from the current day.
9.1 Advance Schedule Exercise
Lets go through an example using Advance Schedules. The example system is the
same one from the TOD Schedule exercise earlier in this chapter. In addition, this
example assumes the following:
1) The current date is June 25.
2) The area controlled by the RTU will become vacant at 12:00 Noon on
Tuesday the 3rd of July.
The objective of this exercise is to create an Advance Schedule for point 031001
that will move the Optimized Stop from 6:00 P.M. to 12:00 noon on Wednesday
the 3rd of July. Use the following procedure.
1) Select Point Commands from the Commands Menu.
The Point Command dialog box appears (Figure 5-107).

Figure 5-107. Point Command Dialog Box.


2) Enter the Point Address.
As you type, the point address appears in the Point text box.
3) Click .
The Advance Scheduling calendar dialog box appears (Figure 5-108).

175
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

9.1 Advance Schedule Exercise - continued

Figure 5-108. Advance Scheduling Calendar Dialog Box.


4) Select July as the month to edit.
As you select the July radio button, the arrangement of the buttons will change
to reflect the correct calendar.
5) Select Wednesday the 3rd as the day to edit.
The Select Season dialog box appears (Figure 5-109).

Figure 5-109. Select Season Dialog Box.


6) Select a season by clicking on the radio button.
Click on the radio button for Summer.
7) Click .
The Advance Schedule dialog box appears (Figure 5-110).

Figure 5-110. Advance Schedule Dialog Box.


176
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

9.1 Advance Schedule Exercise - continued


Note: The current TOD Schedule appears in the large window.
8) Change the Optimum Stop.
Click on the 18:00 Optimum Stop strategy, and click .
9) Enter the new Optimum Stop time.
Enter a stop time of 12:00 P.M. by typing 12:00 in the Time field.
10) Click .
The new Optimum Stop time appears in the list (Figure 5-111).

Figure 5-111. Advance Schedule Dialog Box with New Optimum Stop Time.
11) Click .
12) Click to close the Point Command dialog box.

177
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

10 Event Initiated Activities


Event Initiated Activities (EIAs) occur when a point generates an appropriate event.
EIAs let you perform specific activities in response to events at a given point. You
can use any of the appropriate point alarms as Events to trigger EIAs from a given
point.
Note: Future Analog, Future Digital, and CPA points do not generate any point level events.
There are three types of Event Initiated Activities:
Programs (EIPs) - See Section 10.3.2 for more information. Programs can be
written on any user PC. They are globally accessed.
Note: You must create and enter a program before you can create an EIP with it.
Messages (EIMs) - See Section 10.3.1 -- Messages -- for more information on
creating and using Messages. Messages must be created on the machine they will
be used on. Messages are local.
Note: You must create and enter a message before you can create an EIM with it.
Graphics (EIGS) - See Chapter 3 -- User Interface Setup --for more information
on creating and displaying Logical Graphics. Graphics must be created on the
machine they will be used on. Graphics are local.
Note: You must create and enter the Logical Graphic before you can create an EIG with it.
The programming of any Event Initiated Activity occurs by linking an event to a
set of Programs, Messages, or Logical Graphics. Each separate event can trigger
a unique set of EIAs (Figure 5-112).
Event Links (EIAs) Activity
Combination
Program: FS20 Power Fail
Power Fail Message: FS20 Problem
Graphic: Lobby Fire

Program: Ground Fault


Ground Fault Message: FS20 Problem

Program: 1021 Problem


Tamper Alarm Message: 1021 Tamper
Graphic: Lobby Security

Figure 5-112. Event Linking Examples.


10.1 Print EIA Information
1) Select Groups from the Edit menu.
The Edit Groups dialog box appears (Figure 5-113).

Figure 5-113. Edit Groups Dialog Box.


2) Enter the Group number to print and click .
Type a three-digit Group number. The Print Group dialog box appears (Figure
5-114).

178
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

10.1 Print EIA Information - continued

Figure 5-114. Print Group Dialog Box.


3) Select the destination printer and click .
Click on the appropriate radio button. A complete list of EIAs assigned to points
in this group prints at the destination printer. The Print Group dialog box
remains open.
Note: Group EIAS are listed under point #00.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
5) Click to close the Edit Groups dialog box.
10.2 Edit Point EIAs
1) Select Events from the Edit menu.
The Edit Events dialog box appears (Figure 5-115).

Figure 5-115. Edit Events Dialog Box.


2) Enter the point number in the Point: field and click .
The EIA Editor dialog box appears (Figure 5-116).

Figure 5-116. EIA Editor Dialog Box.


3) Select an Event.
Click on one of the event types to trigger an EIA.

179
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

10.2 Edit Point EIAs - continued


4) Add Messages, Programs, and Graphs for this event, as necessary.
See Section 10.3 - Detailed EIA Procedures.
5) Repeat steps 3 - 4, as necessary.
You may program EIAs for any or all of the events listed.
6) Click to close the dialog box.
7) Click to close the Edit Events dialog box.
10.3 Detailed EIA Procedures
10.3.1 Add/Delete an EIM
1) Select Events from the Edit menu.
The Edit Events dialog box appears (Figure 5-117).

Figure 5-117. Edit Events Dialog Box.


2) Enter the point number in the Point: field and click .
The EIA Editor dialog box appears (Figure 5-118).

Figure 5-118. EIA Editor Dialog Box.


3) Select an Event.
Click on one of the event types to trigger some EIAs.
4) Click .
The Select Messages for: (Alarm Type) dialog box appears (Figure 5-119).

180
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

10.3.1 Add/Delete an EIM - continued

Figure 5-119. Select Messages for: Dialog Box.


The list on the left displays the available messages. The list on the right displays
the messages assigned to the current event type.
5) Select new messages to display, as necessary.
Select a message in the Available list then click , or double-click on the
message to move to the right.
6) Select old messages to NOT display, as necessary.
Select a message in the Selected list then click , or double-click on the
message to move to the left.
7) Click .
The Select Messages for: dialog box closes and the EIA Editor dialog box
reappears with the selected Message name(s) appearing in the Messages area
(Figure 5-120).

Figure 5-120. EIA Editor Dialog Box with Message Assigned.


8) Click to close the dialog box.
9) Click to close the Edit Events dialog box.

181
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

10.3.2 Add/Delete an EIP


1) Select Events from the Edit menu.
The Edit Events dialog box appears (Figure 5-121).

Figure 5-121. Edit Events Dialog Box.


2) Enter the point number in the Point: field and click .
The EIA Editor dialog box appears (Figure 5-122)

Figure 5-122. EIA Editor Dialog Box.


3) Select an Event.
Click on one of the event types you program associated with.
4) Click .
The Select Programs for: (Alarm Type) dialog box appears (Figure 5-123).

Figure 5-123. Select Programs for: Dialog Box.


The list on the left displays the available programs. The list on the right displays
the programs assigned to the current event type.
5) Select new programs to display, as necessary.
Select a program from the Available list and click , or double-click on
the program to move it to the right.
6) Select old programs NOT to display, as necessary.

182
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

10.3.2 Add/Delete an EIP - continued


Select a program from the Selected list and click , or double-click on the
program to move it to the left.
7) Click .
The Select Programs for: dialog box closes and the EIA Editor dialog box
reappears with the selected Program names appearing in the Programs area
(Figure 5-124).

Figure 5-124. EIA Editor Dialog Box with Program Added.


8) Click to close the dialog box.
9) Click to close the Edit Events dialog box.
10.3.3 Disable EIPs
1) Select Events from the Edit pulldown menu.
The Edit Events dialog box appears (Figure 5-125).

Figure 5-125. Edit Events Dialog Box.


2) Click .
The Edit Segregation Files dialog box opens (Figure 5-126).

Figure 5-126. Edit Segregation Files Dialog Box.

183
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

10.3.3 Disable EIPs - continued


3) Select a point to disable from the available list and click .
The point is removed from the Available (Enabled) list and is added to the Selected
(Disabled) list.
4) Repeat step 3 for each point being disabled.
5) To remove a point from the Selected (Disabled) list select the point being
removed from the Selected (Disabled) list and click .
The point is removed from the Selected (Disabled) list and is added to the
Available (Enabled) list.
6) Repeat steps 5 for each point being disabled.
7) Click .
This saves the point settings (Enabled or Disabled). The Edit Segregation
Files dialog box closes and the Edit Events dialog box reappears.
8) Click to close the dialog box.
10.3.4 Change a Programs Priority
1) Select Events from the Edit menu.
The Edit Events dialog box appears (Figure 5-127).

Figure 5-127. Edit Events Dialog Box.


2) Enter the point number in the Point: field and click .
The EIA Editor dialog box appears (Figure 5-128).

Figure 5-128. EIA Editor Dialog Box.


3) Click on the program to change and click .
The Change Priority dialog box appears (Figure 5-129).

184
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

10.3.4 Change a Programs Priority - continued

Figure 5-129. The Change Priority Dialog Box.


4) Use the spin boxes to select the command and residual priorities.
The priority number can range from 0-99, where 99 is the highest priority, and 0
is the least. Residual Priority can also be set to None. The command priority is
set in the program initiator to designate what the priority for the commands will
be when the program is activated. This number designates the priority level of
this program. An operator must have a higher priority number than the program
in order to enable, disable, or modify the program. If the priority of another
program or command is higher than this programs priority, the other program
will be implemented, not this one. The Residual Priority is the priority level the
point will resume after this program has commanded it. The command priority
must be higher than the residual priority.
Note: If you are to command a program, schedule, or point, you must have a higher priority
level than the item you are trying to command.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
6) Click to close the Edit Events dialog box.
10.3.5 Add/Modify an EIG
1) Select Events from the Edit menu.
The Edit Events dialog box appears (Figure 5-130).

Figure 5-130. Edit Events Dialog Box.


2) Enter the point number in the Point: field and click .
The EIA Editor dialog box appears (Figure 5-131).

Figure 5-131. EIA Editor Dialog Box.


3) To change an existing EIG, select an EIG to modify and click .
To add an EIG, click in the Graphs section.
The EIG Assignment dialog box appears (Figure 5-132).

185
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

10.3.5 Add/Modify an EIG - continued

Figure 5-132. EIG Assignment Dialog Box.


4) Select a new logical graphic to display and click .
The logical graphic name highlights as you select it. The EIG Assignment dialog
box closes and the EIA Editor dialog box reappears with the selected Logical
Graphic name(s) appearing in the EIG list (Figure 5-133).

Figure 5-133. EIA Editor with EIG Added.


5) Click to close the dialog box.
6) Click to close the Edit Events dialog box.
10.3.6 Delete an EIG
1) Select Events from the Edit menu.
The Edit Events dialog box appears (Figure 5-134).

Figure 5-134. Edit Events Dialog Box.


2) Enter the point number in the Point: field and click .
The EIA Editor dialog box appears (Figure 5-135).

186
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

10.3.6 Delete an EIG - continued

Figure 5-135. EIA Editor Dialog Box.


3) Click on one of the names appearing in the Graphs list to select an EIG
to delete.
4) Click in the Graphics section.
The selected name disappears from the Graphs list.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
6) Click to close the Edit Events dialog box.
10.3.7 Copy Activities to Other Events
1) Select Events from the Edit menu to display the Edit Events dialog box
appears (Figure 5-136).

Figure 5-136. Edit Events Dialog Box.


2) Enter the point number in the Point: field and click .
The EIA Editor dialog box appears (Figure 5-137).

Figure 5-137. EIA Editor Dialog Box.


3) Select an Event and click .
Click on one of the names appearing in the Alarms/Events list. The Copy EIAS
dialog box appears (Figure 5-138).
187
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

10.3.7 Copy Activities to Other Events - continued

Figure 5-138. Copy EIAs Dialog Box.


4) Select Event types to copy to, as necessary.
Select an event in the Available list then click , or double-click on the
event to move to the right.
5) Select Event types NOT to copy to, as necessary.
Select an event in the Selected list then click , or double-click on the
event to move to the left.
6) Click .
The EIA Editor dialog box reappears with all of the EIMS, EIPS, and EIGS
from the original event (selected in Step 1) copied to the target events (selected
in Steps 3 - 4).
7) Click to close the dialog box.
8) Click to close the Edit Events dialog box.

188
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 5: UNITY Programming

11 REXX Programs
REXX is a programming language that is built into OS/2. With UNITY, REXX
is used to create scripts (short programs) that allow access to other applications
without the user having to leave the UNITY environment. This feature is
especially useful when using Microsofts Excel spreadsheet application to pro-
cess UNITY datafiles. The UNITY datafiles are stored in DDE (Dynamic Data
Exchange) format, allowing them to be used by any spreadsheet application that
can read the DDE format. For detailed information on programming with
REXX, see the REXX Information file in the OS/2 Information file found on the OS/
2 desktop.
Dynamic Data Exchange - Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) is a type of
Interprocess Communication (IPC) protocol. DDE lets applications communi-
cate with other applications and files. An application using DDE sends a message
requesting information from other applications and files. If the information exists
it is sent to the requesting application.
11.1 Use REXX Programs with UNITY
REXX programs are created with the OS/2 System Editor, text editors or word
processors. The name of the REXX program must be in standard DOS format,
i.e., a maximum of eight characters followed by a three letter extension. If REXX
programs do not have UNITY threads, the extension used for the program must
be .CMD. REXX programs with UNITY thread calls will have a .URX extension.
REXX programs must be stored in the UNITY/UI/REXX directory.
REXX programs must always begin with a comment. This is the only case in
which a comment is required in REXX programs. Comments begin with /* and
end with */. The opening comment must begin in the first column. This means
there can be no indentation in the first line.
Note: You can find a list of custom REXX functions for UNITY in the UNITY Readme
file loaded during the installation of UNITY.
11.2 REXX Program Template
The following template can be used with the UNITY REXX Script feature to
launch applications from within the UNITY environment, but this is only one
of hundreds of REXX applications.
/*OPENING COMMENT*/
ADDRESS CMD DRIVE:
CD SUBDIRECTORY 1
CD SUBDIRECTORY 2
CD SUBDIRECTORY ETC.
APPLICATION
Line 1: The Opening Comment should name or describe the application being
accessed by the REXX program.
Line 2: DRIVE: is the drive containing the application
Lines 3 - 5: CD SUBDIRECTORY 1, CD SUBDIRECTORY 2, and CD
SUBDIRECTORY ETC. are optional and are needed only when the application
is contained within a subdirectory (or subdirectories).
Line 6 : APPLICATION is the name of the application being accessed by the
REXX program. Leave off the applications extension.
Note: The comment beginning (/*) and ending ( */) delimiters and all quotation marks
appearing in the program are required.
Some applications will automatically open in the foreground when launched from
a REXX program, however, many will not. If an application does not appear in
the foreground:
1) Call up the Window List by simultaneously pressing the Ctrl and Esc
buttons. The application should appear in the Window List.
2) Double-click on the application name. The application will be opened in
the foreground.

189
Chapter 5: UNITY Programming Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

190
Chapter 6: Calculation
Points

Chapter Overview
This chapter of the Users Guide to UNITY will tell you:
How calculation groups and calculation points operate
How to create, modify, delete, copy and print calculation
groups and points
How calculation point operators and functions behave

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Calculation Point Inputs


Calculation groups let you create custom control programs. Control is achieved
through math and logic calculations using inputs, outputs, system data
information (e.g., time, day of week, etc.), and calculation operators and
functions. The results of these calculations can be used to control output
devices such as relays and damper actuators.
Below is a description of Calculation Point inputs. Calculation point inputs
are used as inputs for analog and digital calculation points. They are also used
to define the values used by function calculation point functions. Figure 6-
1 shows the Select Input dialog box.

Figure 6-1. Select Input Dialog Box.


No Data - No Data is the default setting for a calculation point input. When
No Data is selected the input is left blank.
Point Data - Point Data assigns the data from a selected point as the input.
Points can be analog, digital or calculation points. Point data always returns
a value. If it is selected as the input type of a digital point, it will return a value
of 1 or 0. Point data will NEVER return a value of OFF or ON.
Digital Eng. Unit - Digital Eng. Unit uses a points digital engineering unit
as the input. This can be used to compare a points actual current engineering
unit with the engineering unit it should have (as determined by the last issued
command). As an example, a digital point has been assigned the OPEN/
CLOSE engineering unit pair. Using Digital Eng. Unit allows a comparison to
be made to verify if the points engineering unit is OPEN after it has been
issued a command to open.
Digital Last Command - Digital Last Command uses the last command
issued to a selected point as the input. The input will be an engineering unit.
Alarm Condition - Alarm Condition uses the status of the alarm bit for a
selected point as an input. Usually alarm condition will return Normal or
Alarm.
Constant - Constant uses a fixed value as an input. If constant is chosen as
the input type, the Select Constant dialog box appears. See Figure 6-2. You
can enter a value or a time in the text fields, or you may select an input from
the list boxes.

192
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

1 Calculation Point Inputs - continued

Figure 6-2. Select Constant Dialog Box.


Minute - Minute uses the current minute (00 to 59) from the system clock as
the input value.
Hour - Hour uses the current hour (00 to 23) from the system clock as the
input value.
Day of Week - Day of Week uses the current day of the week as the input
value. Sunday has the least value, and Saturday is the highest value.
Day of Month - Day of Month uses the current day of the month (1 to 31)
as the input value.
Year - Year uses the current year as the input value. This is a four digit value.
The turn of the century will present no problem, as far as UNITY is
concerned.
Season - Season uses the current season as the input value.
Time - Time uses the current time from the system clock as the input. It is
entered in minutes past midnight format.

193
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2 Calculation Point Operators


Below is a description of each of the different Calculation Point operators. These
operators are used only by Analog and Digital Calculation Points.
When operators with a D suffix are used a digital output is the result.
Digital calculation point operators will return a digital output, i.e., the output
will be one of two possible states. Examples of digital outputs are ON/OFF,
FALSE/ TRUE, etc.
Operators with an A suffix will return an analog calculation point result.
Analog calculation will return a value, e.g., 78.00 DEG, 65.00 GPM, etc.
2.1 Absolute Difference (ABS DIFF) A
The Absolute Difference (ABS DIFF) operator compares the value of one
input with the value of another input. The absolute difference will always be
positive. The first input will usually be the point data of a specified analog
input while the second input will usually be a constant. Often, it is used to find
the difference between the supply and return temperatures of a chiller or a
boiler.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 ABS DIFF Point Data of 001002) <= (8) THEN
Run Program 3.
2.2 Absolute Value (ABS) A
The Absolute Value (ABS) operator calculates the absolute value of one
input. The absolute value of any number will always be positive regardless of
whether the actual value is positive or negative. The input will usually be the
point data of a specified analog input.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 ABS) = (8) THEN Run Program 3.
2.3 Centigrade to Fahrenheit (C to F) A
The Centigrade to Fahrenheit (C to F) operator converts a centigrade value
to its Fahrenheit equivalent.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 C to F) >= (68.00) THEN Run Program 7
2.4 Dew Point to Relative Humidity (DP to RH) A
The Dew Point to Relative Humidity ( DP to RH) operator calculates the
relative humidity based on the dry bulb temperature and the dew point. The
first input is the dry bulb temperature and the second input is the dew point.
Example:
(Point Data of 001001 DP to RH Point Data of 001002)
2.5 Divide (/) A
The Divide (/) operator performs an arithmetic division. It is used to divide
the values of two or more inputs.
Examples:
1) (Point Data of 001002 / Point Data of 001002)
2) IF (Point Data of 001001 / Point Data of 001002) <= (45) Then Point
002001 on

194
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

2.6 Enthalpy using Dew Point (ENT_DP) A


The Enthalpy using Dew Point (ENT_DP) operator calculates the enthalpy
using dry bulb temperature and dew point. The first input is the dry bulb
temperature and the second input is the dew point.
Example:
1) (Point Data of 001001 ENT_DP Point Data of 001002)
2) IF (Point Data of 001001 ENT_DP Point Data of 001002) > (33) Run
Program 20
2.7 Enthalpy using Relative Humidity (ENT_RH) A
The Enthalpy using Relative Humidity (ENT_RH) operator calculates the
enthalpy using dry bulb temperature and relative humidity. The first input is
the dry bulb temperature and the second input is the relative humidity.
Example:
1) (Point Data of 001001 ENT_RH Point Data of 001002)
2) IF (Point Data of 001001 ENT_RH Point Data of 001002) > (33) Run
Program 20
2.8 Equal (=) D
The Equal operator (=) is used to determine a logical equivalence.
Example:
IF (Digital Eng. Unit of 001001 = ON ) THEN Point 101005 on. This
example turns on point 101005 if the digital engineering unit of point
001001 is logically equivalent to ON.
2.9 Exponent (EXP) A
The Exponent (EXP) operator calculates the value of the first input raised to
the power of the second input.
Example:
1) (Point Data of 001001 EXP 2.00) Result: (Value of 001001)2
2) IF (Point Data of 001001 EXP 2.00) <= (10) THEN Run Program 10
2.10 Fahrenheit to Centigrade (F to C) A
The Fahrenheit to Centigrade (F to C) operator converts a Fahrenheit value
to its centigrade equivalent.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 F to C) >= (20.00) THEN Run Program 7
2.11 Flow Rate (FLOW) A
The Flow Rate (FLOW) operator calculates the flow rate in a given pipe based
on two analog inputs: the pressure differential across an orifice and a constant
multiplier.
Example:
1) IF (Point Data of 001001 FLOW CONSTANT) <= (1000) THEN Run
Program 10
2.12 Flow Rate using Square Root (FLOWSQRT) A
The Flow Rate using Square Root (FLOWSQRT) operator calculates the
square root of the pressure differential across an orifice and then applies the
constant multiplier.
Example:
1) (Point Data of 001001 FLOWSQRT CONSTANT)<= (10) THEN Run
Program 10
195
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.13 Greater Than (>) D


The Greater Than operator is used in arithmetic operations to compare two
values. The statement structure calculates whether or not the first value is
greater than the second value.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 > 78.00) THEN Run Cool on. This example will
run a program named Cool on if the value of point 001001 is greater
than 78.00.
2.14 Greater Than or Equal (>=) D
The Greater Than or Equal (>=) operator is used in arithmetic operations to
compare two values. The statement structure calculates whether or not the
first value is greater than or equal to the second value.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 >= 68.00) THEN Run Heat off. This example
will run a program named Heat off if the value of point 001001 is
greater than or equal to 68.00.
2.15 Heat Index (HEAT) A
The Heat Index (HEAT) operator calculates the heat index based on the dry
bulb temperature and the relative humidity. The first input used is the dry
bulb temperature and the second input is the relative humidity.
Examples:
1) (Point Data of 001001 HEAT Point Data of 001002)
2) IF (Point Data of 001002 HEAT Point Data of 001002) > (78.00) THEN
Run Program 5.

2.16 Less Than (<) D


The Less Than operator is used in arithmetic operations to compare two
values. The statement structure calculates whether or not the first value is less
than the second value.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 < 68.00) THEN Run Heat on. This example will
run a program named Heat on if the value of point 001001 is less than
68.00.
2.17 Less Than or Equal (<=) D
The Less Than or Equal (<=) operator is used in arithmetic operations to
compare two values. The statement structure calculates whether or not the
first value is less than or equal to the second value.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 <= 78.00) THEN Run Cool off. This example
will run a program named Cool off if the value of point 001001 is less
than or equal to 78.00.

196
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

2.18 Logical AND (AND) D


The Logical AND (AND) operator checks two inputs to see if both of the inputs
are true. If both of the inputs are true then the result of the operation is true.
If either of the inputs are false then the result of the operation is false.
Examples:
IF (Digital Eng. Unit of 001001 = ON) AND (Digital Eng. Unit of 001002
= OFF) THEN Run Program 5.
The results of an AND operation are shown in Table 6-1.
FIRST INPUT AND SECOND INPUT RESULT
TRUE TRUE TRUE

TRUE FALSE FALSE

FALSE TRUE FALSE

FALSE FALSE FALSE

Table 6-1.
2.19 Logical AND NOT (ANDNOT) D
The Logical AND NOT (ANDNOT) operator checks two inputs to see if the
first input is true and the second input is false. If the first input is true and the
second input is false then the result of the operation is true, otherwise the
operation is false.
Examples:
IF (Digital Eng. Unit of 001001 = ON) ANDNOT (Digital Eng. Unit of
001002 = OFF) THEN Run Program 5.
The results of an ANDNOT operation are shown in Table 6-2.
FIRST INPUT ANDNOT SECOND INPUT RESULT
TRUE TRUE FALSE

TRUE FALSE TRUE

FALSE TRUE FALSE

FALSE FALSE FALSE

Table 6-2.
2.20 Logical Exclusive OR (XOR) D
The Logical Exclusive OR (XOR) operator checks two inputs to see if one
input is true. If either input is true, then the result of the operation is true. If
both inputs are true, false is the result.
Example:
IF (Digital Eng. Unit of 001001 = ON) XOR (Digital Eng. Unit of 001002
= OFF) THEN Run Program 5.
The results of an XOR operation are shown in Table 6-3.
FIRST INPUT XOR SECOND INPUT RESULT
TRUE TRUE FALSE

TRUE FALSE TRUE

FALSE TRUE TRUE

FALSE FALSE FALSE

Table 6-3.

197
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.21 Logical NOT AND (NAND) D


The Logical NOT AND (NAND) operator checks two inputs to see if one of the
inputs is false. If both inputs are true, then the result of the operation is false.
If either input is false, then the result of the operation is true.
Example:
IF (Digital Eng. Unit of 001001 = ON) NAND (Digital Eng. Unit of 001002
= OFF) THEN Run Program 5.
The results of a NAND operation are shown in Table 6-4.
FIRST INPUT NAND SECOND INPUT RESULT
TRUE TRUE FALSE

TRUE FALSE TRUE

FALSE TRUE TRUE

FALSE FALSE TRUE

Table 6-4.
2.22 Logical NOT OR (NOR) D
The Logical NOT OR (NOR) operator checks two inputs to see if both inputs are
false. If either input or both inputs are true, then the result of the operation is
false. If both inputs are false then the result of the operation is true.
Examples:
IF (Digital Eng. Unit of 001001 = ON) NOR (Digital Eng. Unit of 001002
= OFF) THEN Run Program 5.
The results of a NOR operation are shown in Table 6-5.
FIRST INPUT NOR SECOND INPUT RESULT
TRUE TRUE FALSE

TRUE FALSE FALSE

FALSE TRUE FALSE

FALSE FALSE TRUE

Table 6-5.
2.23 Logical OR (OR) D
The Logical OR (OR) operator checks two inputs to see if either input is true.
If either input is true, then the result of the operation is true. If both inputs
are false, then the result of the operation is false.
Examples:
IF (Digital Eng. Unit of 001001 = ON) OR (Digital Eng. Unit of 001002
= OFF) THEN Run Program 5.
The results of an OR operation are shown in Table 6-6.
FIRST INPUT OR SECOND INPUT RESULT
TRUE TRUE TRUE

TRUE FALSE TRUE

FALSE TRUE TRUE

FALSE FALSE FALSE

Table 6-6.

198
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

2.24 Logical OR NOT (ORNOT) D


The Logical OR NOT (ORNOT) operator checks two inputs to see if the first
input is true or if both inputs are false. If the first input is false and the second
input is true, then the result of the input is false, otherwise the operation is
true.
Examples:
IF (Digital Eng. Unit of 001001 = ON) ORNOT (Digital Eng. Unit of
001002 = OFF) THEN Run Program 5.
The results of an ORNOT operation are shown in Table 6-8.
FIRST INPUT ORNOT SECOND INPUT RESULT
TRUE TRUE TRUE

TRUE FALSE TRUE

FALSE TRUE FALSE

FALSE FALSE TRUE

Table 6-8.
2.25 Maximum (MAX) A
The Maximum (MAX) operator selects the highest value of two inputs.
Examples:
1) (Point Data of 001001 MAX Point Data of 001002) MAX (Point Data
of 001003)
2) IF (Point Data of 001001 MAX Point Data of 001002) < (68) THEN Run
Program 32.
2.26 Minimum (MIN) A
The Minimum (MIN) operator selects the lowest value of two inputs.
Examples:
1) (Point Data of 001001 MIN Point Data of 001002) MIN (Point Data of
001003)
2) IF (Point Data of 001001 MIN Point Data of 001002) > (78) THEN Run
Program 32.
2.27 Minus () A
The Minus () operator performs an arithmetic subtraction. It is used to
subtract the value of the second input from the value of the first input.
Examples:
1) (Point Data of 001001 - Point Data of 001002)
2) IF (Point Data of 001001 Point Data of 001002) <= (45) Then Point
002001 on
2.28 Modulo (MOD) A
The Modulo (MOD) operator divides the first input by the second input. The
result of the operation is the remainder of the division. If a smaller number
is divided by a larger number the result will be the value of the smaller
number.
Examples:
1) (13 MOD 6) Result: 1 (13 6 = 2 remainder 1)
2) (10 MOD 2) Result: 0 (10 2 = 5 remainder 0)
3) (8 MOD 12) Result: 8 (8 12 = 0 remainder 8)

199
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.29 Multiply (*) A


The multiply (*) operator performs an arithmetic multiplication. It is used to
multiply the values of two inputs.
Examples:
1) (Point Data of 001001 * Point Data of 001002)
2) IF (Point Data of 001001 * Point Data of 001002) <= (45) Then Point
002001 on
2.30 Natural Log (LN)A
The Natural Log (LN) operator calculates the natural log of one input. The
input will usually be the point data of a specified analog input.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 LN) <= (8) THEN Run Program 3.
2.31 Not Equal (<>) D
The Not Equal operator (<>) is used for logical inequivalences.
Examples:
1) IF (Point data of 001001 <> 78.00) THEN Point 202005 on. This
example turns on point 202005 if the value in point 001001 is not equal
to 78.00.
2) IF (Digital Last Command of 001001 <> AUTO) THEN Run Program 2.
This example will run program 2 if the last digital command issued to
point 001001 was not an AUTO command.
2.32 Plus (+) A
The Plus (+) operator performs an arithmetic addition. It is used to add the
values of two inputs.
Examples:
1) (Point Data of 001001 + Point Data of 001002)
2) IF (Point Data of 001001 + Point Data of 001002) >= (45) Then Point
002001 on
2.33 Random (RAND) A
The Random (RAND) operator returns a random value that lies between the
values of the first input and the second input.
Example:
(20 RAND 40) Result: A random value between 20 and 40.
2.34 Relative Humidity to Dew Point (RH to DP) A
The Relative Humidity to Dew Point (RH to DP) operator calculates the dew
point based on the dry bulb temperature and the relative humidity. The first
input is the dry bulb temperature and the second input is the relative
humidity.
Example:
(Point Data of 001001 RH to DP Point Data of 001002)
2.35 Square Root (SQRT) A
The Square Root (SQRT) operator calculates the square root of one input.
The input will usually be the point data of a specified analog input.
Examples:
IF (Point Data of 001001 SQRT) <= (8) THEN Run Program 3.

200
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

2.36 Time Delay (DELAY) D


The Time Delay (DELAY) operator delays an operation based on the results
of the first input (a logical statement) and the second input (constant = delay
time). The delay is in minutes.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 <= 68.00) DELAY (5) THEN Run Program 17
In this example program 17 will start 5 minutes after the point data of 001001
becomes less than or equal to 68.00.
2.37 Truncation (TRUNC)A
The Truncation (TRUNC) operator calculates the truncated value of one
input. Truncation rounds down the value of the input to the previous integer.
The input will usually be the point data of a specified analog input.
Example:
IF (Point Data of 001001 TRUNC) = (8) THEN Run Program 3.
2.38 Wind Chill (WIND) A
The Wind Chill (WIND) operator calculates the wind chill based on the dry
bulb temperature and the wind speed. The first input used is the dry bulb
temperature and the second input is the wind speed.
Examples:
1) (Point Data of 001001 WIND Point Data of 001002)
2) IF (Point Data of 001002 WIND Point Data of 001002) < (25.00) THEN
Run Program 5.

201
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3 Calculation Point Functions


The following functions pertain only to Function Calculation Points. The
following procedures can be used to reach the Function Point Editors.
1) Select Groups from the Edit menu.
The Edit Groups dialog box appears (Figure 6-3).

Figure 6-3. Edit Groups Dialog box.


2) Enter the number of the new group in the Enter Group Number:
field.
Note: This Group Number MUST have been specified as a Calculation Group in the
initial install of UNITY. If you are not sure what the Group Number for
Calculation points should be, check your System Map from the Misc menu.
3) Click to open the Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) dialog
box (Figure 6-4).

Figure 6-4. Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) Dialog Box.


4) Enter the group descriptor in the Group Descriptor: field.
5) Select a point in the point list and click .
The Edit Point ###### dialog box appears (Figure 6-5).

Figure 6-5. Edit Point ###### Dialog Box.

202
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3 Calculation Point Functions - continued


6) Enter the point descriptor in the Descriptor field.
7) Select the Function radio button in the Type area.
8) Select the appropriate engineering unit from the Eng Unit list and click
.
The Select Function dialog box appears (Figure 6-6).

Figure 6-6. Select Function Dialog Box.


9) Select the appropriate function and click .
The corresponding Function Point Editor appears. These are discussed in
detail in the following sections.

3.1 Absolute Difference (ABS DIFF)


The Absolute difference function calculates the Absolute Value of the
difference between two analog inputs.

Figure 6-7. Absolute Difference Dialog Box.


1) Click on the First Parameter box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-8).

203
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.1 Absolute Difference (ABS DIFF) - continued

Figure 6-8. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-9).

Figure 6-9. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or click on one of the red arrows to use the point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the First Parameter box of
the Absolute Difference dialog box.
4) Click on the Second Parameter box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Point Data or Constant from the Select Input dialog box and click
.
If you chose Point Data, the Point Data dialog box appears. Enter the Point
Address or select the Point Address using the Point Lookup feature and click
. Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Second
Parameter box of the Absolute Difference dialog box.
6) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Absolute Difference dialog
box closes.

204
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.2 Absolute Value (ABS) A


The Absolute function calculates the Absolute value of a given analog input
parameter.

Figure 6-10. Absolute Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Parameter box to open the Select Input dialog box
(Figure 6-11).

Figure 6-11. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-12).

6-12. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Parameter box of the
Absolute dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Absolute dialog box closes.

205
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.3 Accumulator
TheAccumulatorfunctionaddsthevalueforanassignedinputpointtoanaccumulatedvalue.
Theinitialaccumulatedvalueiszero.TheformuladescribingthisfunctionisA=A+Iwhere
AistheaccumulatedvalueandIistheinputvalue.Thispointisoftenusedwiththetotalizer
pointdifferencepoint.
Example:Whenthesystemisfirstinitializedtheaccumulatedvalueiszero.Point001(theinput
point)hasavalueof75.Afterthefirstcyclecompletestheaccumulatedvalueis75(0+75=75).
Duringthesecondcyclethevalueofpoint001is68.Thisisaddedtotheaccumulatedvalue
from the first cycle yielding a new accumulated value of 143 (75+68=143). This process
continuesuntiltheaccumulatedvalueisclearedatwhichtimetheprocessstartsover.

Figure 6-13. Accumulator Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Point Number box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-14).

Figure 6-14. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-15).

Figure 6-15. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Point Number box of the
Accumulator dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Accumulator dialog box closes.
3.4 Addition
206
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points
The Addition function calculates the sum of up to ten (10) analog points.

Figure 6-16. Addition Function Dialog Box.


1) Click on one of the number boxes.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-17).

Figure 6-17. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select the appropriate input.
3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 for up to ten analog points.
4) Click .
This saves the input(s) you selected.
3.5 Average

207
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
The Average function calculates the average value of up to ten (10) analog points.

Figure 6-18. Average Function Dialog Box.


1) Click on one of the number boxes.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-19).

Figure 6-19. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select the appropriate input.
3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 for up to ten analog points.
4) Click .
This saves the input(s) you selected.
3.6 Centigrade to Fahrenheit (C to F)
The Centigrade to Fahrenheit function converts temperature in degrees
Centigrade (from an analog sensor) to a temperature in degrees Fahrenheit.

Figure 6-20. Centigrade to Fahrenheit Dialog Box.


3.6 Centigrade to Fahrenheit (C to F) - continued

208
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points
1) Click on the Centigrade Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-21).

Figure 6-21. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-22).

Figure 6-22. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Centigrade Temperature box
of the Centigrade to Fahrenheit dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Centigrade to Fahrenheit
dialog box closes.
3.7 Change of State
The Change of state function will equal 1 when the target Point changes
state. Otherwise, the value of the function will be 0. This function
Calculation Point will stay equal to 1 for 1 minute after the COS, and then
revert back to 0. CSI, Delta 2000, Card Access, and some Excel Plus digital
input points will not return a COS to UNITY unless they are tied to a COS
calculation point and an event is set up on this point.

Figure 6-23. Change of State Dialog Box.


3.7 Change of State - continued

209
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
1) Click on the Point Number to Detect a Change box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-24).

Figure 6-24. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-25).

Figure 6-25. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Point Number to Detect a
Change box of the Change of State dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point just entered. If you click , the entire
calculation point will be canceled. The Change of State dialog box closes.
3.8 Consumption
The Consumption function calculates the total number of minutes that a given
Digital Point has been in the Constant Digital State since the function Calculation
Point was created, or since it was reset to zero. This point can add the run times
together for a hardware point and signal the operator when preventive maintenance
is due. Be sure to command the point to 0 when the maintenance is carried out.
Note: The Consumption function does not reset to zero unless commanded. The Runtime
function (section 3.31) is similar to the Consumption function, except that it
resets to zero when the Digital Point changes state.

Figure 6-26. Consumption Dialog Box.


3.8 Consumption - continued

210
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points
1) Click on the Digital Point box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-27).

Figure 6-27. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Digital Eng. Unit from the Select Input dialog box and click
.
The Digital Eng. Unit dialog box appears (Figure 6-28).

Figure 6-28. Digital Eng. Unit Dialog Box.


3) Enter the point address or click on one of the red arrows to use the
point lookup feature. Click .
4) Click on the Constant Digital State box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Constant from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Constant Dialog Box appears (Figure 6-29).

Figure 6-29. Select Constant Dialog Box.


3.8 Consumption - continued
211
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
6) Select the appropriate constant from the Digital Eng. Unit constant list
and click .
The lists most frequently used will be Boolean, Digital Eng. Units or Alarm
Condition. The selected constant appears in the Constant Digital State
box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Consumption dialog box
closes.
3.9 Degree Day
The Degree Day function calculates the degree day value from yesterday. If you
are in the cooling mode, degree day equals 65F subtracted from half of the
maximum plus the minimum. In the heating mode, the degree day is equal to 65F
minus half of the maximum plus the minimum.

Figure 6-30. Degree Day.


1) Click on the Outside Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-31).

Figure 6-31. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-32).

Figure 6-32. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
3.9 Degree Day - continued

212
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Outside Temperature box of
the Degree Day dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Degree Day dialog box
closes.
3.10 Degree Days
The Degree Days function figures the seasonal degree day total based on the
outside air temp (Reset by command or change of Season).

Figure 6-33. Degree Days Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Outside Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-34).

Figure 6-34. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-35).

Figure 6-35. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Outside Temperature box of
the Degree Days dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Degree Days dialog box closes.
3.11 Demand Control
213
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
Consult the Demand Control Program (Chapter 8 of the Users Guide) section for
informationonthisfunction.(TheDemandControlmanualsupplementisprovidedonly
withsystemsequippedwiththeDemandControlprogram.)
3.12 Dew Point to Relative Humidity (DP to RH)
The Dew point to relative humidity function calculates the Relative humidity
based on two analog inputs: The Outside temperature, and the Dew point
temperature.

Figure 6-36. Dew Point to Relative Humidity Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-37).

Figure 6-37. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-38).

Figure 6-38. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Temperature box of
the Dew Point to Relative Humidity dialog box.
4) Click on the Dew Point Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears.
3.12 Dew Point to Relative Humidity (DP to RH) - continued
214
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points
6) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Dew Point Temperature
box of the Dew Point to Relative Humidity dialog box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Dew Point to Relative Humidity dialog box closes.
3.13 Division
The Division function divides the first input by the second, divides that result
by the third, and so on, for up to ten (10) analog points.

Figure 6-39. Division Function Dialog Box.


1) Click on one of the number boxes.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-40).

Figure 6-40. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select the appropriate input.
A corresponding dialog appears or the input is added to the Division
dialog box.
3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 for up to ten analog points.
Note: At least two points must be setup in the Division Function dialog box.
3) Click .
This saves the input(s) you selected.
3.14 Enthalpy Using Dew Point (ENT_DP)

215
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
The Enthalpy using dew point function calculates Enthalpy based on two analog
inputs: The Dry Bulb Temperature, and the Dew Point temperature.

Figure 6-41. Enthalpy Using Dew Point Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Dry Bulb Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears Figure 6-42.

Figure 6-42. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-43).

Figure 6-43. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Dry Bulb Temperature
box of the Enthalpy Using Dew Point dialog box.
4) Click on the Dew Point Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears.
6) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
3.14 Enthalpy Using Dew Point (ENT_DP) - continued

216
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Dew Point Temperature
box of the Enthalpy Using Dew Point dialog box.
7) Click on .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Enthalpy Using Relative Humidity dialog box closes.
3.15 Enthalpy Using Relative Humidity (ENT_RH)
The Enthalpy using relative humidity function calculates Enthalpy based on
two analog inputs: The Temperature, and the Relative Humidity.

Figure 6-44. Enthalpy Using Relative Humidity Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-45).

Figure 6-45. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-46).

Figure 6-46. Point Data Dialog Box.


3.15 Enthalpy Using Relative Humidity (ENT_RH) - continued

217
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Temperature box of
the Enthalpy Using Relative Humidity dialog box.
4) Click on the Relative Humidity box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears.
6) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Relative Humidity
box of the Enthalpy Using Relative Humidity dialog box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Enthalpy Using Relative Humidity dialog box closes.
3.16 Exponent (EXP)
The Exponent function calculates the value of the First parameter raised to
the power of the Second parameter.

Figure 6-47. Exponent Dialog Box.


1) Click on the First Parameter box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-48).

Figure 6-48. Select Input Dialog Box.


3.16 Exponent (EXP) - continued

218
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points
2) Select Point Data or another input from the Select Input dialog box and
click .
If Point Data was selected, the Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-49).

Figure 6-49. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the First Parameter box
of the Exponent dialog box.
4) Click on the Second Parameter box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select constant from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Constant dialog box appears.
6) Enter the constant value in the text field and click .
The constant appears in the Second Parameter box of the Exponent dialog
box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Exponent dialog box closes.
3.17 Fahrenheit to Centigrade (F to C)
The Fahrenheit to centigrade function (figure 6-50) converts temperature in
degrees Fahrenheit (from an analog sensor) to a temperature in degrees
centigrade.

Figure 6-50. Fahrenheit to Centigrade Function.


1) Click on the Fahrenheit Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-51).
3.17 Fahrenheit to Centigrade (F to C) - continued

219
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Figure 6-51. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-52).

Figure 6-52. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Fahrenheit Temperature box
of the Fahrenheit to Centigrade dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Fahrenheit to Centigrade dialog box closes.
3.18 Flow Rate (FLOW)
The Flow rate function calculates the flow rate in a given pipe based on two analog
inputs: The square root of the pressure differential across an orifice, and a constant
multiplier (the K factor). The constant multiplier is provided by the manufacturer
of the orifice, and is determined by the size of the pipe and the viscosity of the flow.
Note: The square root of the pressure differential input must by provided by an orifice
square-root transducer. If a straight transducer is used, the Flow rate using
square root function, as described in section 3.19, should be used.

Figure 6-53. Flow Rate Dialog Box.


3.18 Flow Rate (FLOW) - continued

220
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points
1) Click on the Pressure Differential box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-54).

Figure 6-54. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-55).

Figure 6-55. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Pressure Differential
box of the Flow Rate dialog box.
4) Click on the Constant Multiplier box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Constant from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Select Constant dialog box appears (Figure 6-56).

Figure 6-56. Select Constant Dialog Box.


3.18 Flow Rate (FLOW) - continued
221
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
6) Enter the Constant value in the Value: box and click .
The Select Constant dialog box closes and the Constant Value appears in the
Constant Multiplier box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Flow Rate dialog box closes.
3.19 Flow Rate Using Square Root (FLOWSQRT)
The Flow rate using square root function calculates the flow rate in a given pipe
based on two analog inputs: The pressure differential across an orifice, and a
constant multiplier (the K factor). The square root of the pressure differential is
multiplied by the K factor.
Note: The pressure differential input must by provided by a straight transducer. If an
orifice square-root transducer is used, the Flow rate function, as described in
section 3.18, should be used.

Figure 6-57. Flow Rate Using Square Root Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Pressure Differential box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-58).

Figure 6-58. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-59).

Figure 6-59. Point Data Dialog Box.


3.19 Flow Rate Using Square Root (FLOWSQRT) - continued
222
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points
3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Pressure Differential
box of the Flow Rate Using Square Root dialog box.
4) Click on the Constant Multiplier box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Constant from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Select Constant dialog box appears (Figure 6-60).

Figure 6-60. Select Constant Dialog Box.


6) Enter the Constant value in the Value: box and click .
The Select Constant dialog box closes and the Constant Value appears in
the Constant Multiplier box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Flow Rate Using Square Root dialog box closes.
3.20 Heat Index (HEAT)
The Heat index function calculates the Heat index based on two analog
inputs: a temperature, and a relative humidity. This is another way to express
enthalpy.

Figure 6-61. Heat Index Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-62).
3.20 Heat Index (HEAT) - continued

223
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Figure 6-62. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-63).

Figure 6-63. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Temperature box of the Heat
Index dialog box.
4) Click on the Relative Humidity box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears.
6) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Relative Humidity
box of the Heat Index dialog box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Heat Index dialog box closes.
3.21 Maximum (MAX)

224
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points
The Maximum function calculates the maximum value of a given analog input
Point number since the point was created or since it was reset to zero or
another low value.

Figure 6-64. Maximum Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Point Number box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-65).

Figure 6-65. Select Input Dialog Box


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-66).

Figure 6-66. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Point Number box of the
Maximum dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Maximum dialog box closes.

225
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.22 Minimum (MIN)


The Minimum function calculates the Minimum value of a given analog input
Point number since creation, or reset to zero.

Figure 6-67. Minimum Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Point Number box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-68).

Figure 6-68. Select Input Dialog Box


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-69).

Figure 6-69. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Point Number box of the
Minimum dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Minimum dialog box closes.
5) Open the Point Command dialog box for the Calc point you just set.
6) Set the value of the Calc point higher than the actual field point.
When the Minimum Calc point is first set up, it defaults to 0. By setting the
Minimum Calc point higher than the field point, it will now be accurate.
If this is not done, the Minimum Calc point will remain at 0.

226
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.23 Multiplication
TheMultiplicationfunctioncalculatestheproductofuptoten(10)analogpoints.

Figure 6-70. Multiply Function Dialog Box.


1) Click on one of the number boxes.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-71).

Figure 6-71. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select the appropriate input.
A corresponding dialog appears or the input is added to the Addition
Function dialog box.
3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 for up to ten analog points.
4) Click .
This saves the input(s) you selected.
3.24 Natural Log (LN)
The Natural log function (Figure 6-72) calculates the natural logarithm of a
given analog input parameter.

Figure 6-72. Natural Log Function.


1) Click on the Parameter box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-73).

227
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.24 Natural Log (LN) - continued

Figure 6-73. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-74).

Figure 6-74. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Parameter box of the
Natural Log dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
The Natural Log dialog box closes.
3.25 Optimum Start Time
The Optimum Start Time function displays the minutes remaining before an
optimized start will occur based on the optimum start window. If the current time
is earlier than the beginning of the optimized start program, the time displayed will
be the time remaining between the beginning of the program and the predicted
start time. If the current time is after the optimized start has begun, the time
displayed will be zero.

Figure 6-75. Optimum Start Time Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Binary State of a TOD Point box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-76).
228
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.25 Optimum Start Time - continued

Figure 6-76. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-77).

Figure 6-77. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Binary State of TOD
Point box of the Optimum Start Time dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Optimum Start Time dialog
box closes.
3.26 Optimum Stop Time
This function is the same as for the Optimum Stop Time with the exception
that it displays the time remaining before an optimized start will occur.

Figure 6-78. Optimum Stop Time Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Binary State of a TOD Point box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-79).

229
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.26 Optimum Stop Time - continued

Figure 6-79. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-80).

Figure 6-80. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Binary State of TOD Point
box of the Optimum Stop Time dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Optimum Stop Time dialog
box closes.
3.27 Percent of Scale
The Percent of scale function divides the value of an input by the inputs full
scale value, and multiplies the result by 100. If, for example, a given analog
point has a value of 100, and the scale of the point is from 50 to 150, the
Percent of scale value for the analog point will be 75% [150 (from the bottom
of the scale) 200 (total scale)].

Figure 6-81. Percent of Scale Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Analog Point box.
The Select Input dialog box appears. (Figure 6-82).

230
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.27 Percent of Scale - continued

Figure 6-82. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-83).

Figure 6-83. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Analog Point box of the
Percent of Scale dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Percent of Scale dialog box
closes.
3.28 Random (RAND)
The Random function returns a random number between the limits set by
parameter A and parameter B. These parameters can be either constants or
analog values from points.

Figure 6-84. Random Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Parameter A box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-85).

231
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.28 Random (RAND) - continued

Figure 6-85. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Constant from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Constant dialog box appears (Figure 6-86).

Figure 6-86. Select Constant Dialog Box.


3) Enter the lower value for the range in the Value: box and click .
The value appears in the Parameter A box.
4) Click on the Parameter B box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Constant from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Constant dialog box appears.
6) Enter the higher value for the range in the Value: box and click .
The value appears in the Parameter B box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Random dialog box closes.

232
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.29 Relative Humidity to Dew Point (RH to DP)


The Relative humidity to dew point function calculates the Dew point
temperature based on two analog inputs: The Outside temperature, and the
Relative humidity.

Figure 6-87. Relative Humidity to Dew Point Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-88).

Figure 6-88. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-89).

Figure 6-89. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Temperature box of
the Relative Humidity to Dew Point dialog box.
4) Click on the Relative Humidity box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears.

233
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.29 Relative Humidity to Dew Point (RH to DP) - continued


6) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the First Parameter box
of the Relative Humidity to Dew Point dialog box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Relative Humidity to Dew
Point dialog box closes.
3.30 Rolling Average
The Rolling Average function calculates the average value of a point for a given
number of samples. A sample is the points value for one scan.

Figure 6-90. Rolling Average Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Point Number button.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-91).

Figure 6-91. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-92).

234
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.30 Rolling Average - continued

Figure 6-92 . Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Point Number button.
4) Click the Number of Samples button.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Constant from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Select Constant dialog box appears (Figure 6-93).

Figure 6-93. Select Constant Dialog Box.


6) Enter the number of samples desired for calculation in the Value:
field.
7) Click .
The value appears in the number of samples button.
Note: Steps 8 - 16 are used only when a digital lockout is being assigned to the point.
If no digital lockout is being assigned skip to step 17.
8) Click the Lockout Point button.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
9) Select Digital Eng. Unit from the Select Input dialog box and click
.
The Digital Eng. Unit dialog box appears.
10) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
11) Click the Lockout State button.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
12) Select Constant from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Select Constant dialog box appears.

235
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.30 Rolling Average - continued


13) Select the appropriate constant from one of the constant lists. In this
example, choose a constant from the Digital Eng. Unit list.
The lists most frequently used will be Boolean, Digital Eng. Units, or Alarm
Condition. However, the constant chosen must agree with the input type. So,
if you choose point data as the input type, you must choose a constant from the
Boolean list. If you chose Digital Eng. Unit as the input type, you must choose
a constant from the Digital Eng. Unit list. If you chose Alarm Condition as the
input type, you must choose a constant from the Alarm Condition list. The
selected constant appears in the Digital or Analog State box.
14) Click .
The selected engineering unit appears in the Lockout State button.
15) If the rolling average is to be cleared when a lockout condition occurs,
select the Clear Entering Lockout check box.
A appears in the check box when it is selected.
16) If the rolling average is to be cleared when a lockout condition ends,
select the Clear Exiting Lockout check box.
A appears in the check box when it is selected.
17) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the entire
calculation point will be canceled. The Rolling Average dialog box closes.
3.31 Run Time
The Run Time function calculates the number of minutes since a given Digital
Point changed to the Constant Digital State. Typically, the Constant Digital State
is set to ON to determine how long a digital point has been on in a given cycle. (This
function is similar to the Consumption function described in section 3.8.)

Figure 6-94. Run Time Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Point Number box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-95).

Figure 6-95. Select Input Dialog Box.

236
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.31 Run Time - continued


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-96).

Figure 6-96. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the First Parameter box of the
Run Time dialog box.
4) Click on the Digital or Analog State box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Constant from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Constant dialog box appears (Figure 6-97).

Figure 6-97. Select Constant Dialog Box.


6) Select the appropriate constant from one of the constant lists and
click .
The lists most frequently used will be Boolean, Digital Eng. Units, or
Alarm Condition. However, the constant chosen must agree with the input
type. So, if you choose point data as the input type, you must choose a
constant from the Boolean list. If you chose Digital Eng. Unit as the input
type, you must choose a constant from the Digital Eng. Unit list. If you
chose Alarm Condition as the input type, you must choose a constant from
the Alarm Condition list. The selected constant appears in the Digital or
Analog State box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Run Time dialog box closes.

237
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.32 Select High


The Select High function returns the highest value of up to 10 individual
analog points.

Figure 6-98. Select High Dialog Box.


1) Click on one of the number boxes.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-99).

Figure 6-99. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select the appropriate input.
A corresponding dialog appears or the input is added to the Addition
Function dialog box.
3) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. This saves the input you selected.

238
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.33 Select Low


The Select Low function returns the lowest value of up to 10 individual
analog points.

Figure 6-100. Select Low Dialog Box.


1) Click on one of the number boxes.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-101).

Figure 6-101. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select the appropriate input.
A corresponding dialog appears or the input is added to the Addition
Function dialog box.
3) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.
This saves the input you selected.

239
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.34 Square Root (SQRT)


The Square root function calculates the square root of an analog input.

Figure 6-102. Square Root Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Parameter to Square Root box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-103).

Figure 6-103. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-104).

Figure 6-104. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Parameter to Square Root box
of the Square Root dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Square Root dialog box
closes.

240
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.35 Subtraction
The Subtraction function subtracts the second input from the first, the third
from that result, etc., for up to ten (10) analog points.

Figure 6-105. Subtraction Function Dialog Box.


1) Click on one of the number boxes.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-106).

Figure 6-106. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select the appropriate input.
A corresponding dialog appears or the input is added to the Addition
Function dialog box.
3) Click .
This saves the input you selected.

241
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.36 Totalizer Difference


The Totalizer difference function calculates change in a Totalizer point since the
last scan.

Figure 6-107. Totalizer Difference Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Enter Parameter box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-108).

Figure 6-108. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-109).

Figure 6-109. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Enter Parameter box of the
Totalizer Difference dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Square Root dialog box
closes.

242
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.37 Truncate (TRUNC)


The Truncate function removes any fractional component from an analog input
parameter, and leaves the integer. It always rounds a value down to the nearest
integer.

Figure 6-110. Truncate Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Parameter box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-111).

Figure 6-111. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-112).

Figure 6-112. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Parameter box of the
Truncate dialog box.
4) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Truncate dialog box closes.

243
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3.38 Wind Chill (WIND)


The Wind Chill function calculates the Wind chill based on two analog inputs:
A Temperature, and the Wind speed.

Figure 6-113. Wind Chill Dialog Box.


1) Click on the Temperature box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-114).

Figure 6-114. Select Input Dialog Box.


2) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-115).

Figure 6-115. Point Data Dialog Box.


3) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Temperature box of
the Wind Chill dialog box.

244
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

3.38 Wind Chill (WIND) - continued


4) Click on the Wind Speed box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
5) Select Point Data from the Select Input dialog box and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears.
6) Enter the Point Address or select the Point Address using the Point
Lookup feature and click .
Point Data of (point address number) appears in the Wind Speed box of
the Wind Chill dialog box.
7) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled. The Wind Chill dialog box closes.

245
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4 Detailed DCP Information


Digital Calculation Points (DCPs) can make decisions based on calculated data,
and take action. You may think of DCPs as single-command programs triggered
by a complex event. You can also use Digital Calculation Points to store simple
modes (changed with an On or Off point command), or as simulated inputs
for testing a control strategy.
DCPS have a specific format, and a unique structure that you need to understand
in order to use them properly. You may think that DCPS are much like ACPS
because the dialog boxes look somewhat similar. However, ACPS yield a
calculated value (0, 1, 16, -135, etc.), unlike DCPS which yield a True or False
condition.
4.1 If-Then-Else Format
The main assumption made by DCPS is that you want to make a decision
based on some specific condition(s) being true. For this reason, all DCPS are
in an If-Then-Else format.
IF (A set of conditions is true)
T H E N (Do something)
ELSE (Do something else)
For example, to turn on an air handler when the space temp is above 74, you
would say:
IF (SPACE TEMPERATURE IS GREATER THAN the CONSTANT 74)
T H E N (Turn the AIR HANDLING UNIT ON)
ELSE (Do nothing)
Note the words in ALL CAPITALS. These are the INPUTS and OPERATORS
that will make up the structure of a DCP. The Digital Calculation Point
Editor dialog box helps organize your calculations into these IF-THEN-ELSE
logical blocks. This dialog box has four main components.
Statements - This is where calculations, and simple comparisons occur.
Statement-to-Statement Operators - These operators connect two statements
to make a compound calculation or comparison.
True Command ( THEN Command) - This is the command that UNITY
issues when all of the statements together yield a TRUE result.
Note: You can enter command and residual priorities for this calculation point.
False Command (ELSE Command) - This is the command that UNITY
issues when all of the statements together yield a FALSE result.
Note: You can enter command and residual priorities for this calculation point.
The elements of a DCP appear in the graphic below:

246
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

4.1 If-Then-Else Format - continued


Statement-to-Statement Operator

First Statement

True Command

False Command

Figure 6-116. DCP If-Then-Else Format.


4.1.1 If Statement Structure
See Section 2 of this chapter--Calculation Point Operators-- for information
detailing the use of operators in DCPS.
4.1.2 Then & Else Commands
You need to understand when the THEN and ELSE commands will occur
to make sure that you get predictable results from your DCPS. Below is an
explanation of each step in the process of scanning a DCP.
1) Evaluate the two Inputs and the Operator in line #1.
The left Input and the right Input use the Operator between them. If there
is only one Input on this line, there should be no Operators, the value of
this statement is the same as the one Input.
2) Evaluate the two Inputs and the Operator in line #2.
The left Input and the right Input use the Operator between them. If the
line has only one Input, no Operators should exist. The statements value
is the same as the Input.
3) Evaluate the first two statements.
The first and second statements use the Statement-to-Statement Operator
at the end of the first statement.
4) Evaluate the result of the previous statements with the next statement.
As UNITY evaluates each statement it generates a net result. UNITY then
evaluates the net result along with the next statement using the next
Statement-to-Statement Operator.
5) Repeat step 4 until an empty (no Inputs or Operators) statement
occurs or until you have evaluated all six statements.
The final result will (if programmed correctly) yield a True or False
condition.
6) Send the THEN command or the ELSE command
It is the True or False result of step #5, along with its last state that UNITY
uses to determine whether to send the THEN or the ELSE command. If the
state of the DCP just changed, then UNITY will send the appropriate
command. If the state of the DCP hasnt changed, nothing happens.

247
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.2 An Example DCP Exercise


The example system has two hardware points, an outside air temperature
sensor, and a start/stop relay controlling a set of cooling tower sump heaters.
The objective of this exercise is to create a Digital Calculation Point that will
turn on the cooling tower sump heaters when the outside air temperature falls
below 34F, and off when above 34F.
4.2.1 Create the Digital Calculation Point
1) Select Groups from the Edit menu.
The Edit Groups dialog box appears (Figure 6-117).

Figure 6-117. Edit Groups Dialog Box.


2) Enter the number of the new group in the Enter Group Number:
field.
Note: This Group Number MUST have been specified as a Calculation Group in the
initial install of UNITY. If you are not sure what the Group Number for
Calculation points should be, check your System Map from the Misc menu.
3) Click to open the Edit Group ### (Calculation Group)
dialog box (Figure 6-118).

Figure 6-118. Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) Dialog Box.


4) Enter the group descriptor in the Group Descriptor: field.
5) Select point 001 in the point list and click .
The Edit Point ###### dialog box appears (Figure 6-119).

248
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

4.2.1 Create the Digital Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-119. Edit Point ###### Dialog Box.


6) Enter the point descriptor in the Descriptor field.
7) Select the point type from the Point Type drop-down list.
8) Select the Digital radio button in the Type area.
9) Select the appropriate engineering unit from the Eng Unit list and click
.
The Digital Calculation Point Editor dialog box appears (Figure 6-120).

Figure 6-120. Digital Calculation Point Editor Dialog Box.


10) Click the first Input button on line 1 of the dialog box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-121).

249
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
4.2.1 Create the Digital Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-121. Select Input Dialog Box.


11) Select Point Data and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-122).

Figure 6-122. Point Data Dialog Box.


12) Enter the address of the outside air temperature point.
Click on Point Number field and type 101001.
13) Click .
The Digital Calculation Point Editor dialog box reappears with Point Data
of 101001 printed on the first button (Figure 6-123).

Figure 6-123. Digital Calculation Dialog Box with Point Data Entered.
14) Click the OPR button in the first line of the dialog box.
The Select Operators dialog box appears (Figure 6-124).

250
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

4.2.1 Create the Digital Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-124. Select Operators Dialog Box.


15) Select the Less Than or Equal to operator and click .
The Less Than or Equal to operator looks like this: <=. The Digital
Calculation Point Editor dialog box reappears with <= printed on the
second button (Figure 6-125).

Figure 6-125. Digital Calculation Dialog Box with <= Entered.


16) Click the second Input button in line 1 of the dialog box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
17) Select Constant and click .
The Select Constant dialog box appears (Figure 6-126).

251
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.2.1 Create the Digital Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-126. Select Constant Dialog Box.


18) Enter the temperature of 34 F and click .
Type 34 in the Value field. The Digital Calculation Point Editor dialog box
reappears with 34 printed on the third button (Figure 6-127).

Figure 6-127. Digital Calculation Dialog Box with Constant Entered.


19) Click the THEN button.
The Select Command dialog box appears (Figure 6-128).

Figure 6-128. Select Command Dialog Box.


20) Click .
The Point Command dialog box appears (Figure 6-129).

252
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

4.2.1 Create the Digital Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-129. Point Command Dialog Box.


21) Enter the point address in the Point field.
Enter address G08001 in the Point field.
The commands available for this point appear in the Commands box
(Figure 6-130).

Figure 6-130. Point Command Dialog Box Showing Available Commands.


22) Select .
The Digital Calculation Point Editor dialog box reappears with G08001
ON printed on the THEN button (Figure 6-129).

Figure 6-131. Digital Calculation Dialog Box with THEN Command Entered.

253
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.2.1 Create the Digital Calculation Point - continued


23) Click the ELSE button.
The Select Command dialog box appears.
24) Click .
The Point Command dialog box appears.
25) Enter the point address in the Point field.
Enter address G08001 in the Point field.
The commands available for this point appear in the Commands box.
26) Select .
The Digital Calculation Point Editor dialog box reappears with G08001
OFF printed on the ELSE button (Figure 6-132).

Figure 6-132. Digital Calculation Dialog Box with ELSE Command Entered.
27) Click .
The Edit Point ###### dialog box reappears.
28) Click .
The Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) dialog box reappears.
29) Click .
This saves the calculation point you just entered. If you click , the
entire calculation point will be canceled.

254
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

5 Detailed ACP Information


Analog Calculation Points (ACPs) calculate their value using user-defined
formulas and data. You can use ACPs to calculate custom energy management
values, as well as custom math functions.
You create Analog Calculation Points (ACPs) just as you create math
equations. For example, you could create an ACP to calculate the value of
6 x 9. Of course, the value of this point would be 54. In most cases though,
ACPs will calculate something based on changing point data from the field.
The format for ACPs is relatively simple, but you should understand it well
before going further.
5.1 Formula Format
The ACP format is a simple formula. You can use up to six statements (and
five statement-to-statement operators), with each statement containing at
least one analog input. When statements contain two inputs, they must
contain at least one operator. See Figure 6-133.
Statement to Statement Operator

First Statement

Figure 6-133. ACP Formula Format.


5.2 ACP Statement Structure
See Section 2 of this chapterfor information detailing the structure of ACPS
and the use of operators in ACPS. Below is an explanation of each step in the
process of scanning an ACP.
1) Evaluate the two Inputs and the Operator in line #1.
The left Input and the right Input use the Operator between them. If there
is only one Input on this line, there should be no Operators, the value of
this statement is the same as the one Input.
2) Evaluate the two Inputs and the Operator in line #2.
The left Input and the right Input use the Operator between them. If the
line has only one Input, no Operators should exist. The statements value
is the same as the Input.
3) Evaluate the first two statements.
The first and second statements use the Statement-to-Statement Operator
at the end of the first statement.
4) Evaluate the result of the previous statements with the next statement.
As UNITY evaluates each statement it generates a net result. UNITY then
evaluates the net result along with the next statement using the next
Statement-to-Statement Operator.
5) Repeat step 4 until an empty (no Inputs or Operators) statement
occurs or until you have evaluated all six statements.
The final result will (if programmed correctly) yield a True or False.
6) Send the THEN command or the ELSE command.
It is the True or False result of step #5, along with its last state that UNITY
uses to determine whether to send the THEN or the ELSE command. If the
state of the DCP just changed, then UNITY will send the appropriate
command. If the state of the DCP hasnt changed, nothing happens.

255
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5.3 An Example ACP Exercise


The example system has three hardware points, a chilled water temperature
sensor 101009 (CWT), a return water Temperature sensor 101008 (RWT), and
a chiller water flow flowmeter 101010 (CWF).
The objective of this exercise is to create an Analog Calculation Point. This
ACP will calculate the total BTU usage in the system.
5.3.1 Set up the Formula
1) Determine the calculation required.
We will use the formula:
BTU = TD X (gpm X 500)
Where:
TD = Temperature Differential between the return water temperature
sensor and the chilled water temperature sensor.
gpm = The flow rate of Chiller water (in gallons per minute).
2) Rearrange the formula to fit the Analog Calculation Point format.
Since UNITY calculates ACPs based on the relative order and position of the
inputs and operators, it is important to arrange the parameters of the equation
carefully. The example is rearranged below:
(TD) X(gpm X500)
3) Determine the final formula parameters.
From the list of hardware points, organize the inputs with the appropriate
UNITY-EMS operators.
(Analog data 101008 analog data 101009) X (analog data 101010 X500)
5.3.2 Create the Analog Calculation Point
1) Select Groups from the Edit menu.
The Edit Groups dialog box appears (Figure 6-134).

Figure 6-134. Edit Groups Dialog Box.


2) Enter the number of the new group in the Enter Group Number:
field.
Note: This Group Number MUST have been specified as a Calculation Group in the
initial install of UNITY. If you are not sure what the Group Number for
Calculation points should be, check your System Map from the Misc menu.
3) Click .
The Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) dialog box appears (Figure 6-135).

Figure 6-135. Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) Dialog Box.

256
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

5.3.2 Create the Analog Calculation Point - continued


4) Enter the group descriptor in the Group Descriptor: field.
5) Select point 002 in the point list and click .
The Edit Point ###### dialog box appears (Figure 6-136).

Figure 6-136. Edit Point ###### Dialog Box.


6) Enter the point descriptor in the Descriptor field.
7) Select the Analog radio button in the Type area.
8) Select the appropriate engineering unit from the Eng Unit list and click
.
The Analog Calculation Point Editor dialog box appears (Figure 6-137).

Figure 6-137. Analog Calculation Point Editor Dialog Box.


9) Click the first Input button on line 1 of the dialog box.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-138).

257
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5.3.2 Create the Analog Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-138. Select Input Dialog Box.


10) Select Point Data and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-139).

Figure 6-139. Point Data Dialog Box.


11) Enter the address of the outside air temperature point.
Click on Point Number field and type G08002.
12) Click .
The Analog Calculation Point Editor dialog box reappears with Point Data
of G08002 printed on the first button (Figure 6-140).

Figure 6-140. Analog Calculation Dialog Box with Point Data Entered.
13) Click the OPR button in the first line of the dialog box.
The Select Operators dialog box appears (Figure 6-141).

258
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

5.3.2 Create the Analog Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-141. Select Operators Dialog Box.


14) Select the subtraction operator and click .
The subtraction operator looks like this: . The Analog Calculation Point
Editor dialog box reappears with printed on the second button (Figure
6-142).

Figure 6-142. Analog Calculation Dialog Box with Subtraction Added.


15) Click the second Input button in line 1 of the dialog box.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
16) Select Point Data and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears.
17) Enter the chilled water temperature sensors address.
Click on Point Number field and type G08003.
18) Click .
The Analog Calculation Point Editor dialog box reappears with Point Data
of G08003 printed on the third button (Figure 6-143).

259
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5.3.2 Create the Analog Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-143. Analog Calculation Dialog Box with Point Data Entered.
19) Click the last OPR button in line 1.
The Operator dialog box appears.
20) Select the Multiplication operator and click .
The Multiplication operator looks like this: *. The Analog Calculation
Point Editor dialog box reappears with * printed on the fourth button
(Figure 6-144).

Figure 6-144. Analog Calculation Dialog Box with Multiplication Command


Entered.
21) Click the first button in the second statement of the dialog box.
The Input dialog box appears.
22) Select Point Data and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears.
23) Enter the address of the chilled water flow flowmeter.
Click on Point Number field and type G08004.
24) Click .
The Analog Calculation Point Editor dialog box reappears with Point
Data of G08004 printed on the first button of the second statement
(Figure 6-145).

260
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

5.3.2 Create the Analog Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-145. Analog Calculation Dialog Box with Point Data Entered.
25) Click the second button in the second statement of the dialog box.
The Operator dialog box appears.
26) Select the Multiplication operator and click .
The Multiplication operator looks like this: *. The Analog Calculation
Point Editor dialog box reappears with * printed on the second button
of the second statement (Figure 6-146).

Figure 6-146. Analog Calculation Dialog Box with Multiplication Command


Entered.
27) Click the third button in the second statement of the dialog box.
The Input dialog box appears.
28) Select Constant and click .
The Select Constant dialog box appears (Figure 6-147).

261
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5.3.2 Create the Analog Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-147. Select Constant Dialog Box.


29) Enter a value of 500 and click .
Click on Value field and type 500. The Analog Calculation Point Editor
dialog box reappears with 500 printed on the third button of the second
statement (Figure 6-148).

Figure 6-148. Analog Calculation Dialog Box with Constant Entered.


30) Click to display the Edit Point ###### (Calculation
Group) dialog box.
31) Click to display the Edit Point ###### (Analog) dialog box
(Figure 6-149).

Figure 6-149. Edit Point ###### (Analog) Dialog Box.


32) Enter 250 in the High field.
33) Enter -250 in the Low field.
34) Click to diplay the Edit Point ###### (Calculation Group)
dialog box.

262
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

5.3.2 Create the Analog Calculation Point - continued


35) Click to display the Edit Group ### (Calculation Group)
dialog box.
36) Click to save the calculation point you just entered. If you
click , the entire calculation point will be canceled.
You have finished creating the analog calculation point.
5.3.3 Test the Analog Calculation Point
1) Select Point from the Commands menu.
The Point Command dialog box appears (Figure 6-150).

Figure 6-150. Point Command Dialog Box.


2) Enter the return water temp sensor point address.
Enter G08002 in the Point field.
3) Click .
Point G08002s descriptor, value, and alarm condition appear in the Point
Status area.
4) Record the status on a sheet of paper.
Write down G08002 and the displayed value.
5) Enter the chill water temp sensor point address.
Enter G08003 in the Point field.
6) Click .
Point G08003s descriptor, value, and alarm condition appear in the Point
Status area.
7) Record the status on a sheet of paper.
Write down G08003 and the displayed value.
8) Enter the chill water flowmeter point address.
Enter G08004 in the Point field.
9) Click .
Point G08004s descriptor, value, and alarm condition appear in the Point
Status area.
10) Record the status on a sheet of paper.
Write down G08004 and the displayed value.
11) Enter the System BTU Usage point address.
Enter Z01002 in the Point field.

263
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5.3.3 Test the Analog Calculation Point - continued


12) Click .
The descriptor, value, and alarm condition of point Z01002 appear in the
Point Status area.
13) Record the status on a sheet of paper.
Write down Z01002 and the displayed value.
14) Check the calculated BTU value.
Using the formula:
BTU = (TD X (gpm X 500))
Where:
TD = Temperature Differential between G08002 and G08003
gpm = The flow rate of chilled water in gallons per minute
check the calculation made by the calculation point to make sure that you
have entered it correctly.
15) Click .

264
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

6 Detailed FCP Information


Function Calculation Points (FCPs) calculate their value using predefined
functions and user-supplied data. You will use FCPs to calculate common
energy management values (enthalpy, flow rate, etc.) as well as common math
functions (addition, averaging, etc.).
Function Calculation Points are essentially the same as Calculation Point Functions.
The difference between FCPs and ACPs or FCPs is that the a Calculation Point
Function is used as the entire formula for an FCP rather than as part of a formula. See
6.3 for information on Calculation Point Functions.
6.1 An Example FCP Exercise
The example system has two hardware points, an outside air temperature
sensor, and an outside relative humidity sensor.
This exercise has three objectives:
1) Create a Calculation Group
2) Create a Calculation Point in the group that will calculate the enthalpy
of the outside air using the outside air temperature and the outside
relative humidity.
3) Test the accuracy of the UNITY calculated enthalpy value against
standard psychrometric charts.
6.1.1 Create the Function Calculation Point
1) Select Groups from the Edit menu.
The Edit Groups dialog box appears (Figure 6-151).

Figure 6-151. Edit Groups Dialog Box.


2) Enter the group number in the Enter Group Number field and click
.
Note: This Group Number MUST have been specified as a Calculation Group in the
initial install of UNITY. If you are not sure what the Group Number for
Calculation points should be, check your System Map from the Misc menu.
The Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) dialog box appears (Figure
6-152).

Figure 6-152. Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) Dialog Box.

265
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6.1.1 Create the Function Calculation Point - continued


3) Enter the group descriptor in the Group Descriptor field.
4) Select point 003 in the point list and click .
The Edit Point ###### dialog box appears (Figure 6-153).

Figure 6-153. Edit Point ###### Dialog Box.


5) Enter the point descriptor in the Descriptor field.
6) Select the Function radio button in the Type area.
7) Select the appropriate engineering unit from the Eng Unit list and click
.
The Select Function list box appears (Figure 6-154).

Figure 6-154. Select Function List Box.


8) Select Enthalpy using rel. humid and click .
The Function Point Editor dialog box appears (Figure 6-155).

266
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

6.1.1 Create the Function Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-155. Function Point Editor Dialog Box.


9) Click the Temperature button.
The Select Input dialog box appears (Figure 6-156).

Figure 6-156. Select Input Dialog Box.


10) Select Point Data and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears (Figure 6-157).

Figure 6-157. Point Data Dialog Box.


11) Enter the address of the outside air temperature sensor.
Click on Point Number field and type H23002.
12) Click .
The Point Data dialog box disappears and Point Data of H23002 appears
in the Temperature button (Figure 6-156).

267
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6.1.1 Create the Function Calculation Point - continued

Figure 6-158. Function Point Editor Dialog Box.


13) Click the Relative Humidity button.
The Select Input dialog box appears.
14) Select Point Data and click .
The Point Data dialog box appears.
15) Enter the address of the outside air relative humidity sensor.
Click on Point Number field and type H23013.
16) Click .
The Point Data dialog box disappears and Point Data of H23013 appears
in the Relative Humidity button (Figure 6-159).

Figure 6-159. Function Point Editor Dialog Box.


17) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Point ###### reappears.
18) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) dialog box reappears.
19) Click to close the dialog box.
The Edit Groups dialog box reappears.
20) Click .

268
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

6.1.2 Test the Function Calculation Point


1) Select Point from the Commands menu.
The Point Command dialog box appears (Figure 6-160).

Figure 6-160. Point Command Dialog Box.


2) Enter the outside air temp point address.
Enter H32002 in the Point field.
3) Click .
Point H32002s descriptor, value, and alarm condition appear in the Point
Status area.
4) Record the status on a sheet of paper.
Write down H32002 and the displayed value.
5) Enter the outside relative humidity point address.
Enter H32013 in the Point field.
6) Click .
Point H32013s descriptor, value, and alarm condition appear in the Point
Status area.
7) Record the status on a sheet of paper.
Write down H32013 and the displayed value.
8) Enter the outside air enthalpy point address.
Enter Z01003 in the Point field.
9) Click .
Point Z01003 s descriptor, value, and alarm condition appear in the Point
Status area.
10) Record the status on a sheet of paper.
Write down Z01003 and the displayed value.
11) Compare the calculated enthalpy value against a psychrometric
chart.
Confirm that the value of point Z01003 is the correct enthalpy in BTUs per
Pound using a standard psychrometric chart and the values of points
H23002 and H23013.
12) Click .

269
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7 Example Calculation Group


The following is a simple example of calculation group usage. In the example
an areas temperature is being monitored by five space sensors located in
different sections of the area. The average of the five temperatures is used to
determine whether the area needs to be heated, cooled or left as is. If the
temperature is low the calculation group will turn on a heater and fan. If the
temperature is high the calculation group will turn on an air conditioner and
fan. If the temperature is within the acceptable range the heater, air conditioner
and fan will all be turned off. Each step of the procedure will be explained as
it is used.

Figure 6-161. Example Calculation Group.


7.1 Calculation Group Setup
Calculation Point Z02001 calculates the average of the five inputs.
Calculation Point Z02001 - (C02001 + C02002) + (C02003 + C02004) +
(C02005) / (5)
Note: In this example no points have been assigned for analog inputs. This allows us
to set values in the point command dialog box to simulate value changes on the
point.

Figure 6-162. Calculation Point Z02001

270
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

7.1 Calculation Group Setup - continued


Calculation Point Z02002 - IF (Point Data of Z02001 >= 68) AND (Point Data
of Z02001 <= 78) AND (Eng. Unit of Z02008 = TRUE) THEN Run Chillers Off.

Z02002

No
Z02001>=68

Yes

No
Z02001<=78

Yes

No
Z02008=True
Figure 6-163. Calculation Point Z02002.
Yes Calculation Point Z02002 compares the value of point Z02001 to the high and
low comfort levels. If the value is within the specified range and the fan, air
Run Program Do Nothing conditioner or heater is on, program 1 will run. Program 1 will turn off the fan,
AC and heater.
Calculation Point Z02003 - IF (Point Data of Z02001<68.00) AND (Eng. Unit
of Z03002=OFF) THEN Run Chillers Off.

Z02003

No
Z02001<68

Yes

No
Z03002=Off

Yes

Run Program Do Nothing

Figure 6-164. Calculation Point Z02003.


Calculation point Z02003 compares the value of point Z02001 to the low
comfort level. If the value is less than the low comfort level and the heater
is off then program 2 will run. Program 2 turns on the heater and fan, and
turns off the AC.

271
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7.1 Calculation Group Setup - continued


Calculation Point Z02004 - IF (Point Data of Z02001 > 78) AND (Eng. Unit of
Z03003 = OFF) THEN Run heating off/cooling on.

Z02004

No
Z02001>78

Yes

No
Z03003=Off

Yes

Run Program Do Nothing

Figure 6-165. Calculation Point Z02004.


Calculation Point Z02004 compares the value of point Z02001 to the high
comfort level. If the value is above the specified level and the heater is not
on program 3 will run. Program 3 will turn on the fan and AC, and turn off
the heater.
Note: Calculation Points Z02005 through Z02007 are used to demonstrate how
calculation points can be used to display the status if certain conditions occur in
the system. In an actual system it would be better to use the DETAIL of point
Z02001 to display high and low limit alarms rather than using three additional
calculation points.
Calculation Point Z02005 - IF (Point Data of Z02001 >= 68.00) AND (Point
Data of Z02001 <= 78.00)

Z02005

No
Z02001>=68

Yes

No
Z02001<=78

Yes

Do Nothing Do Nothing

Figure 6-166. Calculation Point Z02005.

272
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

7.1 Calculation Group Setup - continued


Calculation Point Z02005 tells the operator if the temperature is within the
comfort range. If the temperature is within range then the Engineering Unit
will be TRUE, otherwise the Engineering Unit will be FALSE.
Calculation Point Z02006 - IF (Point Data of Z02001 > 78.00)

Z02006

No
Z02001>78

Yes

Do Nothing Do Nothing

Figure 6-167. Calculation Point Z02006


Calculation Point Z02006 tells the operator if the temperature is above the
high comfort limit. If it is then the Engineering Unit of point Z02006 will be
TRUE, otherwise it will be FALSE.

Calculation Point Z02007 - IF (Point Data of Z02001 < 68.00)

Z02007

No
Z02001<68

Yes

Do Nothing Do Nothing

Figure 6-168. Calculation Point Z02007.


Calculation Point Z02007 tells the operator if the temperature of point
Z02001 is below the low comfort limit. If it is then the Engineering Unit of
point Z02007 will be TRUE, otherwise the Engineering Unit will be FALSE.

273
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7.1 Calculation Group Setup - continued


Z02008
Calculation Point Z02008 - IF (Eng. Unit of Z03001 = ON) OR (Eng. Unit of
Z03002 = ON) OR (Eng. Unit of Z03003 = ON )
Eng. Unit of
Yes
Z03001=On

No

Yes
Eng. Unit of
Z03002=On

No

Yes
Eng. Unit of
Z03003=On

No

Do Nothing Do Nothing
Figure 6-169. Calculation Point Z02008.
Calculation Point Z02008 tells the operator if any of the equipment controlled
by the calculation group is on. If any of the equipment is on then the
Engineering Unit of point Z02008 will be TRUE, otherwise the Engineering
Unit will be FALSE.
Calculation Point Z02009 - IF (Eng. Unit of Z03001 = ON) AND (Eng. Unit
of Z03002 = ON) AND (Eng. Unit of Z03003 = ON)
Z02009

Eng. Unit of No
Z03001=On

Yes

Eng. Unit of No
Z03002=On

Yes

Eng. Unit of
No
Z03003=Off

Yes
Figure 6-170. Calculation Point Z02009.
Do Nothing Do Nothing Calculation Point 002009 tells the operator if the heat and fan are ON and the
AC is OFF. If so, the Engineering Unit of point 002009 will be TRUE,
otherwise the Engineering Unit will be FALSE.

274
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

7.1 Calculation Group Setup - continued


Z02010 Calculation Point Z02010 - IF (Eng. Unit of Z03001 = OFF) AND (Eng. Unit
of Z03002 = ON) AND (Eng. Unit of Z03003 = ON )

Eng. Unit of No
Z03001=On

Yes

Eng. Unit of No
Z03002=Off

Yes

No
Eng. Unit of
Z03003=On

Yes
Figure 6-171. Calculation Point Z02010.
Do Nothing Do Nothing
Calculation Point Z02010 tells the operator if the heat is OFF and the fan and
AC are ON. If so, then the Engineering Unit of point Z02010 will be TRUE,
otherwise the Engineering Unit will be FALSE.
7.2 Run the Calculation Group
Z02002 1) Initial conditions (Figure 6-170).
The temperature is within limits (Z02001, Z02005), no programs are
running (Z02002, Z02003, Z02004), and all controllers [equipment
No (Z02008), heating (Z02009), and cooling (Z02010)] are off.
Z02001>=68

Yes

No
Z02001<=78

Yes

No
Z02008=True

Yes

Run Program Do Nothing

Figure 6-172. Group Z02000, Initial Conditions.

275
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7.2 Run the Calculation Group - continued


Z02002 2) Temperature drops below low limit (Figure 6-173).

No
Z02001>=68

Yes

No
Z02001<=78

Yes

No
Z02008=True

Yes

Run Program Do Nothing Figure 6-173. Temperature Below Limits.


The temperature drops below 68 signaling point Z02003 start the heating
program.

3) Heating program initializes (Figure 6-174).

Z02003

No
Z02001<68

Yes

No
Z03002=Off

Yes

Run Program Do Nothing

Figure 6-174. Heating Program Initialization.


Point Z02007 shows that the temperature is below acceptable limits.
Point Z02008 shows that equipment has been turned on.
Point Z02009 shows that the heat is on.
After point Z03002 has been turned on the heating program will be
terminated.
4) Area heating is turned on (Figure 6-175).

276
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

7.2 Run the Calculation Group - continued

Z02003

No
Z02001<68

Yes

No
Z03002=Off

Yes

Run Program Do Nothing

Figure 6-175. Heating On.


The heating process has started (points Z02008 and Z02009) and the heating
program has terminated (point Z02003).
Z02002
5) Temperature returns to acceptable range (Figure 6-176).

No
Z02001>=68

Yes

No
Z02001<=78

Yes

No
Z02008=True

Yes

Run Program Do Nothing


Figure 6-176. Temperature In Range.
After the temperature has returned to the acceptable range the Heating/
Cooling Off program will be initiated.

277
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

7.2 Run the Calculation Group - continued


Z02002 6) The Heat and Cool Off program starts (Figure 6-177).

No
Z02001>=68

Yes

No
Z02001<=78

Yes

No
Z02008=True

Yes

Run Program Do Nothing

Figure 6-177. Heat/Cool Off Program Initialization.


The Heat and Cool Off program shuts down the heat and fan. The group
has returned to the initial conditions.
7) The temperature rises above the high limit (Figure 6-178).

Z02004

No
Z02001>78

Yes

No
Z02003=Off

Yes

Run Program Do Nothing

Figure 6-178. Temperature Exceeding High Limit.


When the temperature exceeds the high limit the Cooling On program will
start.
8) The Cool On program starts (Figure 6-179).

278
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

7.2 Run the Calculation Group - continued

Figure 6-179. Cool On Program Starting.

279
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

8 Calculation Point Programming


There are four types of Calculation (or Calc) Points: Function, Analog, Digital
and Time of Day.
Function Calc Points are basically pre-programmed Analog Calc Points that
perform common math and energy management functions.
Analog Calc Points are analog points whose value is determined by performing
a calculation or by being set by a command.
Digital Calc Points are digital points whose state is determined by analyzing
a logical series of statements (e.g., Is x > y?).
Time of Day Calculation Points allow a calculation group to initiate a Time
of Day program. The Time of Day Calculation Points function the same as
a regular Time of Day schedule. See 4.1.10 Time of Day Schedules for
information on using Time of Day Schedules.
8.1 Add a Calculation Group
1) Select Groups from the Edit menu.
The Edit Groups dialog box appears (Figure 6-180).

Figure 6-180. Edit Groups Dialog Box.


2) Enter the number of the new group in the Enter Group Number: field
and click .
Note: This Group Number MUST have been specified as a Calculation Group in the
initial install of UNITY. If you are not sure what the Group Number for
Calculation points should be, check your System Map from the Misc menu.
The Edit Group (number) dialog box appears (Figure 6-181).

Figure 6-181. Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) Dialog Box.


3) Enter the group descriptor in the Group Descriptor: field.
4) Continue with the procedure Add a Calculation Point. See Section
8.2.

280
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 6: Calculation Points

8.2 Add a Calculation Point


1) Select point 001 in the point list and click .
The Edit Point ###### dialog box appears (Figure 6-182).

Figure 6-182. Edit Point ###### Dialog Box.


2) Enter the point descriptor in the Descriptor field.
3) Select the appropriate radio button in the Type area.
4) Select the appropriate engineering unit from the Eng Unit list and click
.
The appropriate Calculation Point Editor dialog box appears (Figure 6-183).

Figure 6-183. Calculation Point Editor Dialog Box.


For more information on Function Calculation Points (FCPS), see Section
3 of this chapter -- Calculation Point Functions. For more information on
Analog Calculation Points (ACPS), see Section 5 of this chapter -- Detailed
ACP Information. For more information on Digital Calculation Points
(DCPS), see Section 4 of this chapter -- Detailed DCP Information
section.
8.3 Delete a Calculation Point

281
Chapter 6: Calculation Points Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
1) Select Groups from the Edit menu.
The Edit Groups dialog box appears (Figure 6-184).

Figure 6-184. Edit Groups Dialog Box.


2) Enter the number of the Calculation group in the Enter Group
Number: field and click .
The Edit Group (number) dialog box appears (Figure 6-185).

Figure 6-185. Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) Dialog Box.


3) Select one of the existing Calculation Points and click .
Click on the appropriate point from the point list. The point disappears
from the list.
4) Click .
The Edit Group ### (Calculation Group) closes and the Edit Groups
reappears.

282
Chapter 7: Information
Management System

Chapter Overview
This chapter of the Users Guide to UNITY will tell you:
How to setup the Information Management System (IMS)
How to generate reports from the IMS

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Chapter 7: IMS Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Set Up the IMS


UNITYs Information Management System (IMS) allows you to store alarms for
any point of a given type. Storing these alarms makes it possible to print historical
reports about alarm activity (i.e., All Fire Alarms in the past two weeks).
1.1 Store IMS Information
UNITY stores separate IMS files for each day, with time and point address data
for each alarm. These files are store in the C:\UNITY\UI\IMS file. You select the
content of the IMS file by choosing which alarms to record. After that, whenever
an alarm of that type occurs (for any point), UNITY will store the alarm type, time,
descriptor, and point address in that days IMS file.
Note: Only the selected alarm types (see Section 1.2 of this chapter-- Select Alarms to be
Stored) will be stored in the IMS file. All other alarms will be reported (via the Alarm
Window), but not stored.
As you select more data to store in the IMS file, you will increase the rate at which
you will use disk space. To keep track of this problem, you can view the IMS Data
File Statistics. IMS is also used to create trend reports. Trend reports allow you to
view the behavior of a point or group of points (10 maximum for a graph) over
a specified period. Just as you can record alarms and later print them as a historical
report, you can also record analog values and non-alarm status requests and later
print them as a trend log. These non-alarm points are trend points, and can be
created for any system point that will return a valid status or value.
Note: Since each user PC stores its own data separately, different trend points can be set up
for each user PC. However, saved report files are global.
1.2 Select Alarms to be Stored
1) Select Alarm Types To Store from the IMS menu.
The IMS Alarms To Store dialog box appears (Figure 7-1).

Figure 7-1. IMS Alarms to Store Dialog Box.


2) Select the segregation file IMS will use from the Segregation File drop-
down list.
The segregation file determines the points available for the IMS report.
3) Add Alarm types to store, as necessary.
Click on an alarm type in the Available Alarms list and then click .
Alarms to be stored no longer appear in the Available Alarms list. Clicking
will add all of the alarm types to the Selected Alarms list. Clicking
will add all card alarm types to the Selected Alarms list.
4) Remove Alarm types to store, as necessary.
Click on an alarm type in the Selected Alarms list and then click .
Alarms that are not stored appear in the Available Alarms list. Clicking
will remove all of the alarm types from the Selected Alarms list.
5) Click to close the dialog box.

284
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 7: IMS

1.3 Add/Modify Trend Points


1) Select Trend Point from the IMS menu.
The Edit Trend Points dialog box appears (Figure 7-2).

Figure 7-2. Edit Trend Points Dialog Box.


2) To add a new trend point, click . To change an existing trend
point, click .
If you are adding a trend point, the Add Trend Point dialog box appears
(Figure 7-3). If you are changing an existing trend point, the Modify Trend
Point dialog box appears with all of the existing Trend Point data in the
appropriate fields (Figure 7-4).

Figure 7-3. Add Trend Point Dialog Box.

Figure 7-4. Add Trend Points Dialog Box.


3) Enter a Point Address in the Point field.
Enter any valid point number from 000000 - Z99999 here.
Note: You may create Trend Points for points that dont exist.
4) Enter the number of minutes between trends (in the Trend Interval:
field).
Enter any number from 1 - 1440 here.
5) Enter the time of day to begin trending in the Start Time field.
Enter any time from 00:00 (midnight) to 23:59 (1 minute before midnight)
here.
6) Enter the time of day to stop trending in the End Time field.
Enter any time from 00:00 (midnight) to 23:59 (1 minute before midnight)
here.

285
Chapter 7: IMS Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.3 Add/Modify Trend Points - continued


Note: Entering a time earlier than the starting time will cause the point to trend past
midnight. For example, a start of 08:00 and an end of 07:00 will trend from
8:00 AM to 7:00 AM the next day.
7) Click in the Add Trend Point dialog box.
The trend point is added to the Edit Trend Points dialog box and the Add
Trend dialog box reappears.
8) Repeat steps 4 - 8 for each new trend point.
The Add Trend Point dialog box will reappear after each Trend Point is
added.
Note: UNITY has a maximum of 10 trend points for a graph.
9) Click in the Add Trend Point dialog box to close the dialog
box.
There are no more Trend Points to add. The Edit Trend Points dialog box
reappears.
10) Click to close the dialog box.
1.4 Delete Trend Points

1) Select Trend Point from the IMS menu.


The Edit Trend Points dialog box appears (Figure 7-6).

Figure 7-6. Edit Trend Points Dialog Box.


2) Select a Trend Point to delete.
UNITY highlights the selected Trend Point.
3) Click .
A warning dialog box appears (Figure 7-7).

Figure 7-7. Warning Dialog Box.


4) Click .
This deletes the selected trend point. The Delete Trend warning box closes
and the Edit Trend Points dialog box reappears.
5) Click to close the dialog box.

286
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 7: IMS

2 IMS Reports
2.1 Set Up IMS Reports
1) Select IMS from the IMS Reports submenu.
The IMS Report dialog box appears (Figure 7-8).

Figure 7-8. IMS Report Dialog Box.


2) Click .
The Edit IMS Report dialog box appears (Figure 7-9).

Figure 7-9. Edit IMS Report Dialog Box.


3) If this is a trend report, select the Trend radio button in the Report
Type area. If this is an alarm report, select the Alarm radio button.
4) Select the points that will be used in the report.
If this is a trend report, only trended points may be included. If all points
within a segregation file will be used select the Segregation File radio
button, then select a segregation file from the drop-down list (Figure 7-
10).

287
Chapter 7: IMS Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.1 Set Up IMS Reports - continued

Figure 7-10. Segregation File Drop-down List.


If specific points will be used in the report select the Individual Points
radio button then click in the Points area. The Select Points dialog
box appears (Figure 7-11).

Figure 7-11. Select points Dialog Box.


Select the points the report will use:
To add an individual point to the Selected list highlight the point then
click . To add several points at once, swipe the points with the
mouse and click .
To add all points to the Selected list click .
To remove an individual point from the Selected list highlight the point
then click .
To remove all points from the Selected list click .
After selecting the points for the report click . The Select Points
dialog box closes and the Edit IMS Report dialog box reappears.
5) If this is an alarm report, click in the Alarms area.
The IMS Alarms List dialog box appears (Figure 7-12).

288
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 7: IMS

2.1 Set Up IMS Reports - continued

Figure 7-12. IMS Alarms List Dialog Box.


If this is an alarm report, select the alarm types the report will use:
To add an individual alarm to the Selected Alarms list highlight the alarm
then click . To add several points at once, swipe the points with
the mouse and click .
To add all alarms to the Selected Alarms list click .
To remove an individual alarm from the Selected Alarms list highlight the
alarm then click .
To remove all alarms from the Selected Alarms list click .
To add only card alarms to the Selected list click . This will also
remove any non-card alarm from the Selected Alarms list.
After selecting the alarms for the report click . The IMS Alarms List
dialog box closes the Edit IMS Report dialog box reappears.
6) If this is an alarm report that will include cards, select the cards that
will be included in the report.
If all cards in the system will be included make sure that a appears in
the All Cards check box. If the box does not have a click once on the
box. If individual cards or a range of cards will be used make sure the All
Cards check box is unchecked. Clicking on the box toggles it from checked
to unchecked or from unchecked to checked. To select individual cards or
a range of cards:
Click in the Cards area.
The Select Cards for Report dialog box appears (Figure 7-13).

Figure 7-13. Select Cards for Report Dialog Box.


To select individual cards select the List radio button then click .
The Get Card Number dialog box appears (Figure 7-14).

289
Chapter 7: IMS Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.1 Set Up IMS Reports - continued

Figure 7-14. Get Card Number Dialog Box.


Enter the card number in the Card #: field, then click . The Get Card
Number dialog box closes and the card number appears in the List field.
To select a range of cards select the Range radio button. Enter the beginning
number of the card range in the From: field. Enter the ending number of the
card range in the To: field.
Click .
The Select Cards for Report dialog box closes and the selected cards or range
of cards appears in the Cards list.
7) Click in the Dates area.
The Select Dates for Report dialog box appears (Figure 7-15).

Figure 7-15. Select Dates for Report Dialog Box.


To select a range of dates select the Range radio button. Using the arrows
buttons, enter the beginning date in the From: Month, Day and Year fields
and the ending date in the To: Month, Day and Year fields.
To select a fixed number of days select the Fixed Count radio button. Using
the arrows buttons, enter the number of days the report will include in the
Number of Days field. If the report will include todays data select the Include
Today check box.
Click to close the dialog box. The selected date range or number of
days appears in the Dates area.
8) Click in the Time area.
The Select Times for Report dialog box appears (Figure 7-16).

Figure 7-16. Select Times for Report Dialog Box.


Using the arrows buttons, enter the Start Time in the Start Time: Hour and
Minute fields and the Stop Time in the Stop Time: Hour and Minute fields.

290
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 7: IMS

2.1 Set Up IMS Reports - continued


If the report will use this range as the start time and stop time for each
day in the report (e.g. the report will run from 8:00 A.M.. to 5:00 P.M..
each day) check the Daily Range check box. If the report will run
continuously from the start time of the first day to the stop time on the
last day, the Daily Range check box should be unchecked.
Click to close the dialog box. The selected time range appears in
the Time area.
9) If you want to run this report again later, click to save the
report setup.
The Get Report Name dialog box appears (Figure 7-17). Enter the new
reports name in the File Name: field. Enter a standard eight character
filename without the extension (the file extension is added automatically).

Figure 7-17. Get Report Name Dialog Box.


10) Click .
The Get Report Name dialog box closes and the name of the new report
appears on the Edit IMS Report dialog box.
11) Click to close the dialog box.
The IMS Reports dialog box reappears.
12) Repeat steps 2 - 11 for each report being added.
13) Click to close the dialog box.
2.2 Run IMS Reports
The following procedures assume that the IMS Reports dialog box is visible
(Figure 7-18). Select Reports from the IMS menu and choose IMS. The IMS
Reports Dialog Box appears.

Figure 7-18. IMS Reports Dialog Box.

291
Chapter 7: IMS Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.2.1 IMS Screen Report


1) Select the report to be run and click .
The IMS Run dialog box appears (Figure 7-19).

Figure 7-19. IMS Run Dialog Box.


2) Click .
The IMS Screen Report dialog box appears (Figure 7-20).

Figure 7-20. IMS Screen Report Dialog Box.


The screen displays selected point data from oldest (top of screen) to
newest (bottom of screen). If more data exists than can be displayed on
screen use the scroll arrows on the right to page down.
Note: The Point Command dialog box can be accessed from the IMS Screen Report
dialog box. To access the Point Command dialog box, select the point you wish
to view then click , or double click on the point. For more information
on the Point Command dialog box see Chapter 2 of the Users Guide- The
UNITY Point Dialog box.
3) When you have finished viewing the IMS Screen Report dialog box
click to close the dialog box.
The IMS Reports dialog box reappears.
4) Click to close the dialog box.

292
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 7: IMS

2.2.2 IMS Graph Report


Only Trend Points can be graphed.
1) Select the report to be run and click .
The IMS Run dialog box appears (Figure 7-21).

Figure 7-21. IMS Run Dialog Box.


2) Click .
The IMS Trend Graphical Display dialog box appears (Figure 7-22).

Figure 7-22. IMS Trend Graphical Display Dialog Box.


Note 1: If more than 500 point statuses will be plotted, the following message box will
appear (Figure 7-23) before the IMS Trend Graphical Display dialog box
appears.

Figure 7-23. IMS Warning Message Box.


Note 2: The dots will be automatically disabled to allow for a less cluttered graph. Click
to continue drawing the graph. If you click , the graph will not
be completed and the IMS Trend Display dialog box closes and the IMS
Reports dialog reappears.
3) If you want to change the appearance of the graph click .
The IMS Trend Display Options dialog box appears (Figure 7-24).

293
Chapter 7: IMS Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.2.2 IMS Graph Report - continued

Figure 7-24. IMS Trend Display Options Dialog Box.


4) To change the appearance of a line select the line then click .
The Line Options dialog box appears (Figure 7-25).

Figure 7-25. Line Options Dialog Box.


5) To change the lines style click on the arrow on the right side of the
Line Style: field.
The Line Style drop-down list appears (Figure 7-26).

Figure 7-26. Line Style Drop-down List.


Select the new line style.
6) To change the lines color click on the arrow on the right side of the
Line Color: field.
The Line Color drop-down list appears (Figure 7-27).

Figure 7-27. Line Color Drop-down List.


Select the new line color.
7) Click to close the dialog box.
The IMS Trend Display Options dialog box reappears.

294
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 7: IMS

2.2.2 IMS Graph Report - continued


8) To change the graphs background color click the arrow on the right
of the Background Color: field.
The Background Color drop-down list appears (Figure 7-28).

Figure 7-28. Background Color Drop-down List.


Select the background color.
9) If necessary, use the Line Thickness spin arrows to change the line thickness.
10) If you want a grid displayed on the graph select the Grid check box.
11) If you want dots to designate the location of the trend intervals
select the Dots check box.
12) Click .
The Trend Option setup is saved to the hard drive.
13) Click to close the dialog box.
The IMS Trend Graphical Display dialog box reappears.
14) Click on a line to see a specific value and time.
When you click on a line, the closest point address and its value at a specific
date and time are displayed at the top of the graph (Figure 7-29).

Figure 7-29. IMS Trend Graphical Display Dialog Box With Point Information.
16) When you have finished viewing the IMS Trend Graphical Display
dialog box click .
17) Click to close the IMS Reports dialog box.

295
Chapter 7: IMS Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.2.3 IMS SDF Report


The IMS SDF command creates a file using the Standard Datafile Format.
This allows IMS information to be imported into spreadsheet and database
programs. Once the information has been placed in a spreadsheet or database
it can be printed for closer examination. To create an IMS SDF file:
1) Select the report to be run click .
The IMS Run dialog box appears (Figure 7-30).

Figure 7-30. IMS Run Dialog Box.


2) Click .
The Get SDF File Name dialog box appears (Figure 7-31).

Figure 7-31. Get SDF File Name Dialog Box.


3) Enter the name for the file in the File Name: field, then click .
Enter a standard eight character filename without the extension (the file
extension is added automatically). The Get SDF File Name dialog box
closes and the IMS Reports dialog box reappears.
Note: The IMS SDF file is created and stored in the IMS directory. The path for the
IMS directory will usually be C:\UNITY\UI\IMS. The file will appear in
the directory as FILENAME.SDF, where FILENAME is the name given
to the file in the Get SDF File Name dialog box.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
2.2.4 IMS ASCII Report
The IMS ASCII command creates a file using the American Standard Code
for Information Interchange. This allows IMS information to be viewed in a
standard DOS or OS/2 editor. To create an IMS ASCII file:
1) Select the report to be run and click .
The IMS Run dialog box appears (Figure 7-32).

296
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 7: IMS

2.2.4 IMS ASCII Report - continued

Figure 7-32. IMS Run Dialog Box.


2) Click .
The Get ASCII File Name dialog box appears (Figure 7-33).

Figure 7-33. Get ASCII File Name Dialog Box.


3) Enter the name for the file in the File Name: field, then click .
Enter a standard eight character filename without the extension (the file
extension is added automatically). The Get ASCII File Name dialog box
closes and the IMS Reports dialog box reappears.
Note: The IMS ASCII file is created and stored in the IMS directory. The path for
the IMS directory will usually be C:\UNITY\UI\IMS. The file will appear
in the directory as FILENAME.TXT, where FILENAME is the name
given to the file in the Get ASCII File Name dialog box.
4) Click to close the dialog box.
2.2.5 Print an IMS Report
To print an IMS report:
1) Select the report to be run and click .
The IMS Run dialog box appears (Figure 7-34).

Figure 7-34. IMS Run Dialog Box.


2) Click .
If the printer was previously set up in UNITY and in the segregation files,
the IMS report is printed on the selected printer.
3) Click to close the IMS Reports dialog box.

297
Chapter 7: IMS Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.2.6 Cancel Printing

1) Select Cancel Printing from the IMS menu.


Cancelling printing of IMS reports stops the CPU processing of IMS data for
a report.
Note: Printing may not stop immediately! This is because each of the printers has a
local buffer that stores portions of each printout.
2.3 View the IMS Data File Statistics
1) Select Statistics from the IMS menu.
The IMS Data File Statistics dialog box appears (Figure 7-35).

Figure 7-35. IMS Data File Statistics Dialog Box.


2) Click to close the dialog box.
2.4 View the IMS Directory
1) Select Directory from the Misc. menu.
The Directory submenu appears.
2) Select IMS from the Directory submenu.
The IMS Directory dialog box appears (Figure 7-35).

Figure 7-35. IMS Directory Dialog Box.


This dialog box allows you to view the dates for which IMS data exists,
NOT the data itself.
3) Click to close the dialog box.

298
Chapter 8: Demand
Control Program

Chapter Overview
This chapter of the Users Guide to UNITY will tell you:
General information about the Demand Control pro-
gram
How to setup the Demand Control program

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Chapter 8: Demand Control Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Overview
This chapter provides the information needed to use the UNITY demand
limiting program. It assumes that the reader is already familiar with UNITY
and its EMS software. A thorough understanding of UNITY calculation
points is also needed. The UNITY demand program uses a Sliding Window
predictive shed algorithm to keep a buildings electrical loads within a
specified demand limit.
UNITY can support 16 different demand programs each controlling a
separate shed list of 1 to 93 pieces of equipment. Each of the programs can
use from 1 to 12 electrical meters for input. If multiple peak limits are needed
during different hours of the day, simply set up two different demand
programs with the appropriate start and stop times.
UNITY can support 128 different priority levels within the shed list. The
program also allows each item to have individually controlled Minimum On,
Minimum Off, and Maximum Off parameters to prevent equipment damage
and ensure comfort control.
For the demand program to function, all of the program parameters must be
provided by setting up a series of UNITY calculation points. These calcula-
tion points will provide all of the program data for the following:
Meter Point Addresses
Meter constants
Demand Interval (for sliding window)
Peak Limits
Scan Frequency
Equipment Loads
Min On, Min Off, Max Off information
Shed Priorities
All of these special calculation points will be of the type FUNCTION. For
more information on UNITY calculation points see Chapter 6: UNITY
Calculation Points. It is important to note that each of these function
calculation points will be of Demand Control type in the normal function
list. The end of this document has two programming forms which will help
define these calculation points.
Once all of the parameter information is complete and correct, the demand
program will begin to execute. Each of the 16 possible demand programs will
be defined using one UNITY calculation group. These can be any valid group
address on the UNITY system. These demand calculation groups are treated
differently than other calculation groups because they are made up of only
function points of the Demand Control type.
Note: The Demand Control program takes priority and overrides normal EMS control
strategies (i.e., start/stop, duty cycle, etc.). However an operator can manually
override the Demand Control program. If an operator commands a point OFF
the Demand Control program will never turn it back on. However, if an operator
commands a point ON the Demand Control program will shed the unit, if
required.

300
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 8: Demand Control

1.1 Demand Terms


Shed Limit: The maximum load in Kilowatts (KW) below which the
demand program will attempt to maintain your building.
Interval: The actual window interval used for the sliding window strategy.
See your contract with the utility company for this value. A common
value for this is 15 minutes.
Note: It is recommended that the Interval for the program divided by the scan time be
<= 30.
Start Time: The time, in minutes past midnight, the demand program will
become active. This number must be less than the stop time.
Stop Time: The time, in minutes past midnight, the demand program will
stop operating. This number must be greater than the start time.
Scan Time: The scan time, measured in minutes, is how often the meters
are checked. It is imperative that this parameter be an even divisor of the
Interval described above. For most applications this number should be
1.
Meter: This is the KWH meter which will provide pulses to a totalizer point.
Meter Factor: This is a constant factor which when multiplied by the
meter pulses yields a KWH usage number.
Mode: The UNITY demand program can operate in one of three different
modes. These modes determine the manner in which UNITY turns on
equipment it has previously shed.
Current Usage: This is the KWH used during the last scan. With a scan
time of 1 minute this value will be the KWH usage for that minute.
Interval Demand: This is the KW used during the current interval. If the
program is defined with a 15 minute interval this value will always read
the usage in KW for the past 15 minutes.
Projected Peak: This is the value the UNITY Demand Control program
is projecting as the highest load your system will reach within one interval
into the future. For example with a 15 minute interval this number will
be what UNITY calculates your demand will reach within the next 15
minutes. This value is always shown in KW.
Peak Time: This is the projected time, in minutes, UNITY estimates the
peak will occur.
Manual Shed: This is the amount of load the operator needs to shed to
avoid the peak limit. This is in excess of what the program can shed.

301
Chapter 8: Demand Control Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2 Setup
The first five points in the calculation group defining a demand program are
special. These points have a predefined meaning and will be used to display
various real time data on the program. If these points are not properly set up
the demand program will not run. All points in the Demand Control program
calculation group must be set up as functions of Demand Control type. The
following describes the uses of the first five points of a demand calculation
group.
2.1 Point 1 Setup Procedure
This point is used to display the Current Usage. This point must have an
engineering unit of KWH. The suggested descriptor is Current Scan Usage.
1) Define this point as a function point by clicking the appropriate radio
button.
2) Assign an engineering unit and descriptor to the point.
3) Click .
The Select Function dialog box appears (Figure 8-1).

Figure 8-1. Select Function Dialog Box.


4) Select the Demand Control function.
5) Click .
The Demand Control Function Point Editor appears (Figure 8-2).

Figure 8-2. Demand Control Function Point Editor.

302
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 8: Demand Control

2.1 Point 1 Setup Procedure - continued


When you select an input, the Select Input box appears (Figure 8-3).

Figure 8-3. Select Input Dialog Box.


The first point of a Demand Calculation group requires these inputs:
Input # 1 - Shed Limit
Use the input type constant and enter the shed limit. This value will be
measured in KW.
Input # 2 - Demand Interval
Using the input type constant, enter the Demand interval in minutes for
the sliding window decision. A typical demand interval will be 15 minutes.
Input # 3 - Operating Mode
Use the input type constant and enter the program mode. This number will
be a 0, 1, 2, or 3. It will determine the manner in which this demand
program turns equipment which has been shed back on.
Mode 0 - This disables the demand program. No shedding of equipment
will occur.
Mode 1 - This mode is the normal mode for program operation. During
normal processing of meter information the program will first turn on
those units which have exceeded their maximum off and as many other
units as the load limits will allow.
Mode 2 - This mode provides a slower method of bringing equipment
back up after the demand program has shut it off. During normal
processing of meter information the program will first turn on those units
that have exceeded their maximum off and one other unit if the excess load
will allow.
Mode 3 - This mode provides the slowest method of bringing equipment
back up after the demand program has shut it off. During normal
processing of meter information the program will only turn on one unit per
scan regardless of maximum off times. It will locate the unit which has
exceeded its maximum off time the most. If no unit has exceeded its
maximum off time the program will turn on the unit that has been off the
longest.
Input # 4 - Program Number
Use the input type constant and enter the program number 0-15.
Input # 5 - Program Start Time
Use the input type constant and enter the program start time in the form
0500.000 or use the input type time and enter a time in the form 0500 for
5:00am. This input must be less than Input # 6

303
Chapter 8: Demand Control Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.1 Point 1 Setup Procedure - continued


Input # 6 - Program Stop Time
Use the input type constant and enter the program stop time in the form
2300.000 or use the input type time and enter a time in the form 2300 for
11:00 pm. This input must be greater than Input #5.
Input # 7 - Program Scan Time
Use the input type constant and enter the program scan time. This
determines how often the program will look at and process the meter data.
T HIS INPUT MUST BE A DIVISOR OF THE INTERVAL (Input # 2). For
example with a 15 minute interval the valid scan times will be 1, 3, 5, 15.
Input # 8 - Command/Residual Priority
This field defines the command and residual priorities the program uses
when shedding loads. This prevents other applications from overriding
the demand program. So, the input type is constant.
Input #9 - Number of Samples for Predicted Peak
This parameter defines how many of the recents samples will be averaged
to determine what the future load is likely to be.
Input #10 is not used on Point # 1.
2.2 Point 2 Setup Procedure
This point displays the Interval Demand. This point must have an engineer-
ing unit of KW. The suggested descriptor is Last Interval Demand. This
point can be displayed, printed, or trended like any other UNITY point. By
using a function calculation point of type MAXIMUM and printing or trending
this point once a day you can record the highest level your demand reached
on a given day.
1) Define this point as a function point by clicking the appropriate radio button.
2) Assign the point an engineering unit and descriptor.
Note: A high analog limit on this point equal to the shed limit will cause an alarm
whenever the limit is exceeded. This limit can be set by clicking .
3) Click in the calculation group and choose the Demand
Control Function.
You will be presented with the Demand Control Data Input Editor with ten input
fields. Input #1 is required for the second point, but the rest are optional:
Input # 1 - Number of Meters
Use the input type constant and enter the number of demand meters this
point defines. This can be 0, 1, 2 or 3.
Input # 2 - Meter # 1 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and enter the point address of the totalizer
that is monitoring the first meter this program uses.
Input # 3 - Meter # 1 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the first
demand meter the program uses.
Input # 4 - Meter # 1 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH
reading this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
Input # 5 - Meter # 2 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer
that is monitoring the second meter this program uses.
Input # 6 - Meter # 2 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the second
demand meter the program uses.
Input # 7 - Meter # 2 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH
reading this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
Input # 8 - Meter # 3 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer
that is monitoring the third meter this program uses.
304
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 8: Demand Control

2.2 Point 2 Setup Procedure - continued


Input # 9 - Meter # 3 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the third
demand meter the program uses.
Input # 10 - Meter # 3 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH
reading this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
2.3 Point 3 Setup Procedure
This point displays the Projected Peak. This point must have an engineering
unit of KW. The suggested descriptor is Projected Peak Level.
1) Define the point as a function point by clicking the appropriate radio
button.
2) Assign the point an engineering unit and descriptor.
3) Click in the calculation group and choose the Demand
Control Function.
You will be presented with the Demand Control Data Input Editor with
ten input fields. Input #1 is required for the third point, but the rest are
optional:
Input # 1 - Number of Meters
Use the input type constant and enter the number of demand meters this
point defines. This can be 0, 1, 2 or 3.
Input # 2 - Meter # 4 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer
that is monitoring the fourth meter this program uses.
Input # 3 - Meter # 4 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the fourth
demand meter the program uses.
Input # 4 - Meter # 4 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH
reading this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
Input # 5 - Meter # 5 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer
that is monitoring the fifth meter this program uses.
Input # 6 - Meter # 5 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the fifth
demand meter the program uses.
Input # 7 - Meter # 5 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH
reading this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
Input # 8 - Meter # 6 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer
that is monitoring the sixth meter this program uses.
Input # 9 - Meter # 6 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the sixth
demand meter the program uses.
Input # 10 - Meter # 6 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH
reading this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.

305
Chapter 8: Demand Control Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.4 Point 4 Setup Procedure


This point displays when the projected peak will occur. This point must have
an engineering unit of MIN. The suggested descriptor is When will projected
peak Occur?
1) Define this point as a function point by clicking the appropriate radio
button.
2) Assign the point an engineering unit and descriptor.
3) Click in the calculation group and choose the Demand
Control Function.
You will be presented with the Demand Control Data Input Editor with
ten input fields. Input #1 is required for the fourth point, but the rest are
optional:
Input # 1 - Number of Meters
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the seventh
demand meter the program uses.
Input # 2 - Meter # 7 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer
that is monitoring the seventh meter this program uses.
Input # 3 - Meter # 7 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the fifth demand
meter the program uses.
Input # 4 - Meter # 7 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH reading
this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
Input # 5 - Meter # 8 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer that
is monitoring the fifth meter this program uses.
Input # 6 - Meter # 8 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the fifth demand
meter the program uses.
Input # 7 - Meter # 8 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH reading
this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
Input # 8 - Meter # 9 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer that
is monitoring the sixth meter this program uses.
Input # 9 - Meter # 9 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the sixth demand
meter the program uses.
Input # 10 - Meter # 9 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH reading
this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
2.5 Point 5 Setup Procedure
This point will be reserved. This point must have an engineering unit of KW. The
suggested descriptor is Manual Shed Amount.
1) Define this point as a function point by clicking the appropriate radio
button.
2) Assign the point an engineering unit and descriptor.
3) Click in the calculation group and choose the Demand
Control Function.
You will be presented with the Demand Control Data Input Editor with
ten input fields. Input #1 is required for the fifth point, but the rest are
optional:
306
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 8: Demand Control

2.5 Point 5 Setup Procedure - continued


Input # 1 - Number of Meters
Use the input type constant and enter the number of demand meters this point
defines. This can be 0, 1, 2 or 3.
Input # 2 - Meter # 10 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer that
is monitoring the tenth meter this program uses.
Input # 3 - Meter # 10 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the tenth demand
meter the program uses.
Input # 4 - Meter # 10 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH reading
this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
Input # 5 - Meter # 11 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer that
is monitoring the fifth meter this program uses.
Input # 6 - Meter # 11 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the fifth demand
meter the program uses.
Input # 7 - Meter # 11 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH reading
this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
Input # 8 - Meter # 12 Point Number
Use the Point Data input field and supply the point address of the totalizer that
is monitoring the sixth meter this program uses.
Input # 9 - Meter # 12 Meter Constant
Use the input type constant and enter the meter constant for the sixth demand
meter the program uses.
Input # 10 - Meter # 12 Max KWH reading per scan
This value will range from 0 - 9999 and represents the maximum KWH reading
this meter can record in a scan. Use the point data input type.
2.6 Points 6-99 Setup Procedure
Note: Point 6 must be set up before any calculation takes place.
These points define the list of items to be shed. When points 6-99 are called up
for status they will be reading the amount of time, in minutes, that their defined
point has been in the current state. These points must be defined with engineering
units of MIN.
1) Define the points as function points by clicking the appropriate radio
button.
2) Assign the points an engineering units and descriptors.
3) Click in the calculation group and choose the Demand
Control Function.
You will be presented with the Demand Control Data Input Editor with
ten input fields.
Input # 1 - Point Address of the equipment
Use the input type Point Data and enter the address of the unit.
Input # 2 - KW Load of Equipment
Use the input type constant and enter the equipment load in KW.

307
Chapter 8: Demand Control Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.6 Points 6-99 Setup Procedure - continued


Input # 3 - Minimum On Time
Use the input type constant and enter the minimum amount of time, in
minutes, that the unit must run before being turned off.
Input # 4 - Minimum Off Time
Use the input type constant and enter the minimum amount of time, in
minutes, that the unit must stay off after being shed by the demand program.
Input # 5 - Maximum Off Time
Use the input type constant and enter the maximum amount of time, in
minutes, that the unit is allowed to remain off by the demand program.
Input # 6 - Shed Priority
Use the input type constant and enter the priority (1-128) for this piece of
equipment in relationship to the other items in the shed list.
The program will attempt to shed all lower priority items before moving on
to shed higher priority items.
Input # 7 - Time Delay between ON commands
This parameter determines the delay time (in seconds) between equipment
start-us. Prior to Rev 4.0 the delay was fixed at 2 seconds per On command.

308
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Chapter 8: Demand Control

3 UNITY Demand Control Programming Forms


Group Number:_______ Group Type: Calculation Group
Eng.
Point Descriptor Type Unit
1 Current Scan Usage F (Demand Control) KWH
INPUTS:
1) Peak Limit in KW:_______
2) Demand Interval in Minutes:_______
3) Operating Mode (0,1,2,3): _______
4) Program Number (0-15): _______
5) Start Time after Midnight:_______
6) Stop Time after Midnight:_______
7) Program Scan Time in Minutes:_______
8) Command Priority:_______
9) Number of Samples for Predicted Peak:_______

2 Last Interval Usage F (Demand Control) KW


INPUTS:
1) Number of Meters (0,1,2,3): ______
2) Meter #1 Point Address:______
3) Meter #1 Meter Constant:______
4) Meter #1 Max KWH Reading/scan:______
5) Meter #2 Point Address:______
6) Meter #2 Meter Constant:______
7) Meter #2 Max KWH Reading/scan:_____
8) Meter #3 Point Address:______
9) Meter #3 Meter Constant:______
10) Meter #3 Max KWH Reading/scan:______

3 Projected Peak F (Demand Control) KW


INPUTS:
1) Number of Meters (0,1,2,3): ______
2) Meter #4 Point Address:______
3) Meter #4 Meter Constant:______
4) Meter #4 Max KWH Reading/scan:______
5) Meter #5 Point Address:______
6) Meter #5 Meter Constant:______
7) Meter #5 Max KWH Reading/scan:_____
8) Meter #6 Point Address:______
9) Meter #6 Meter Constant:______
10) Meter #6 Max KWH Reading/scan:______

309
Chapter 8: Demand Control Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3 UNITY Demand Control Programming Forms-


continued
Point Descriptor Type Unit
4 Peak Will Occur In F (Demand Control) MIN
INPUTS:
1) Number of Meters (0,1,2,3): ______
2) Meter #7 Point Address:______
3) Meter #7 Meter Constant:______
4) Meter #7 Max KWH Reading/scan:______
5) Meter #8 Point Address:______
6) Meter #8 Meter Constant:______
7) Meter #8 Max KWH Reading/scan:_____
8) Meter #9 Point Address:______
9) Meter #9 Meter Constant:______
10) Meter #9 Max KWH Reading/scan:______

5 Manual Shed Amt. F (Demand Control) KW


INPUTS:
1) Number of Meters (0,1,2,3): ______
2) Meter #10 Point Address:______
3) Meter #10 Meter Constant:______
4) Meter #10 Max KWH Reading/scan:______
5) Meter #11 Point Address:______
6) Meter #11 Meter Constant:______
7) Meter #11 Max KWH Reading/scan:_____
8) Meter #12 Point Address:______
9) Meter #12 Meter Constant:______
10) Meter #12 Max KWH Reading/scan:______

6-99 Shed Item Descrip F (Demand Control) MIN


INPUTS:
1) Point Data of:_____ (pt address)
2) Load of Unit in KW:_____ (constant)
3) Minimum ON Time (minutes): _____ (constant)
4) Minimum OFF Time (minutes): _____ (constant)
5) Maximum OFF Time (minutes): _____ (constant)
6) Priority (1-128): _____ (constant)
7) Time Delay between On Commands:_____ (constant)
Note: All other shed items will follow in point addresses 07 through 98. Inputs are identical
to Point 6.

310
Appendix A: Glossary

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will define:
UNITY hardware terms
UNITY software terms

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix A: Glossary Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
ACM - Accumulator point.
Address (UNITY) - A numeric designation that defines a Group Series, a Group, and a Point. The Group Series
designates to which subsystem a set of Groups belongs.
AHU - Air Handler Unit
AI - Analog Input point
Alarm - A system function that alerts the user to unusual conditions at a specific point in the Building Automation
System.
Analog Point - A sensing device that monitors a variable parameter (i.e., Temperature, Humidity, Pressure, etc.) in
a specific location.
AO - Analog Output point.
ASC - Application Specific Controller.
BI - Binary Input point.
BO - Binary Output point.
Building Automation - The process of controlling functions in a building (Lighting, Heating, Air Conditioning)
according to a given set of rules or procedures. Building Automation is usually implemented with some form
of computer. Some systems distinguish between HVAC and Building Automation.
CAM- Card Access Manager
Central Processing Unit (CPU) - The computer that performs Building Automation functions. The CPU typically
controls the building in real time (direct operator instruction), and under computer control (according to a
defined set of procedures). In UNITY, a separate CPU exists for each subsystem, and communicates with the
subsystem directly.
Client - Any UNITY PC that runs the User Interface software.
COS - Change Of State.
Data Gathering Panel (DGP) - A local data collection/formatting and control unit. DGPs are typically where point
data is collected, and where command output (switching, incrementing, decrementing) occurs. Usually, a
DGP defines one logical Group.
DDA - Dynamic Data Access.
DDC - Direct Digital Control.
DDE - Dynamic Data Exchange.
DDF - Dynamic Data File.
DDL - Data Definition Language.
DI - Digital Input point.
Digital Point - A sensing device that monitors an ON/OFF parameter (i.e., Fire Alarm Boxes, Security, etc.) in a
specific location.
Direct Digital Control Panel (DDC) - A type of DGP designed with sufficient local data processing capability to
perform automation tasks as a stand-alone system.
DO - Digital Output point.
EIA - Event Initiated Activity.
EIG - Event Initiate Graphic.
EILG - Event Initated Logical Group display.
EIM - Event Initiated Message.
EMS - Energy Management System.
Energy Management - The process of monitoring usage of energy in the Building Automation System, and making
adjustments to a control procedure, with the intention of reducing unnecessary energy usage.
Energy Management System (EMS) - The energy/building management language used with UNITY.

312
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix A: Glossary
Event Initiated Logical Group Displays (EILGs) - Logical Group Displays that have been linked to a specific
event on a given point or group.
Event Initiated Messages (EIMs) - Messages that have been linked to a specific event on a given point or group.
Event Initiated Programs (EIPs) - Programs that have been linked to a specific event on a given point or group.
Fire & Security - The process of controlling the emergency response functions in a building (in case of fire), as well
as controlling access through secure entrances and exits.
GPL - Graphic Programming Language.
Graphics - Paint-type images that UNITY uses to illustrate system operation. These images are created with PC
Paintbrush or other compatible graphics program.
Group - A logical association of Points.
GUI - Graphic User Interface.
Hardware - The physical components of the Building Automation System.
HVAC - Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning. The process of controlling the atmospheric environment functions
in a building according to a given set of rules or procedures.
IMS - Information Management System.
IRM - Information Routing Manager
Information Routing Manager (IRM) - Software in the Server PC that coordinates the transfer of data and
commands between User Workstations and Subsystems.
Intercom - Audio transmission system that allows the operator of the Building Automation System to speak with
personnel at DGPs equipped with an Intercom station.
LAN - Local Area Network.
Logical Group Displays - The combination of Graphics and Point Data that display when a given logical group is
selected.
Logical Group Tree - The organizational tool that UNITY uses to guide the operator through his system.
Logs - Logs are listings of system information. They may provide status information (Alarm Log), or a summary of
system data (Group Log, Group Series, etc.)
Messages - User-defined text displays and printouts.
OIP - Operator Initiated Program.
Operator Initiated Programs (OIPs) - Programs that are started manually by the operator.
Operating System - Software designed to perform the local file maintenance, memory management, and internal
housekeeping functions of a computer system.
Peripherals - Devices connected to the Building Automation System, including printers, CRTs, Intercoms, etc.
PID Loop - Proportional, Integral, Derivative Loop.
Point Command - Instructions from the Building Automation System to generate a specific activity at a specific
point.
Point Status - Data that represents the state of a point in the Building Automation System. The data may be On, Off,
Alarm, or a Numeric value.
Printer - A device for generating a hardcopy listing of data from the Building Automation System.
Programs - User-defined procedures and instructions for the Central Processing Unit of the Building Automation
System.
RTU - Roof Top Unit.
Server - The UNITY PC that runs the Information Routing Manager software.
Sensor - A device that monitors physical parameters in a specific location.
Software - Commands or Data used by the Central Processing Unit to control the hardware components of a
computer system.

313
Appendix A: Glossary Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
Subsystems - Software that maintains UNITY data files on a particular set of field equipment (e.g., UNITY/1000
Subsystem, UNITY/2000 Subsystem, UNITY/Tracer Subsystem). There will be one Subsystem for each
front-end system replaced. If UNITY replaces two Delta 2000 systems, there will be two UNITY/2000
Subsystems.
Time Initiated Programs (TIPs) - Programs that have been linked to a TIP Schedule.
TIP - Time Initiated Program.
TIP Schedules - User-defined time/day lists that determine when TIPs will run.
TOD - Time Of Day.
Totalizer - A counter that is incremented to maintain a specific total (i.e., Kilowatts).
UNITY - Building Automation system manufactured by Electronic Systems U.S.A.. This is a direct replacement for
the Delta 1000, Delta 2000, Trane and other systems.
UI - User Interface.
User Interface - The software that runs on the PC to provide you with the Logical Group Tree, Command dialog
boxes, Logs, etc.
VAV - Variable Air Volume controller.
WAN - Wide Area Network

314
Appendix B:
Maintenance

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will
describe:
A suggested maintenance schedule
Routine hardware maintenance procedures
Routine software maintenance procedures

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix B: Maintenance Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Scheduled Maintenance
The schedule below, is our recommendation for maintenance on an
average UNITY system. Your system may require modification of this
schedule based on the environment in which the PC is installed (dust,
smoke, or other airborne pollution), or due to system configuration
(storing all alarm types to the IMS data file).
1.1 Annual Maintenance
Once a year, you should follow the procedures listed below:
Clean floppy diskette drive
Clean the printer carriage area
Back up the entire hard disk
1.2 Semi-Annual Maintenance
Twice a year, you should follow the procedures listed below:
Clean the PC
Clean PC monitor
Clean the PC keyboard
1.3 Monthly Maintenance
Once a month, you should follow the procedures listed below:
Clean the PC mouse
Replace printer ribbon
Backup datafiles - Weekly is better.
Purge IMS files

316
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix B: Maintenance

2 Hardware Maintenance
The following step-by-step procedures show you how to maintain the
hardware components of your UNITY system (PC Chassis, Printer, PC
Keyboard, PC Monitor, and the PC Mouse).
These procedures assume that you are currently logged onto UNITY,
and that you are using an I NTEL Personal Computer, an NEC Video
Monitor, a Texas Instruments Printer, and a Microsoft Mouse. Main-
tenance procedures for other equipment may be similar, but is not
guaranteed.
2.1 Clean Floppy Diskette Drive
1) Switch to the DOS Window from OS/2.
2) If appropriate, apply the cleaning solution to the cleaning floppy.
Some drive cleaning systems use a wet system that requires the
application of a liquid cleaner to the surface of the Cleaning Floppy
itself. If you have such a cleaning system, follow the directions for
applying the solution to the floppy.
3) Insert the cleaning floppy in the floppy diskette drive.
Push the diskette into the drive until the EJECT button on the drive
pops out.
4) Type DIR A: and press the RETURN key.
This operation is intended to spin the Cleaning Floppy against the
Drive Head. After a few moments, an error message will appear.
5) Select Retry the Operation three times.
Since the Cleaning Floppy contains no information, this operation
will always fail.
6) Select End the Program.
This cancels the operation and brings the DOS screen back.
7) Switch to the UNITY User from OS/2.
Press the CTRL and ESC keys at the same time, select the name
UNITY User from the Task List, and select the Switch To button.
8) Remove the cleaning floppy from the floppy diskette drive.
You have finished cleaning the floppy diskette drive.
2.2 Clean the PC
1) Turn off the PC and unplug it.
2) Using a brush or brush attachment and a vacuum cleaner, clean all
front and rear vent openings on the PC Cabinet.
Be careful not push the fibers of the brush or brush attachment into
the case of the PC.
2.3 Clean the PC Keyboard
1) Turn off the PC and unplug it.
2) Using a brush or brush attachment and a vacuum cleaner, clean the
entire keyboard.
Be careful not push the fibers of the brush or brush attachment in
between the keys on the keyboard.
3) With a damp cloth, wipe the individual keys clean.

317
Appendix B: Maintenance Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.4 Clean the PC Video Monitor


1) Turn off the PC and unplug it.
2) Using a brush or brush attachment and a vacuum cleaner, clean all
side and rear vent openings on the monitor cabinet.
Be careful not push the fibers of the brush or brush attachment into
the case of the Monitor.
3) With a damp cloth, wipe the monitor screen.
4) Spray the monitor screen with an antistatic spray.
2.5 Replace the Printer Ribbon
1) Open the protective cover at the top-front of the printer.
Grasp the vertical handles on the cover (just above the platen), and
pull up and toward the front of the printer.
2) Slide the printhead assembly to the center of the carriage area.
Grasp the printhead assembly by the ribbon cartridge (black).
Note: Do not touch the metal fins of the Printhead! They may be extremely hot from
use.
3) Remove the ribbon cartridge.
Place your thumb next to the s on one side and your forefinger next
to the t on the other, and lift up.
4) Install the new ribbon cartridge.
Holding the new ribbon in the same position as the old one, place
the back of the ribbon into the ribbon mounting plate, and lower
the front of the cartridge over the printhead until it snaps into
place.
5) Close the protective cover.
The cover pivots at the front, and snaps into place at the rear.
2.6 Clean the Printer Carriage Area
1) Remove the protective cover from the carriage area.
2) Using a brush or brush attachment and a vacuum cleaner, clean all
front and rear vent openings on the printer cabinet.
Be careful not push the fibers of the brush or brush attachment into
the case of the printer.
2.7 Clean the PC Mouse
1) Turn the mouse upside down.
An oval shaped cover with a hole in it is visible on the bottom of
the mouse.
2) Remove the bottom cover.
Place your thumb over the hole in the cover, and press down and
away from the mouse cable. Pull up and forward on the cover to
remove it.
3) Turn the mouse right-side up.
The rubber mouse ball will fall out of the bottom.
4) Using a damp cloth or rag, clean the rubber mouse ball.
All dirt, dust, and grease should be removed.
Note: Using chemical cleaners on the mouse ball is not recommended!
5) Turn the mouse upside down again.
6) Replace the rubber ball back into the bottom of the mouse.
7) Replace the bottom cover.

318
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix B: Maintenance
Slide the cover down and into the hole, making sure that the long
lip is pointing down toward the bottom of the mouse, but inside
the hole. Push the top of the cover closed and toward the mouse
cable.
8) Turn the mouse right-side up again.

319
Appendix B: Maintenance Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3 Software Maintenance
In addition to the regular maintenance of PC-related hardware in
UNITY, there is a large amount of data kept on the Hard Disk that is
very valuable. Regularly copying this data to floppy disks is known
as Backing Up.
3.1 Before You Backup
Before actually performing the Backup Procedures, be aware of the following:
You will need to have enough formatted 3.5" high density floppy
disks to hold all of the UNITY datafiles. For most systems, 3 to 4
high density (1.44M - marked with an HD) disks is sufficient.
You should maintain at least 3 sets of backup floppies. This is
both for convenience (keeping the oldest copy on-site), and
safety (duplication of most data across 3 sets). In the above
paragraph, the 4 to 7 high density disks is considered a set of
backup floppies.
You should backup at least once a month (weekly is better) or
after any significant changes to the datafile (programs, messages,
graphics, points, etc.).
Note: UNITY will remain on line during a backup, but before a restore, UNITY
must be shut down.
3.2 Prepare Files for Backup
1) Select Datafile Backup from the Misc. Menu.
The System Backup dialog box appears (Figure B-1).

Figure B-1. System Backup Dialog Box.


2) Select the button.
UNITY will now begin copying all of the datafiles into a special backup
directory on the hard disk. The dialog box disappears, and you can
resume working. Below is a map of the UNITY directories with the
locations of the datafile copies for each installed subsystem highlighted.
C:\UNITY\BACKUP\SUBSYS01
\SUBSYS02
\IRM

320
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix B: Maintenance
\UI
When UNITY has finished copying all of the datafiles, the dialog
box below appears.

Figure B-2. System Backup Complete Message Box.


3) Select the button.
Now you can transfer the backup files to floppy disks.
3.3 Back Up Files to Floppy Disks
1) Press the Alt and Esc keys together.
The Alt-Esc key combination switches the current program to the
back of the screen, and moves the next program to the front. Repeat
step 1 until the UNITY Icon View window appears.
Note: This assumes that the window is open.
2) Double click on the System Backup icon.
An OS/2 window opens, and the PC prompts you for the formatted
floppies.
3) Number and Label the Backup Floppy disks.
As soon as you remove a disk, mark the disk with a name and/or
number (e.g. Backup Set #3: Disk 1).
3.4 Restore Files from Floppy Disks
Note: This procedure assumes that the UNITY software is down, but the affected
PC is still functional.
1) Press the Alt and Esc keys together.
The Alt-Esc key combination switches the current program to the
back of the screen, and moves the next program to the front. Repeat
step 1 until the UNITY Icon View window appears.
Note: This assumes that the window is open.
2) Double click on the System Restore icon.
An OS/2 window opens, and the PC prompts you for the backup
floppies by number.
3) Insert the numbered backup floppies as instructed.
3.5 Restore Files from the Hard Drive
Note: This procedure assumes that the UNITY software is down, but the affected
PC is still functional.
1) Press the Alt and Esc keys together.
The Alt-Esc key combination switches the current program to the
back of the screen, and moves the next program to the front. Repeat
step 1 until the UNITY Icon View window appears.
Note: This assumes that the window is open.
2) Double click on the Restore from C:\UNITY\BACKUP icon.
An OS/2 window opens, and the PC copies data from the
UNITY\BACUP directory into the operating directories.
3) Insert the numbered backup floppies as instructed.
3.6 Purge IMS Files
1) Double click on the Backup IMS icon in the UNITY Icon View
folder. 321
Appendix B: Maintenance Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

322
Appendix C: DataBase
Dump

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will tell you:
Basic information about the DataBase Dump utility
How to install the DataBase Dump utility in your system
How to use the DataBase Dump utility
.

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix C: Data Base Dump Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Overview
The DataBase Dump utility allows the operator to view detailed information for
a selected range of points in the UNITY system. The information can be sent
either to the screen for direct viewing or to a file which can be sent to a printer for
hardcopy output.
1.1 Installing the DataBase Dump Utility
The DBDUMP utility must be installed in the UNITY main directory.
1) Open an OS/2 window.
2) Insert the DBDUMP floppy into the floppy drive.
3) Copy the DBDUMP.EXE file from the floppy to the UNITY main
directory.
Type COPY A:\DBDUMP.EXE C:\UNITY\BACKUP then press enter.
1.2 Using the DataBase Dump Utility
1) In the OS/2 window, type DBDUMP at the C:\UNITY\ prompt, then press
Enter.
The DBDUMP.EXE window appears (Figure C-1).

Figure C-1. DBDUMP Window.

2) Select Display Point Range from the Option menu.


The DataBase Dump dialog box appears (Figure C-2).

Figure C-2. DataBase Dump Dialog Box.


3) Enter the beginning and ending point numbers for the database dump.
4) Click the Dump button.
The DBDUMP utility generates a series of text (.TXT) files. When the DBDUMP
utility has finished generating the files the View Group dialog box appears
(Figure C-3).

324
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix C: Data Base Dump

1.2 Using the DataBase Dump Utility - continued

Figure C-3. View Group Dialog Box.


5) Select a group to view and click on the View button.
The DBDUMP .TXT file window appears (Figure C-4).

Figure C-4. DBDUMP .TXT Window.


6) Select Exit from the File menu when you have finished viewing the
contents of the .TXT file.
The DBDUMP .TXT window closes.
7) Repeat steps 4 - 5 for each file you wish to view.
8) When you have finished viewing the files click on the button
in the View Group dialog box.
The View Group dialog box closes.
9) Select from the Option menu.
A Query box appears verifying that you want to end the DBDUMP session
(Figure C-5).

Figure C-5. Query Box.


10) Click on the button.
The DBDUMP utility closes.

325
Appendix C: Data Base Dump Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2 An Example Report
The information contained in a report depends upon the type of point. The
point can be from any of the UNITY subsystems. Below is an example of a
typical report followed by an explanation of the information presented. The
sample report is based on a Delta 2000 subsystem. The information con-
tained in the report will vary according to the subsystem being used.

Group Address
Group Type
Point Address and
Point Descriptor
Engineering Unit
Point Type
Point Details

Figure C-6. Example Report.


2.1 Reading the Report
Group Address - This is the groups address number. It consists of the
groups unity channel and the groups number.
Group Type - This is the type of subsystem to which the group belongs. In
this example the group belongs to a Delta 2000 subsystem.
Point Address - This is the points location within the group. The entire point
address consists of the group address and the point address.
Point Descriptor - This is a descriptive name assigned to the point.
Engineering Unit - This defines the digital states or analog units of measure
the point will use. Examples of digital engineering units are On/Off,
Access/Secure, and Normal/Alarm. Examples of analog engineering are
Degrees (Fahrenheit or Celsius), PSI, and Gallon per Minute (GPM).
Point Type - This describes points function. In the example report, the point
types are given. The first point type is a two-position command point.
This point type is used for commanding relays. The second point type
used is an alarm only point. Alarm only points are used to alert the system
of alarm conditions present on a specified point.
Point Details - This gives specific information about how the point is setup.
The following information is included in the point details section of the
report:
Command Time Out - This is the time delay (in seconds) between the
time a command is issued and an alarm is returned indicating a
command failure.

326
Appendix D: Alarm
Manager

Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will tell you:
What the Alarm Manager is
How to setup the Alarm Manager
How to view the Alarm Manager
How to respond to Alarm Manager items

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix D: Alarm Manager UsersGuide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 What is the Alarm Manager


The Alarm Manager is a UNITY utility program used to monitor critical
system points. When a point monitored by the Alarm Manager enters the
alarm or trouble state, it will remain in the Alarm Managers Alarm List until
someone (a Responder) has taken action (a Response) to correct or confirm
the situation.
Responders and Responses are set up by Segregation Files. All points within
a specific Segregation File will share the same Responders and Responses. All
options selected for the Segregation File will apply to all points within the file.
The following options are available for the Alarm Manager:
1) Confirmation on Response - When a response is saved using the Alarm
Manager command, an alert box appears (Figure D-1) to verify the
response is correct.

Figure D-1. Confirmation Alert Box.


2) Respond to Normal condition - Points setup for the Respond to Normal
condition option require a response when the point returns to normal.
Points that do not have this option selected require responses to alarm
conditions only.
3) Allow multiple alarms per point - If this option is selected the Alarm
Manager will display an alarm response each time the point goes into
alarm. If this option is not selected only one alarm will be shown per
point.
Note: If it is necessary to respond to each alarm and normal (Return to Normal)
condition, allow multiple alarms per point must be selected.

328
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix D: Alarm Manager

2 Set Up Alarm Manager


2.1 Add a Responder
1) Select Alarm Manager from the Setup menu.
The Alarm Manager Set Up dialog box appears (Figure D-2).

Figure D-2. Alarm Manager Set Up Dialog Box.


2) Select a Segregation File to edit from the list box.
All points in a selected segregation file will be included in the Alarm
Managers Alarm List.
3) Select the appropriate option (See Section D.1).
4) Click .
The Edit Responder dialog box appears (Figure D-3).

Figure D-3. Edit Responder Dialog Box.


5) Select the Responders number.
6) Enter the Responders name and click .
The Responders name appears in the list beside the selected number.
7) Repeat steps 4 - 6 for each Responder.
Each Segregation file can have up to 256 Responders.
8) Click .
The Edit Responder dialog box closes.
9) Repeat steps 2 - 8 for each Segregation File being edited.
10) Click .
The Responder setup is saved.

329
Appendix D: Alarm Manager UsersGuide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.2 Change or Delete a Responder


1) Select Alarm Manager from the Setup menu.
The Alarm Manager Set Up dialog box appears (Figure D-4).

Figure D-4. Alarm Manager Set Up Dialog Box.


2) Select a Segregation File to edit from the list box.
All points in a selected segregation file will be included in the Alarm
Managers Alarm List.
3) Select the appropriate option (See Section D.1.)
4) Click .
The Edit Responder dialog box appears (Figure D-5).

Figure D-5. Edit Responder Dialog Box.


5) Select the Responders number.
The Responders name appears in the text box.
6) Delete the Responders name by using the Backspace key.
7) Enter the new name.
If the Responder is being deleted, leave the text field blank.
8) Click .
The name is changed or removed from the list.
9) Repeat steps 3 - 6 for each Responder being changed or deleted.
10) Click .
The Edit Responder dialog box closes.
11) Repeat steps 2 - 8 for each Segregation File being edited.
12) Click .
The Responder setup is saved.

330
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix D: Alarm Manager

2.3 Add a Response


1) Select Alarm Manager from the Setup menu.
The Alarm Manager Set Up dialog box appears (Figure D-6).

Figure D-6. Alarm Manager Set Up Dialog Box.


2) Select a Segregation File to edit from the list box.
All points in a selected segregation file will be included in the Alarm
Managers Alarm List.
3) Select the appropriate option (See Section D.1.)
3) Click .
The Edit Responses dialog box appears (Figure D-7).

Figure D-7. Edit Responses Dialog Box.


4) Select the Responses number.
5) Enter the Response and click .
The Response appears in the list beside the selected number.
6) Repeat steps 4 - 5 for each Response.
Each Segregation file can have up to 256 Responses.
7) Click .
The Edit Responses dialog box closes.
8) Repeat steps 2 - 7 for each Segregation File being edited.
9) Click .
The Responses setup is saved.

331
Appendix D: Alarm Manager UsersGuide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.4 Change or Delete a Response


1) Select Alarm Manager from the Setup menu.
The Alarm Manager Set Up dialog box appears (Figure D-8).

Figure D-8. Alarm Manager Set Up Dialog Box.


2) Select a Segregation File to edit from the list box.
All points in a selected segregation file will be included in the Alarm
Managers Alarm List.
3) Select the appropriate option (See Section D.1.)
3) Click .
The Edit Responses dialog box appears (Figure D-9).

Figure D-9. Edit Responses Dialog Box.


4) Select the Responses number.
The response appears in the text box.
5) Delete the Response by using the Backspace key.
6) Enter the new Response.
If the response is being deleted, leave the text field blank.
7) Click .
The response is changed or removed from the list.
8) Repeat steps 3 - 6 for each response being changed or deleted.
9) Click .
The Edit Responses dialog box closes.
10) Repeat steps 2 - 8 for each segregation file being edited.
11) Click .
The responses setup is saved

332
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix D: Alarm Manager

3 Respond with the Alarm Manager


1) Select Alarm Manager from the Commands menu.
The Alarm Manager dialog box appears (Figure D-10).

Figure D-10. Alarm Manager Dialog Box.


2) Select a point.
3) Click .
The Alarm Respond dialog box appears (Figure D-11).

Figure D-11. Alarm Respond Dialog Box.


4) If this is a new responder or if no responders have been assigned,
click . Otherwise skip to step 8.
The Edit Responder dialog box appears (Figure D-12).

Figure D-12. Edit Responder Dialog Box.

333
Appendix D: Alarm Manager UsersGuide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3 Respond with the Alarm Manager - continued


5) Enter the responders name in the text box.
6) Select the responders number and click .
The responders name appears in the list beside the selected number.
7) Click .
The Edit Responder dialog box closes.
8) Select the response.
9) If this is a new response or if no responses have been assigned, click
. Otherwise skip to step 13.
The Edit Responses dialog box appears (Figure D-13).

Figure D-13. Edit Responses Dialog Box.


10) Enter the response.
11) Select the responses number and click .
The response appears in the list beside the selected number.
12) Click .
The Edit Responses dialog box closes.
13) Select the response.
14) Click .
The Alarm Manager issues the response and the point is cleared from the
Alarm Manager dialog box.
15) Repeat steps 2 - 14 for each point.
16) Click .

334
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix D: Alarm Manager

4 Refresh the Alarm Manager


1) Select Alarm Manager from the Commands menu.
The Alarm Manager dialog box appears (Figure D-14).

Figure D-14. Alarm Manager Dialog Box.


2) Click .
The Alarm Manager updates to show all current alarms requiring a
response.
3) Click .

335
Appendix D: Alarm Manager UsersGuide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

336
Appendix E: ALFAPAGE

Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will tell you:
How to install ALFAPAGE
ALFAPAGE setup tips
How to view the Alarm Manager
How to install ChipChat to work with ALFAPAGE

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix E: ALFAPAGE Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Overview
ALPHAPAGE.EXE is a VREXX application written to support the ability
of UNITY to put its alarms on an OS/2 Queue. ALFAPAGE will intercept
the incoming alarms, compare them to a user defined point list, and will send
the alarm out to a remote printer, numeric pager, or optionally, a third party
program called ChipChat. ChipChat will then dial the modem access number
and send the appropriate alarm to the alphanumeric pager.
Some of the key features of ALFAPAGE are:
- A graphical setup menu.
- Support for a remote printer dial out.
- Support for a numeric pager (Does NOT require ChipChat).
- Support for an alphanumeric pager (Requires ChipChat).
- Support for multimedia.wav files for every alarm.
- Supports up to five sequential people for paging.

338
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix E: ALFAPAGE

2 Installation
1) Create a directory for ALFAPAGE under ..\UNITY called PAGER.
Change into the directory and run A:ALFA.EXE.
The distribution diskette contains a self-extracting file, ALFA.EXE.
Example:
C:\> CD UNITY
C:\UNITY> MD PAGER
C:\UNITY> CD PAGER
C:\UNITY\PAGER> A:ALFA.EXE

2) Copy the QALARM.MSF file to the ..\UNITY\UI\REXX directory.


Example: C:\UNITY\PAGER> copy qalarm.msf c:\unity\ui\rexx
3) Go to the ..\UNITY directory.
Example: C:\> CD UNITY
4) Edit the SYSTEM.CMD file to add the UI parameter Q to it.
Example: C:\UNITY>E SYSTEM.CMD
The following is an example of a SYSTEM.CMD file.
@echo off
if %1 == start goto start
if %1 == START goto start
detach SDRIVER
call rdelay 10
detach IRM
call rdelay 10
detach CAM SUBSYS03
call rdelay 5
detach D1000 SUBSYS01
call rdelay 5
detach EXCEL SUBSYS02
call rdelay 10
edit -> start User Interface /n UI Q
exit

:start

start SDRIVER /n SDRIVER


rem call rdelay 2
start IRM /n IRM
call rdelay 2
start CAM - SUBSYS03 /n CAM SUBSYS03
call rdelay 1
start D1000 - SUBSYS01 /n D1000 SUBSYS01
call rdelay 1
start EXCEL - SUBSYS02 /n EXCEL SUBSYS02
call rdelay 2
edit -> start User Interface /n UI Q
exit

339
Appendix E: ALFAPAGE Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2 Installation - continued
5) Save the newly edited file.
6) Create an icon for ALFAPAGE on your desktop.
The easiest way to do this is to:
a. Open up the command prompts folder
b. Drag the OS/2 Window icon onto the desktop with the right mouse
button while holding down the CTRL key.
c. Release the buttons.
d. Right click on the new OS/2 Window.
e. Open settings, and type in C:\UNITY\PAGER\ALFAPAGE.EXE as
the file name.
f. Click the general tab, and enter ALFAPAGE for the title.
g. Close the window
7) Shutdown UNITY.
8) Go to the ..\UNITY\PAGER directory and run ALFAPAGE.EXE.
The dialog box in Figure E-1 appears. By default, a blank pager.dat file will
be created automatically. This is normal.

Figure E-1. UNITY Alphanumeric Pager Utility Program Dialog Box.


9) Go to every menu under Setup and insure that your system is setup
correctly.
In Section 3 you will find some tips that may help.
10) In the File menu, select save, and save your settings as PAGER.DAT
in the PAGER directory. You can use a different file name to load
multiple configurations, but PAGER.DAT will load automatically
by default if it is in the PAGER directory.
The dialog box in Figure E-2 will appear.

340
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix E: ALFAPAGE

2 Installation - continued

Figure E-2. Save Configuration as: Dialog Box.


11) If you have not yet installed ChipChat, DO NOT ACTIVATE IT AT
THIS TIME! Otherwise, you may activate it at this time.
12) There are 3 ways to deactivate Alfapage:

Create a point in UNITY with the descriptor of EXITPAGER, and


then change the points status. When alfapage sees the descriptor, it will
deactivate automatically. This is useful as a TIP. You cannot, however,
reactivate it the same way since it will no longer be checking the OS/2 Queue
for alarms!
Type the following command from an OS/2 window:
C:\> echo EXIT | RXQUEUE UNITYALARMS
Note: The above line IS case sensitive!
Hit CTRL+ESC and close the window. This will exit the program
completely.

341
Appendix E: ALFAPAGE Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3 Setup Tips
3.1 Printer Tips

Figure E-3. Printer Setup Dialog Box.


a. The printer phone # must be the modem connected to the remote printer.
b. Line 1, 2 and 3 will ALWAYS print to the remote printer, if there is any data
in them.
c. Enabling the standard message to print will ALWAYS print the POINT,
DATE, and TIME on the printer.
d. Enabling Local printout, will print all matching alarms to a local printer on the
parallel port.
3.2 Modem

Figure E-4. Modem Setup Dialog Box.


a. The pager/printer modems com port can NOT be shared by UNITY.
b. The Baud, Parity, Data/Stop bits have no effect with this version.
c. To change the custom init string, select GENERIC modem as the type.
3.3 Pager

Figure E-5 Pager Setup Dialog Box.

342
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix E: ALFAPAGE

3.3 Pager - continued


a. The Phone: is the terminal access number. This can be obtained from
your paging service provider. They MUST match the number entered
in the ChipChat program!
b. The Pager ID: is the ID assigned by the paging service to your pager.
This can be the 7 digit phone number, or the PIN on the back of the
pager. Please check with your service provider.
c. Alfapage can dial out to up to 5 users. Check them as needed.
d. Check the Alpha-Numeric box ONLY if it is an alphanumeric pager.
A Numeric pager will not work with this checked.
3.4 Points

Figure E-6. Point Setup Dialog Box.


a. Line 1, 2, and 3 will print with the corresponding alarm match.
b. Points starting with letters are CASE SENSITIVE. Please use capital
letters when entering them.
c. You can only have 1 alarm condition per point.
3.5 Screen

Figure E-7. Screen Setup Dialog Box.


a. Hide Main screen, only applies if you are having the problem of the
alarm waiting window popping up over UNITY. This has been noted
to happen with certain video drivers under OS/2 2.11
b. MCI sound support should only be checked if you have the multi-
media extensions (MMOS2) installed, have a sound card, and have the
appropriate *.wav files.
3.6 ChipChat Installation Note
1) You MUST install ChipChat in the C:\CHPCHTWC directory!
2) Other than that, follow the installation instructions supplied with the
program.

343
Appendix E: ALFAPAGE Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

344
Appendix F: Comcall

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will discuss:
Comcall setup.
Comcall help.
Comcall activation.

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix F: Comcall Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Start Comcall
Comcall is an optional utility for UNITY. Installing UNITY will not auto-
matically install Comcall. The Comcall Dial-Out Pager lets UNITY page
emergency and maintenance personnel automatically when an alarm event
occurs on selected points. In addition, Comcall will send a predefined
message to a remote printer.

Comcall must be started from within an OS/2 window. To run Comcall go


to the UNITY\Pager directory then type COMCALL.
1) From the OS/2 desktop open an OS/2 window.
2) At the prompt type cd UNITY\Pager then press Enter.
You are switched to the UNITY\Pager directory.
3) Type COMCALL at the prompt then press Enter.
Comcall starts and the Comcall Version 1.0 dialog box appears (Figure F-
1).

Figure F-1. Comcall Version 1.0 Dialog Box.

346
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix F: Comcall

2 Set Up Comcall
2.1 Printer Setup
1) Select Printer from the Setup menu.
The Printer Setup dialog box appears (Figure 2-80).

Figure F-2. Printer Setup Dialog Box.


2) Enter the printers phone number in the Printer Phone Number box.
Include any special characters required for dial-out (e.g., 9 to access an
outside line, commas for delays, etc.)
3) Enter the message to send to the printer in the three line boxes.
Each line accommodates up to 50 characters, including spaces.
4) Select the Standard message enable check box.
5) Select the Printer callout enable check box.
6) Select the Enable local alarm printout check box.
7) Click to close the dialog box.
2.2 Modem Setup
1) Select Modem from the Setup menu.
The Modem Setup dialog box appears (Figure 2-81).

Figure F-3. Modem Setup Dialog Box.


2) Select your systems modem from the Modem Model/Type list.
If you cant find the particular modem connected to your system or if you
want to use a custom initialization string select Generic. Once you have
selected a modem, the initialization string for that modem will appear in
the Custom Modem Initialization String box. The initialization string tells
the modem how to configure itself.

347
Appendix F: Comcall Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.2 Modem Setup - continued


3) Make changes to the initialization string, if necessary.
The standard modem initialization string should work, but if you encoun-
ter problems, consult your modem manual or local telecom representative
before making any changes to the initialization string.
4) Set the parameters.
Port - This is the COM port connection for the modem.
Baud - This is the communication speed for your modem. Set this to the
highest speed your modem can handle. If you dont know the highest
baud rate check your modem manual.
Parity, Data Bits, and Stop Bits - For most modems these will be set to
None (Parity), 8 (Data Bits), and 1 (Stop Bits). If youre not sure this is
the right setting for your modem, check your modem manual. These
settings are frequently listed in manuals as N-8-1.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
2.3 Pager Setup
1) Select Pager from the Setup menu.
The Pager Setup dialog box appears (Figure 2-82).

Figure F-4. Pager Setup Dialog Box.


2) Enter the name of the first person to be paged into the Name box on line one.
3) Enter the phone number into the Phone box.
4) Optional. Enter a note (up to 10 characters) into the Notes box.
5) Repeat steps 1 - 4 for each person being paged.
6) Select the Contact check box for each person being paged.
Each check box corresponds to one of the lines set up in steps 2 - 5. A
will appear in the check box when it has been selected. This feature is used
when different people are on call at different times. If the first person in the
Pager Setup is carrying the pager on Monday, then only the Contact 1 check
box will be selected. As pager duty is rotated to the next person the next
Contact check box will be selected and the previous Contact check box will
be cleared.
7) If the pager callout is to be disabled, select the Disable Pager check
box.
A will appear in the check box when it has been selected.
This feature is usually used during regular work hours when it is not
necessary to have any personnel on call.
8) If the pager is a Alpha-Numeric pager, select the Alpha-Numeric
Pager check box.
A will appear in the check box when it has been selected.
9) Click to close the dialog box.

348
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix F: Comcall

2.4 Point Setup


Point Setup assigns a message to a specified point. The message is sent when
the point enters an alarm state.
1) Select Points from the Setup menu.
The Points Setup dialog box appears (Figure 2-83).

Figure F-5. Points Setup Dialog Box.


2) Enter the first line of the message in the Line 1 box.
3) Repeat step 2 for the line 2 and line 3 boxes, if necessary.
4) Select the point from the Point to Check for Alarm Status list.
5) Select the alarm event from the Status to Trip Alarm list.
6) Click to close the dialog box.
2.5 Screen Setup
1) Select Screen from the Setup menu.
The Screen Setup dialog box appears (Figure 2-84).

Figure F-6. Screen Setup Dialog Box.


2) Select the Hide Main Screen During Alarms check box to make the
screen invisible during alarms.
3) If your system has a sound card that is MCI compatible select the
MCI Sound Support check box.

CAUTION! Selecting MCI Sound Support when you do not


have a sound card installed will cause Comcall to
shutdown. You will then have to restart Comcall from
the OS/2 command prompt.

4) Click to close the dialog box.

349
Appendix F: Comcall Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2.6 Save the Settings


Once Comcall has been set up you will need to save the settings. To save the
current settings:
1) Select Save Settings from the File menu.
The Save Configuration As dialog box appears (Figure 2-85).

Figure F-7. Save Configuration as: Dialog Box.


2) Enter the filename for the settings file in the Save as Filename box.
The filename must end with the .DAT extension.
Note: Pager.DAT is the default setup file Comcall will search for upon startup.
3) Select the drive in which the file will be saved.
Drive C: is the default drive. If you want to save the file to drive C:, this
step can be skipped. Otherwise, select another drive from the drive list.
4) Select the directory in which the file will be saved.
C:\UNITY\Pager is the default directory. This is the directory Comcall
will search for its setup file. If another directory will be used, change the
settings to the desired directory.
5) Click to close the dialog box.
The file is saved to the selected directory.
2.7 Load Settings
Several settings files can be created using procedures found in sections 9.2.1
- 9.2.6 of this chapter. However, each file must have a different name, e.g.,
Pager1.DAT, Pager2.DAT, etc. To change the current settings file to a
different file use the following procedure:

1) Select Load Settings from the File menu.


The Load Settings From dialog box appears (Figure 2-86).

Figure F-8. Load Settings from: Dialog Box.


2) Select a file from the File list.
The file appears in the Open Filename box.
3) Click to close the dialog box.
The settings are changed to those in the selected file.

350
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix F: Comcall

3 View Log
View Log displays all of the messages that have appeared in the Messages of
Interest area.
1) Select the View Log item on the menu bar.
The View Log window appears (Figure 2-87).

Figure F-9. View Log Dialog Box.


2) Close the View Log window.
Click the menu arrow in the upper left corner then select Close from the
menu. Or, press the ALT and F4 keys at the same time. The View Log
window closes.

351
Appendix F: Comcall Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4 Comcall Help
Comcall has its own on-line help. This on-line help function lets you search
for information about specific functions of Comcall that you may have
trouble with. This lets you use Comcall without having to refer to the manual
all the time.
4.1 Help Search Method 1
1) Select Contents from the Help menu.
The Help window appears (Figure 2-88).

Figure F-10. Help Window.


2) Double-click on the subject you are interested in.
The subjects help text window appears (Figure 2-89).

Figure F-11. Subject Help Text Window (Example).


3) Click to return to the Help contents page.
4) If you would like information on another subject repeat steps 2 - 3.
5) Close the Help window by double-clicking the window menu arrow
in the upper left corner, or press the ALT and F4 keys at the same
time.

352
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix F: Comcall

4.2 Help Search Method 2


1) Select Contents from the Help menu.
The Help window appears (Figure 2-90).

Figure F-12. Help Window.


2) Click .
The Search window appears (Figure 2-91).

Figure F-13. Search Window.


3) Enter the word you want to find in the Search For box.
4) Select the radio button for the area you want to search.
Comcall supports Search for three possible areas. These areas are:
This section - Searches the open section in the current Help file.
All sections - Searches all sections in the current Help file.
All libraries - Searches all sections of all Help files in the system.
To avoid being overwhelmed by selections it is recommended that All
Libraries not be used to search for Comcall information.
5) Click .
If a match is found the searched word window appears (Figure 2-92).

Figure F-14. Searched Word Window.

353
Appendix F: Comcall Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.2 Help Search Method 2 - continued


6) Double-click on the section you want to view.
The selected Help section opens (Figure 2-93).

Figure 2-93. Selected Help Section (Example).


7) Click to return to the Help contents page.
8) If you would like information on another subject repeat steps 2 - 6.
9) Close the Help window by double-clicking the window menu arrow
in the upper left corner, or press the ALT and F4 keys at the same
time.
4.3 About Comcall
About Comcall is a brief description of the Comcall utility. To view About
Comcall:
1) Select About Comcall from the Help menu, or press the ALT and H
keys at the same time.
The About Comcall window appears (Figure 2-94).

Figure 2-94. About Comcall Window.


2) When you have finished viewing About Comcall, double-click the
window menu arrow in the upper left corner.

354
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix F: Comcall

5 Activate/Deactivate Comcall
5.1 Activate Comcall
Now that weve gotten through all the preliminaries, youre ready to run
Comcall. To start Comcall:
1) Click Activate Comcall! in the menu bar.
The Comcall Status Window appears (Figure 2-95). This means that
Comcall is up and running.

Figure 2-95. Comcall Status Window.


2) Hide Comcall by clicking the Hide box (the box with the small
square, located in the upper right corner of the main Comcall
window).
Comcall is no longer displayed on the screen.
5.2 Deactivate Comcall
To stop Comcall after it has been started:
1) Call up the Window List by pressing the Ctrl and ESC keys at the
same time.
The Window List window appears (Figure 2-96).

Figure 2-96. Window List Window.


2) Using the right mouse button click on Comcall.
The menu appears (Figure 2-97).

Figure 2-97. Window List Showing Menu.


3) Select Close from the menu.

355
Appendix F: Comcall Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

356
Appendix G: Hot
Backup

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will discuss:
How to install Hot Backup
Hot Backup setup tips
Watchdog board setup

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix G: Hot Backup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Overview
Hot Backup is a dual-purpose UNITY backup application. It is designed to
first be in a ready state if there were a primary system failure in order to
switch the system to a secondary IRM (Information Routing Manager)
without interrupting field data and system integrity. Secondly it is designed
to backup data files and all other critical setup data to the secondary IRM and
continuouslyupdatethebackupsubsystemswithlivedata.
1.1 Theory of Operation
In order to switch a hardware device such as a CPU or serial user, for instance,
from one IRM to another, or a software device such as a network UI, you need
a way of intelligently monitoring those system states from which you want to
switch on and when such a state occurs, allow the hardware and/or software
devices to switch.
The watchdog timer board allows you to switch hardware. When the IRM
comes up it will first check all system components. (i.e. subsys01, subsys02,
CPU 1, etc.) Once everything is UP the IRM will address the watchdog
timer board and set its timer, both of which will be determined by the
UNITYINI.EXE file. As long as there are no state changes in the system, the
IRM will continue to send a reset to the watchdog timer before it times out.
When a state change occurs, the IRM will stop resetting the watchdog timer
thus allowing the watchdog to fire, sending a contact closure to the automatic
switching system. This in turn will switch serial users and/or the CPUs to
the backup IRM.
The fail-safe Hot Backup system has at a minimum two IRM machines. A
primary IRM and a secondary IRM. These machines are networked in order
to share resources & backup files. The system can have multiple serial or
network users (UIs) and multiple CPUs. Any subsystem or user connection
on the primary IRM will be redundant on the secondary IRM. CPUs may or
may not be redundant. At any given time the network users and serial users
are connected to the master IRM. In this way all PC stations are connected
to live data. To switch network users or subsystems, the IRM has the ability
to drop its pipes either manually or by a system state change. Additionally,
the IRM can spawn a batch file if a state change occurs.
UNITY has the capability of switching itself on a CPU and/or subsystem
failure that is user-definable in the UNITYINI.EXE file. At the time of any
system change, whether it is field status, database edit or subsystem messages
or alarms, the secondary IRM(s) will be updated either immediately or by the
standards set up under each subsystem later in this document. If an IRM,
CPU, or subsystem failure on the primary side occurs, the system will switch
all users and CPUs to the secondary IRM. The secondary IRM will now be
the master IRM even if the primary IRM is brought back online. If the
secondary IRM is master, the primary IRM will only become the master when
a manual master reset is performed. Once the Primary IRM machine is
repaired and brought back up, the user will be able to manually initiate a IRM
Restore batch file which will:
1. Start the UI. This UI will connect to the secondary IRM.
2. Perform a datafile backup.
3. Copy datafiles from the secondary IRM backup directory to the
primary IRM UNITY Directory.
At this time the user will manually start UNITY on the Primary, tell the secondary IRM to
dropitspipes,thusmakingallnetworkusersconnecttotheprimaryIRM. Thesystemwill
now be in Standby Mode where the two continuous modes of operation previously
describedwillholdtrueonceagain.

358
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix G: Hot Backup

1.2 Software Requirements


The operating system will be OS/2 3.11 or better with LAN Server 4.0,
Novelle LAN server, or a peer to peer server, and UNITY Software must be
version 5.3 or above. The files listed below under definition of files must be
present. The operating system must be installed on the PCs. DigiBoards, and
other hardware must be installed in the PCs. Then, UNITY must be installed
on the PCs before Hot Backup may be setup.
Note: Systems with a NexSys subsystem require OS/2 WARP 4.0.
1.3 Hardware Requirements
1. Two Intel Pentium 90 or better with network cards, video cards, sound
cards, and at least 64Mb RAM.
2. Two eight-port DigiBoards.
3. Watchdog timer board installed in the primary PC.
4. A device to physically switch users or CPUs such as the black box
automatic switching system.
5. Switcher cards (Black box A/B cards), as needed for the number of
subsystems.
6. A gang switching cable to carry the contact closure from the watchdog
timer board to the switching device.
1.4 Definition and Location of Files
Note: * Designates Required File or Setting for Hot Backup.
*1)IRMLST.DAT-ThisfilecontainsalistofallIRMsincludedintheHotBackupsystem.
This allows the IRMs to communicate with each other.
Location: C:\UNITY\IRM directory
*2) PIPE.DAT - This file contains connection data so the Users can connect to the
IRM. This connection data is in the form of a path with one initial backslash \ for
the local pipe and two backslashes '\\' for the remote pipe.
Location: C:\UNITY\UI\SYSTEM directory of each User
*3) VROBJ.DLL - This library file is responsible for VXREXX code.
Location: C:\UNITY directory
*4) UNITYINI.EXE - The IRM uses this executable file to set up the
Watchdog timer and State Change parameters for the system.
Location: C:\UNITY directory
5) IRMCMD.EXE - When it has been selected in the UNITY.INI file, this
file is run by the IRM on start up and it initiates STATECHG.CMD whenever
a change in the system occurs.
Location: C:\UNITY directory
6) STATECHG.CMD - When it has been selected in the UNITY.INI file,
this REXX script file is run by the IRMCMD.EXE file in order to receive
state changes and take action in the form of a REXX command line.
Location: C:\UNITY\IRM directory
Note: The STATECHG.CMD may have a custom setup for system state changes from
any subsystem, any CPU, the IRM, backup IRMs, or users.
7) SETPIPES.EXE - The executable used to designate the MIRM and
BIRM. This program will create and modify the IRMLIST.DAT and modify
the PIPE.DAT, as necessary.
Location: C:\UNITY directory.

359
Appendix G: Hot Backup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

2 Watchdog Timer Board Setup


2.1 Timer Reset Input
Set timer reset jumper to CODE. Setting the jumper to CODE will allow
the IRM to access the board and reset the timer. Setting the jumper to
EXTERNAL will allow an external serial device to reset the timer.
2.2 CPU Reset Output
Set CPU reset output to OFF. Setting the jumper to OFF will NOT reset
the PC when the watchdog fires. Setting the jumper to ON will reset the
PC when the watchdog fires.

2.3 External Device Reset


Set external device reset to ON. Setting the jumper to ON will send a
contact closure to an external device. (i.e. an Automatic Switching System by
Black Box.) Setting the jumper to OFF will NOT send a contact closure to
an external device.
2.4 Switch Pack S1
The Watchdog Timer Board is pictured in Figure 20. Set the I/O Address
according to the Table 2. The switch box connects to the Watchdog Timer
board via the DB-25 COM port shown on the bottom right side of the board.
Normally, the address is set to 310. If you have conflicts on startup, set it to
318. When the setup on the board is correct, install the board in an ISA slot
in the primary PC.
Note 1: Switches represent a 0 in the ON position and a 1 in the OFF position.
Note 2: MSB refers to Most Significant Bit, and LSB refers to Least Significant Bit.

Hex Address Switch Settings


MSB LSB
200 1000000
208 1000001
300 1100000
308 1100001
310 1100010
318 1100011
380 1110000
388 1110001
3A0 1110100
3A8 1110101
Table 1. Watchdog Timer Switch
Settings.

Figure 1. Watchdog Timer Board.

360
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix G: Hot Backup

3 Switch Box Setup


This device will physically switch users or CPUs manually or automatically
when the primary PC goes offline. Refer to Figure 2 when setting up the
switch box. To setup the black box:
1) Install the Black Box Switcher Card cage in the rack mount enclo-
sure.
2) Install the Power Supply/Sys Gang card in the left slot as you are
looking at the card cage from the back.
3) Install the Switching A/B cards in the slots directly to the right of
the Power supply card.
4) Connect the power cord to the Power Supply card and 115V outlet.
5) On the Primary PC, connect the ESUSA supplied cable from the 25
Pin connector on the Watchdog Timer Board to the Gang In RJ45
conector on the Power Supply card in the Black Box Switcher Card
Cage.
6) Connect the Serial Ports on the DigiBoards to the Switching A/B
cards (on the A side of the card) in the Black Box Switcher Card
Cage.
7) On the Secondary PC, connect the Serial Ports on the DigiBoards
to the Switching A/B cards (on the B side of the card) in the Black
Box Switcher Card Cage.
8) On the Black Box Switcher Card Cage connect the communication
line coming from the subsytems to the Switching A/B cards (The
middle 25 Pin Connector) in the Black Box Switcher Card Cage.
9) Repeat step 8 for all subsystems in the system.
Note: The connection for each subsystem will vary. Refer to Table 2 for more
information.
Watchdog Timer Board in Primary
PC Slot to Gang IN Port of Power
Supply/Control Card in Black Box
Mouse cable to mouse port Card Cage
on rear of Primary PC *Unsupervised
*Unsupervised
Primary PC Color Monitor video cable to
DB-15 port on the rear of the
Keyboard cable to keyboard port Primary PC
on the rear of the Primary PC *Unsupervised
*Unsupervised

Primary PC COM port


to A port
(Power limited wiring)

Primary PC 120 VAC power cable to


surge suppressor UL210BC Color Monitor video cable to
DB-15 port on the rear of the
Power cable from transformer in surge Backup PC
suppressor to Power Supply/Control *Unsupervised
Card located in the Black Box Card
Cage
Backup PC
Out to field
(Power limited wiring)
Backup PC COM port
to B port
(Power limited wiring)

Mouse cable to mouse Keyboard cable to keyboard port


Backup PC to 120 VAC at surge port on rear of Backup on rear of Backup PC
suppressor PC *Unsupervised
*Unsupervised

Figure 2. Hot Backup Wiring Diagram.

361
Appendix G: Hot Backup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3 Switch Box Setup - continued


Subsystem Connection to DigiBoard
Delta 1000 Cable connection from ESUSA CPU Board set to Switch Box
Delta 2000 Cable connection from ESUSA CPU Board set to Switch Box
Trane Port 2 to DigiBoard via assembled cable connection
EST CM1N to DigiBoard via assembled cable connection
CSI Trunk/field to DigiBoard through a TAP
Excel Classic Field to Non Intelligent DigiBoard or motherboard COM port
through RS485 to RS232 converter
Excel Plus Bus to DigiBoard via an ESUSA XLP Interface
JC8500 Trunk to Non Intelligent DigiBoard or motherboard COM port
through an ESUSA Unity modem
Powers Trunk to DigiBoard through a Landis and Staefa Interface
RS485 to RS232 converter
5600 Channel to DigiBoard through a B&B Electronics (485TBLED)
RS485 to RS232Converter
NexSys NWS on IRM PC. NWS on separate PC uses a PCLTA to
interface with Echelon LON. If tied to a LAN, an Echelon
LAN adapter required.
Metasys NCM to DigiBoard via RS232 cable
UI Remote PC to DigiBoard via assembled cable connection
Table 2. Subsystem Connections to the Hot Backup System Switch Box.
Note: Refer to the UNITY Subsystem manuals for cable pinout connections.

362
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix G: Hot Backup

4 Hot Backup Setup


OS/2 and UNITY must be installed on all system PCs before Hot Backup
may be set up. When installing your UNITY systems, you may name the
primary IRM PC MIRM and name the secondary IRM PC BIRM. The
names you set up for the IRM PCs MUST match the LAN computer names.
To set up the Hot Backup:
1) Open an OS/2 window, go to the ..\UNITY directory, and run the
UNITYINI.EXE file.
Example: [C:\>] CD UNITY
[C:\>UNITY] UNITYINI
2) Make changes to the menu settings according to Table 3.
See 4.1 for more information on the UNITYINI file.
3) Run the SETPIPES.EXE file to select the IRM configuration you
need, and create the PIPE.DAT and IRMLIST.DAT.
See 4.2 for information on running SETPIPES.EXE.
4) Shutdown UNITY, shutdown the PC normally, and reboot the PC.
5) Repeat the procedure on the Secondary PC.
# UNITYINI.EXE MENU Setting Description
1 EMS Startup Delay (Minutes) 3 = Small systems How long will the IRM wait before starting
5 = Large systems Calc Points.
2 Subsystem Down Delay (Seconds) Set to 40 How long will a subsystem be down before
the IRM starts to timeout.
3 CPU Down Delay (Seconds) Set to 40 How long will the CPU be down before the
IRM starts to timeout.
4 Hot Backup Set to YES Does the system have Hot Backup?
5 IRM Index Set to 0 for Primary IRM
Set to 1 for Secondary IRM
6 Exit On Subsys Down Set to NO, unless system has IRM Exit on loss of any subsystem.
a remote IRM
7 Exit On CPU Down Set to NO, unless system IRM Exit on loss of any CPU.
has a remote IRM
8 Number of Calc Saves Per Min Set to 10 for Small to Medium How many Calc Groups to be saved each
Systems minute. Warning! Large systems can be
profoundly affected if this number is set
too high!
9 Change State REXX Set to NO, unless running Run a REXX script when there is a state
STATECHG.CMD change.
10 Pipe Test Set to NO For in house testing purposes only.
11 Num Pipes Set to 0 Number of Network Pipes to open for pipe
test.
12 Server PC NO ENTRY The name of the PC to start the pipe test.
13 Watchdog Set to YES for Primary IRM Is there a Watchdog timer board installed?
Set to NO for Secondary IRM
14 Board Address Set to 300, 310, 318, or 380 The Watchdog boards HEX address.
for the Primary IRM. Software
setting must match Watchdog
board dip switch settings. Set
to Blank for the Secondary
IRM
15 Time Out Set to 17.2 for Primary IRM Watchdog boards time-out period.
Set to Blank for Secondary
IRM
16 Timeout On Subsys Down Set to NO, unless system Watchdog timer times out, initiates a contact
has a remote IRM closure tothe switching box, if any
subsystem goes down.
17 Timeout On CPU Down Set to NO, unless system Watchdog timer times out, initiates a contact
has a remote IRM closure tothe switching box, if either CPU
goes down.

Table 3. Menu Settings Chart.


363
Appendix G: Hot Backup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.1 UNITYINI.EXE*
From an OS/2 window go to the UNITY directory and type UNITYINI and
press <ENTER> to run the UNITYINI.EXE file. This allows you to setup the
following initialization parameters:
IRM Parameters Only:
a) EMS Startup Delay (min)(How long will the IRM wait till it starts Calc
Points?) See Figure 3.
b) Subsys Down Delay (sec)(How long will a subsys be down before you
alert the IRM?) See Figure 4.
c) CPU Down Delay (sec)(How long will CPU be down before you alert
the IRM?) See Figure 5.
d) Hot Backup (Does this system have Hot Backup?) See Figure 6.
IRM Index (Primary IRM is 0 , Secondary IRM is 1) See Figure 7.
Exit on subsys down (IRM Exit on loss of any subsystem?) See
Figure 8.
Exit on CPU down (IRM Exit on loss of any CPU?) See Figure 9.
e) Number Of Calc Saves Per Min (How Many Calc Groups to be saved
per Min?) See Figure 10.

CAUTION! On larger systems this parameter can have a profound effect on


system performance!

f) Change State REXX (Run REXX Script when there is a state change?)
See Figure 11.
Note: For additional software control set Change State REXX to YES. You must
also edit STATECHG.CMD to run a REXX command line.
g) Pipe Test (For in house testing purposes only.) See Figure 12.
Note: Leave this set to NO at all times.
Num Pipes (Number of Network Pipes to open for pipe test.) See
Figure 13.
Server PC (The name of the server PC to start the pipe test.) See
Figure 14.
h) Watchdog (WD timer board installed?) See Figure 15.
Board Address ( What is the board address?) See Figure 16.
Time-out (WD Timer Time-out Period.) See Figure 17.
Timeout On Subsystem Down See Figure 16.
Timeout on CPU Down (Switch on loss of any CPU?) See Figure 18.
Note: When Watchdog is set to Yes, the IRM will stop bumping the watchdog board
(after the Subsys Down Delay interval) on Subsys Down automatically thus
causing the watchdog to fire. If Check CPUs is set to Yes, the same holds true
for CPU Down.

364
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix G: Hot Backup

4.1 UNITYINI.EXE* - continued

Figure 3. EMS Startup Delay - Figure 4. Subsys Down Delay - Set to 40.
Set to 3 for small systems, 5 for large.

Figure 5. CPU Down Delay - Set to 40. *Figure 6. Watchdog - Set to Yes.

*Figure 7. IRM Index - Set to 0 for Primary Figure 8. Exit On Subsys Down - Set to No, unless the
IRM and 1 for Secondary IRM. system has a remote IRM.

365
Appendix G: Hot Backup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.1 UNITYINI.EXE* - continued

Figure 9. Exit On CPU Down - Set to No, unless Figure 10. Number Of Calc Saves Per Min -
system has a remote IRM. Set to 10 Small to Medium Systems.

Figure 11. Change State REXX - Set to No, unless Figure 12. Pipe Test - Set to No.
you wish to run STATECHG.CMD.

Figure 13. Num Pipes - Set to 0. Figure 14. Server PC - NO ENTRY.

366
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix G: Hot Backup

4.1 UNITYINI.EXE* - continued

Figure 15. Watchdog - Set to Yes. Figure 16. Board Address - Set to 300, 310, 318, or 380
on the Primary, and Blank on the Secondary. The
software setting must match the dip switch settings on
the Watchdog board.

Figure 17. Time Out - Set to 17 sec. for Primary. Figure 18. Timeout on Subsys Down - Set to No, unless
Set to Blank for Secondary. system has a remote IRM.

Figure 19. Timeout on CPU Down - Set to No,


unless system has a remote IRM.
Note: For additional software control see CPU State Change
in Fig. 11 Change State REXX setting and choose
YES as the value. You must also edit
STATECHG.CMD to run a REXX command line.

367
Appendix G: Hot Backup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

4.2 SETPIPES.EXE
It is required that you run SETPIPES.EXE to select the IRM configuration
you need and to create and modify the IRMLIST.DAT and the PIPE.DAT.
However, for troubleshooting purposes you may view these files using
TDUMP. SETPIPES.EXE is not shipped with UNITY; it comes on a
separate disk. Before you run SETPIPES, you must insert the SETPIPES
diskette into the A: drive and copy the file into the ..\UNITY directory.
Note: The current UNITY installation program does not allow you to create a
PIPE.DAT file containing primary and backup pipes in order for a user to
connect to the primary and backup IRMs. It is possible that this procedure will
be carried out in the standard installation program in the near future. Use the
SETPIPES.EXE to modify the PIPE.DAT file.
1) Open an OS/2 window, go to the ..\UNITY directory, and run the
SETPIPES.EXE program.
The Hot Backup Setup dialog box will appear. See Figure 20.
Example: [C:\>] CD UNITY
[C:\UNITY>] SETPIPES

Figure 20. Hot Backup Setup Dialog Box.


2) Select the Primary IRM, Secondary IRM, and the PC you are
currently using.
In the example system, the primary IRM is MIRM, and the secondary IRM
is BIRM. However, these names must correspond with the network names
for your system.
3) Select a Hot Backup configuration using the radio buttons and click
.
The PIPE.DAT has been created.
4) Click .
The IRMLIST.DAT Creation Menu Dialog Box will appear. See Figure
21.

368
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix G: Hot Backup

4.2 SETPIPES.EXE - continued

Figure 21. IRMLIST.DAT Creation Menu Dialog Box.


5) Hold down the Ctrl key and select all the PCs in the system which
have IRMs installed. Click .

6) Click to return to the Hot Backup Setup screen.

7) Click to determine which PC(s) have an IRM running.

8) When finished, click .


9) Repeat this procedure on the Secondary IRM.
Note: This procedure must be completed on all PCs in the UNITY System, regardless
of whether they are serial or network PCs.
4.3 STATECHG.CMD
Use the OS/2 E editor to edit the STATECHG.CMD file. This program will
run whenever a state change occurs if Change State REXX is set to YES in
the UNITYINI Editor.
For example, Killem IRM.EXE will take down the IRM so as to cause the
system to switch to a backup IRM and network UIs to connect to the backup
IRM. An example program is shown below:
/* */
arg Who Subsys State
if (Who = SUBSYS) then do
if (Subsys = SUBSYS01) then do
if (State = DOWN) then do
killem irm.exe
end
else if (State = UP) then do
end
end
if (Subsys = SUBSYS02) then do
if (State = DOWN) then do
killem irm.exe
end
else if (State = UP) then do
end
end
end
exit
The IRM Exit is performed inside of the IRM.

369
Appendix G: Hot Backup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5 Hot Backup Status


5.1 View the Hot Backup Status
To view the status of the primary and secondary machines, select Backup
Status from the UNITY Misc. menu shown at the left. The Backup Status
window will display. See Figure 22. The PC column shows the designation
of the PC, primary or secondary. The name is the IRM name. The status tells
whether or not the IRM is operational. Master indicates which IRM is
running the system. And the Connected column in the dialog box below
indicates the PC is connected with its own IRM, not another IRM. To close
the window click .

Figure 22. Backup Status Window.


5.2 Reset the Masters
To switch to the Hot Backup, you must reset the masters. To do so:
1) Open the Backup Status window. See Section 5.1. Click
.
A warning message will appear. See Figure 23.

Figure 23. Warning Message Box.


2) Click to continue.
You will see the status of the IRMs change in the Backup Status window,
and you will hear the Switch Box change to the B side. The system will
initialize. (Init). See Figure 24. Then the status of the IRMs will display,
and the secondary IRM will be listed as the master. See Figure 25.

370
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix G: Hot Backup

5.2 Reset the Masters - continued


In the upper right corner of the UI screen on the Primary and Secondary PCs,
the message Backup Down will display. If you press CTRL-ESC on the
Primary PC to bring up the window list, you can open the IRM window.
Double click on IRM to restart it. The users and subsystems should connect
to the IRM. The Secondary PC is the controlling IRM, but this will bring the
Primary IRM back on line. The Backup Status window will look similar to
Figure 26.

Figure 24. Backup Status Window Initializing the IRM.

Figure 25. Backup Status Window with the Secondary IRM as Master.
Note: You may return control to the Primary PC. If the Backup Status Window on
the Secondary PC looks like Figure 24, then you may click .
When the warning box appears, click . You will not hear the Switch
Box change to the A side. The Backup Status window will look like Figure
24. A few seconds later the window will look like Figure 23 again. To change
the Switch Box back to the A side, move the Gang switch on the front of the
Black Box to A. You will then hear the Swith Box switch to A. If you like,
you may bring up the IRM window from the Window List and watch the users
and subsystems connect to the Primary IRM which will now be the controlling
IRM.

371
Appendix G: Hot Backup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5.2 Reset the Masters - continued

Figure 26. Backup Status Window with the Secondary IRM as Master, but the
Primary is back online.
Note: When a primary PC comes back online, it will connect with the primary IRM,
not the secondary IRM. It will then be the only UI in the system not connected
with the secondary IRM. In this instance only, the Backup Status window will
display Yes twice in the Connected column. See Figure 26.
If you must shutdown UNITY and stop the IRM, the Hot Backup IRM will
take over. To return control to the Primary IRM, you must restart UNITY,
move the Gang switch on the front of the Black Box back to the A side and
click on the Backup Status window. If the Primary IRM goes
down, however, be sure to find the source of the problem before placing the
Primary IRM in control again.

372
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix G: Hot Backup

6 Normal Startup with HotBackup


1) On the Primary PC, open an OS/2 command window and change
into the ..\UNITY directory.
2) Type UNITY to start in detached mode or UNITY START to start in
start mode and press <Enter>.
Normally, you will start in detached mode. Start mode is used for
troubleshooting.
3) Press CTRL-ESC to open the Window List for the IRM.
4) Double click on IRM to start the IRM.
I am the main PC will appear on the screen. The users and subsystems
will connect with the IRM. A WD will flash in the upper right hand
portion of the screen to let you know that the Watchdog Board is
communicating, indicating that its address is correct.
5) On the Secondary PC, open an OS/2 command window and change
into the ..\UNITY directory.
6) Type UNITY to start in detached mode or UNITY START to start in
start mode and press <Enter>.
7) Press CTRL-ESC to open the Window List for the IRM.
8) Double click on IRM to start the IRM.
I am the backup PC will appear in the screen. The users and subsystems
do not connect to this IRM. They are already connected to the Primary
IRM. The WD flashing does not exist on this machine because a
watchdog board was not installed in this PC.

373
Appendix G: Hot Backup Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

374
Appendix H: Backtrace

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will define:
How to add Backtrace to your SYSTEM.CMD file

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix H: Backtrace Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Backtrace Overview
Backtrace prints a tree path for a point in the Alarm window of the main UI
screen, Point Command dialog box, the Point Status dialog box, the Ac-
knowledge Alarm window, and on alarm or log printouts. See the example
Point Command dialog box in Figure H-1. The tree path shows where the
point is located on the logical tree. If you have multiple points with the same
name (for example, Space Temperature), this is beneficial. However, if you
have a single point located in several spots on the logical tree, only one of the
tree paths will be displayed. To add Backtrace to your UNITY system, you
must edit the SYSTEM.CMD file.

CAUTION! Use extreme caution. Editing the SYSTEM.CMD


file can seriously affect the proper operation of UNI-
TY, and possibly cause the system to malfunction.
You must follow these directions carefully.

Tree Path

Figure H-1. Point Command Dialog Box with Tree Path.


1.1 Add Backtrace to UNITY
1) Shut down the entire UNITY system.
2) Open an OS/2 command window.
3) At the command prompt, change into the directory where UNITY
is stored. For example, type [C:\]CD UNITY.
4) To edit the SYSTEM.CMD file you must use a text editor. For
example, type [C:\UNITY\]E SYSTEM.CMD.
The SYSTEM.CMD file will display on screen.
5) Locate the two lines which read START User Interface /N UI, and
add the command line parameter A at the end of each line.
Once edited, the lines should read START User Interface /N UI A. See
the sample SYSTEM.CMD file in Figure H-2. Be sure you add the
command line parameter to both START User Interface /N UI lines in
the SYSTEM.CMD file.

376
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix H: Backtrace

1.1 Add Backtrace to UNITY - continued

Figure H-2. Sample SYSTEM.CMD File with the Backtrace Parameter


Added.
Note: Since each UNITY system is unique, your SYSTEM.CMD file will not
look exactly like the example. However, the START User Interface
/N will be in all SYSTEM.CMD files.
6) Choose Save from the File menu and close the window.
7) Restart UNITY.

377
Appendix H: Backtrace Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

378
Appendix I: Cable Guide

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will discuss:
Subsystem Installation Cable Hookups

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix I: Cable Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 5600
The 5600 subsystem connects with UNITY via a straight cable, pin for pin, to an
RS-232 to RS-485 converter in the send-data mode.
Unity IRM - 9 pin F B&B 25 pin M Unity IRM - 25 pin F B&B 25 pin M
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9

Figure I-1. Cable Pinouts for Connecting 5600 and UNITY.


twisted pair
B&B Electronics Shield
485 TBLED TDA
TDB
RDA
RDB
Grnd
540
25 pin 12VDC

On board jumpers Echo - off


Control - SD

Figure I-2. 5600 connects with UNITY using an RS-232 to RS-485 converter.

380 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix I: Cable Guide

2 CSI
UNITY interfaces with the I/NET system as if it were a host on the I/NET
system. The UNITY IRM (or LAN-connected user PC) must be connected to a
host Tap (direct or dial) by a serial port. Typically, this connection comes from one
of the digiboard connections on the IRM PC. See the I/NET manual for host Tap
set up. Other than standard I/NET set up of the host Tap, a cable between the
UNITY serial port and the host Tap is UNITYs only requirement. See Figure I-
3, a cable pin out diagram.

Unity IRM - 9 pin F TAP 25 pin M Unity IRM - 25 pin F TAP 25 pin M
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9

CSI PC* - 9 pin CSI Field - 9 pin


1 1
*This PC is not running Unity.
2 2 It is connected with the field
directly, running I/NET.
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9

Figure I-3. Cable Pinouts for Connecting CSI with UNITY and the field.

* Host Tap
78010, 78012,
78013, 78015,
78016, or 7804

7700
DCU

Figure I-4. CSI connect with UNITY through a CSI Tap.

2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 381


Appendix I: Cable Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

3 Delta 1000
The pinouts of the serial data cables are consistent with standard PC formats. The
pinouts and signal names of the two most popular cables appear below.

Unity IRM D1000 CPU Unity IRM D1000 CPU


25 pin F 9 pin F 9 pin F 9 pin F
1 shield 1 1 shield 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8

Figure I-5. PS/2 Cable Connections for Delta 1000.


D1000 CPU - Slot 18
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 or 9 pin

9 pin

Figure I-6. Delta 1000 connects with UNITY via ribbon cable.

382 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix I: Cable Guide

4 Delta 2000
The pinouts of the serial data cables are consistent with standard PC formats. The
pinouts and signal names for the most popular cable appears below.

Unity IRM 25 pin F CPU 25 pin M Unity IRM 9 pin F CPU 25 pin M
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
7 7 5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8

Figure I-7. Cable Pinouts for Delta 2000.


D2000 CPU

RPP
Card
Cage

DB-25 to DB-25 ribbon cable


25 or 9 pin

MB-I
Card
Cage

25 pin
POWER
ON

H N G

Figure I-8. Delta 2000 connects with UNITY via ribbon cable.

2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 383


Appendix I: Cable Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

5 EST
Hardware connections for the EST subsystem are displayed schematically below.
Unity IRM - 9 pin F CM1N Unity IRM - 25 pin F CM1N
1 1
2 TB1-4 2 TB1-3
3 TB1-3 3 TB1-4
4 4
5 TB1-2 5
6 6
7 7 TB1-2
8 8
20

Figure I-9. UNITY to EST Hardware Connections.

CM1N Controller Module


25 or 9 pin

Terminal Block 1

Control Module

Figure I-10. EST connects with UNITY via ribbon cable.


FCCD UNITY IRM - 9 pin FCCD UNITY IRM - 25 pin
A Tx 1 A Tx 1
Rx 2 Rx 2
T/R 3 T/R 3
Com 4 Com 4
B Tx 5 B Tx 5
Rx 6 Rx 6
T/R 7 T/R 7
Com 8 Com 8
20

Figure I-11. Pinouts for connecting the EST FCCD Panel with UNITY.
Note: The LEDs on the DCPU board will not toggle until UNITY is online.
FCCD Panel
PCPU
(Polling Computer)

DCPU 25 or 9 pin
(Display Computer)
RS-485 RS-232*

FCCD
Display Set UNITY for 1200 baud, 8 data
bits, even parity, and one stop bit.

*From the EST softare, set this for 1200 baud,


and set to COM port type RS-232 Class: B.

Figure I-12. UNITY connects with EST FCCD Panel.

384 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix I: Cable Guide

6 EST3
6.1 Standard
Hardware connections for the EST-3 subsystem are displayed schematically
below.
Unity IRM EST-3 CPU Unity IRM EST-3 CPU
(9 pin F) (port 1) (9 pin F) (port 2)
1 1
2 TB2-7 2 TB2-3
3 TB2-8 3 TB2-4
4 4
5 TB2-5 5 TB2-1
6 6
7 7
8 8

Unity IRM EST-3 CPU Unity IRM EST-3 CPU


(25 pin F) (port 1) (25 pin F) (port 2)
1 1
2 TB2-8 2 TB2-4
3 TB2-7 3 TB2-3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 TB2-5 7 TB2-1
8 8
20 20
*In the SDU program, set auxilliary port 1 or 2 for Gateway II and 19200 bps.

Figure I-13. UNITY to EST3 hardware Connections.

EST-3

PS-4A
RS 232

CM1N

CM2N
COM1

COM2

TB2
RX1

RX2
TX1

TX2

20..........8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

*Connect with TB2 on the 3-CPU Module

Figure I-14. EST3 Connects with UNITY via an RS-232 Ribbon Cable.

2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 385


Appendix I: Cable Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

6.2 EST3 With Leased LineModems


Hardware connections for the EST3 subsystem using leased line modems are
displayed schematically below.
LL Modem Dry Block
Unity IRM LL Modem (RJ-45) (4 wires)
(9 pin F) (25 pin F) Orange
Supplied
1 2 with Blue
2 3 LL Modem Brown
3 4 Grey
4 5 Dry Block Dry Block
6 (IRM Side) (EST-3 Side)
5
7 T1 Brown Orange T
6
8 R1 Grey Blue R
7
20 T Orange Brown T1
8
R Blue Grey R1
Unity IRM LL Modem LL Modem EST-3 CPU
(25 pin F) (25 pin F) (25 pin M) (Port 2 shown)
1 1 1 TB2-1 COM2
2 2 2 TB2-2
3 3 3 TB2-3 TX2
4 4 4 TB2-4 RX2
5 5 5 TB2-5 COM1
6 6 6 TB2-6
7 7 7 TB2-7 TX1
8 8 8 TB2-8 RX1
20 20 9
20
22
*In the SDU program, set auxilliary port 1 or 2 for Gateway II and 19200 bps.

Figure I-15. EST3 Connections When Using Leased Line Modems.


2 dry pair or
Standard 25 pin RS-232 cable, 2 designated
using 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 20 leased phone lines 4-Wire to RJ-45
Leased Line Cable
Black Box (supplied w/modem)
Leased Line
Modem T1 Brown Orange T
Black Box
R1 Grey Blue R
V.34 19200 YES NO TALK/DATA

ONLINE
T Orange Brown T1
108 106 105 109 104 103

TR CS RS CD RD TD

MODEM 3600

R Blue Grey R1

RJ-45 to 4-Wire
Leased Line Cable
(supplied w/modem)
*3-wire to TB2 EST-3
on the 3-CPU Module

Black Box
Leased Line PS-4A
Modem
Black Box

V.34 19200 YES NO TALK/DATA

ONLINE 108 106 105 109 104 103

TR CS RS CD RD TD

CM1N
MODEM 3600
COM1

COM2

TB2
RX1

RX2
TX1

TX2

CM2N

20..........8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure I-16. EST3 connects with UNITY via Leased Line Modems.

386 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix I: Cable Guide

7 Excel Classic
The following schematics show the cable pinouts for connecting Excel Classic
with UNITY. You may not use an intelligent digiboard with Excel Classic. If a
non-intelligent digiboard is used, you will need the 25 pin connection. If you use
a PC COM port, the nine pin connection is used. See Figure I-4.

Unity IRM25 pin F converter db25 25F Unity IRM - 9 pin F TAP -25 pin M
2 2 1 1
3 3 2 2
4 4 3 3
5 5 4 4
6 6 5 5
7 7 6 6
8 8 7 7
20 20 8 8
20

Figure I-17. Cable Pinout Connections for Excel.

25 or 9 pin

ATEN IC485S/IC485SI
RS-232 to RS-485
Converter 25 pin
to the S-Bus 1---T+
+ and - 2---T- Switches in the
3---R- DCE and
T-RTS/R-RTS
4---R+ positions

Figure I-18. SBus to RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Connection.

2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 387


Appendix I: Cable Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

8 Excel Plus
See Figure I-19for the cable pinouts to connect the Excel Plus panels to UNITY.
Unity IRM - 9 pin F Excel Plus 9 pin F Unity IRM - 25 pin F Excel Plus 9 pin F
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
20

Figure I-19. Cable Pinouts for Connecting UNITY with Excel Plus.

25 or 9 pin

ESUSA XLP Excel


Interface Plus
9 pin Twisted pair Field
S Bus

Figure I-20. Excel Plus connects with UNITY through an Excel Plus interface.

388 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix I: Cable Guide

9 Johnson Controls 85
Johnson Controls 85 communicates with UNITY via a table top modem. Connec-
tions are shown below. You may not use an intelligent digiboard with Johnson
Controls 85. If a non-intelligent digiboard is used, you will need the 25 pin
connection. If you use a PC COM port, the nine pin connection is used. See Figure
I-14.
Unity IRM - 25 pin F TTM db 9 F Unity IRM - 9 pin F TTM - db 9 F
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
20 9 9

Figure I-21. Johnson Controls 85 Connections with UNITY.


DSC-8500 or other field panel

ESUSA
Johnson DSC-8500
25 or 9 pin 9 pin Digital System Controller
Interface
Modem

Johnson
Twisted Pair (Shielded) Controls

Figure I-22. Johnson Controls connects with UNITY through the Johnson
Interface Modem.

2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 389


Appendix I: Cable Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

10 Powers
Use the cable pinout diagrams below for connecting the UNITY IRM with the
Powers PII Interface Trunk.
Unity IRM - 9 pin F PMD - 25 pin M Unity IRM - 25 pin F PMD 25 pin M
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9

Figure I-23. Cable Pinout Connections for Landis and Steafa Powers.

MBC or other
field hardware

25 or 9 pin 25 pin Powers PII


Interface Trunk

RS -232 Landis & Staefa


Trunk Interface II
Power DX TX RX

Twisted Pair (Shielded)

Figure I-24. UNITY connect with Powers through a PMD Interface.

390 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix I: Cable Guide

11 Metasys
11.1 Standard
The NCUs are connected daisy chain fashion within an ARCNET network.
UNITY is connected to a NCM via an RS-232 serial port, not the ARCNET. Each
NCM has one N2 Bus, an RS-485 protocol network, to link it to controllers and
point interfaces. This N2 Bus is a daisy chain configuration which supports off-
line and on-line polling, and general communications.
By default UNITY will look for a connection to the NCM with address 1. If you
wish to use an NCM with a different address to connect with UNITY, you must
specify the address using the HA command line parameter when you start thye
subsystem. You must start Metasys with a command line similar to START
METASYS SUBSYSXX HA=YY. The subsystem number is XX, and the NCM
address for the connection is YY.
To connect with an NCM, you must verify the setting in the Metasys front end.
The NCM with the RS-232 connected with UNITY must be configured as an
Operator Workstation (OWS). This NCM must also be designated as the port for
the report groups that receive critical alarms. In order for the critical alarms to
register on the UNITY front end, the Metasys group called UNITY must be added
to the Metasys front end Report Access group on the OWS PC. Finally, the
UNITY subsystem needs three .UND files from the Metasys front end. Place the
GLOBAL.UND, NCM.UND , and MODEL.UND in the
..\UNITY\SUBSYSXX\DATAFILE directory.

Unity IRM NCM 300/350 Unity IRM NCM 300/350


9 pin F 9 pin M 25 pin F 9 pin F
1 DCD 1 DCD 1 FG 1 DCD
2 RD 2 RD 2 TD 2 RD
3 TD 3 TD 3 RD 3 TC
4 DTR 4 DTR 4 RTS 4 DTR
5 SG 5 SG 5 CTS 5 SG
6 DSR 6 DSR 6 DSR 6 DSR
7 RTS 7 RTS 7 SG 7 RTS
8 CTS 8 CTS 8 DCD 8 CTS
9 9 NC 20 DTR 20 NC
Unity IRM NCM 101/200
25 pin F 25 pin M
1 1
2 2 TD
3 3 RD
4 4 RTS
5 5 CTS
6 6 DSR
7 7 Cmn
8 8 DCD
20 20 DTR

Figure I-25. Cable Pinout Connections for Metasys.


NCM

RS 232

Figure I-26. Metasys connects with UNITY via RS-232 to the COM port on the
NCM.
2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 391
Appendix I: Cable Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

11.2 Metasys Using Fiberoptics


Metasys fiberoptic wiring connections to the 300/350 NCM are shown below. The
Fiber Driver jumper and switch settings must be set on both Fiber Driver devices
for proper operation.
BLACK BOX

IRM side Switch set to DTE


Unity IRM Fiber Driver

PWR
25 pin F 25 pin M Fiber Driver
BLACK BOX

1 1 NC

DTE
2 2 TD

DCE
Fiber Driver
RX TX
3 3 RD
4 4 RTS
5 5 CTS Fiber Driver Settings
Jumpers
6 6 DSR W1 = ON
7 Cmn W2 = ON
7 W3 = B
8 8 DCD
Switch set to DTE
20 20 DTR

NCM side Fiber optic


NCM 300/350 Fiber Driver cable
9 pin F 25 pin M
DCD 1 1
RD 2 2 Switch set to DCE
TD 3 3

PWR
BLACK BOX
DTR 4 4 Fiber Driver

DTE
SG 5 5
DSR 6 6

DCE
Fiber Driver
RX TX

RTS 7 7
CTS 8 8
NC 9 20 Fiber Driver Settings
Jumpers
W1 = IN
W2 = OUT
Metasys W3 = Range Select**
300/350
NCM Switch set to DCE

** Range selection depends on the cable size and length.


Select the shortest range which accurately passes data.
A: short range
RS-232 Port 2 B: medium range
DB-9
C: long range
RS-232 Port 3
DB-9

RS-232 Port 4
DB-9

Figure I-27. Cable Pinout Connnections for Metasys Fiberoptic Wiring

392 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix I: Cable Guide

11.3 Metasys Using Short Haul Modems


Metasys wiring connections to the NCM 101 via short haul modems are shown
below. To use a nine pin connection from the IRM to the modem, use the cable
supplied with the short haul modem (EVMBMC-0006). If a 25-pin connection is
used, use a straight through cable.
Note: The straight through cable needs pins 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 20. A 25 pin cable
with only three wires will not work properly.
Use a 25-pin cable to connect the short haul modem with the NCM. For the NCM
300 use the cable specified for the 300, and for the NCM 200 use the cable
specified for the 200.

IRM
Short-Haul
Black Box
ME800A-RC RS-232
TXA
RTS/DTR
TXB Disabled
RXA

RXB
DCE
Switch to DCE

NCM

Short-Haul
Black Box
ME800A-RC RS-232
RXB
RTS/DTR
RXA Disabled
TXB

TXA

DTE
Switch to DTE

Figure I-28. Cable Pinout Connnections for Metasys Using Short Haul Modems.

2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 393


Appendix I: Cable Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

12 NexSys
The typical UNITY subsystem uses the SDriver to connect with UNITY. The
UNITY/NexSys subsystem differs from all other UNITY subsystems in that it is
directly connected to the NexSys server and does not use the SDriver. Figure I-
20 shows these connections.
Note: NexSys must be installed on the PC running the UNITY/NexSys subsetem, even
if NexSys doesnt run on that PC. The subsystem uses some of the NexSys DLL
files.
UNITY with UNITY with
Subsystem other NexSys
than NexSys Subsystem

UI UI NexSys
Server

LONWORKS NETWORK
IRM IRM Network
NETWORK Manager
Subsystem NexSys
Subsystem NWS

SDriver SDriver

OS/2 TCP/IP Windows NT TCP/IP

Figure I-29. Typical UNITY Connections and UNITY/NexSys Connections.

The PC containing UNITY and NexSys communicates with the


LON (Local Operating Network) through a PCLTA (Per-
sonal Computer LONTalk Adapter). The LON is the
network on which all hardware devices, such as thermo-
stats and VAV controllers, communicate. Next, routers
can be connected to the LON. Routers are hardware
devices with the ability to filter information which allows
only specified information to be broadcast over the LON.
Finally, the controllers are connected to the LON (If two
different media types are used, routers must be used).
This grouping of controllers (and routers, if used) is a
subnet.

394 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix I: Cable Guide

13 Trane
The following graphic shows the cable pin outs for connecting the UNITY IRM with
a Trane communication board.
Unity IRM Trane Port 2
(25 pin) (25 pin)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
20 20
Figure I-30. Cable Pin Outs for the Trane Subsystem.

TRACER Port 2 (S4)


PANEL

25 pin

Figure 1-31. Trane connects with UNITY via ribbon cable to Port 2 on the panel.

2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 395


Appendix I: Cable Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

14 Remote User
A remote UNITY user may be connected with the main IRM using one of the cable
pinout configurations shown below.
Unity IRM - 9 pin User - 25 pin Unity IRM - 25 pin User - 25 pin
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9

Unity IRM - 9 pin User - 9 pin


1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9

Figure I-32. Cable Pinouts for connecting a Remote User with a UNITY IRM.

396 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix I: Cable Guide

15 Long Distance Serial User


Use the configuration setup shown below for a modem user.
Short-Haul db 25 IRM PC 9 pin Short-Haul db 25 IRM PC 25 pin
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
20 20 20
Figure I-33. Cable Pinouts for a Modem connection.

IRM
EST Short-Haul RS-232
TXA
TXB

RXA
RXB
DCE
Switch to DCE

USER
EST Short-Haul RS-232
RXB 2
RXA 3
TXB 7
TXA 6,8,20

DTE
Switch to DTE

Figure I-34. Connections for a Modem User.

2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 397


Appendix I: Cable Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

16 Serial Printer
Use the following cable pinouts for connecting a serial printer with an IRM PC.
Unity IRM - 9 pin User - 25 pin Unity IRM - 25 pin User - 25 pin
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 20 20 20

Figure I-35. Cable Pinouts for connecting a Serial Printer with a UNITY IRM.

398 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix J: Modem
Setup Guide

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will discuss:
The setup of Lease Line Modems

2000 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix J: Modem Setup Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1 Lease Line Modems


ESUSA uses the Black Box 3600 lease line modem. For specific information on
this modem, refer to the instruction manuals that come with it. For information
on wiring lease line modems in a UNITY setup, refer to Appendix I: Cable Guide.
Once the modem is properly wired, you must enter the appropriate modem
settings. Settings for the IRM side modem will vary depending on the subsystem
it connects with. Approved setting for the IRM and subsystems will follow. Front
and rear views of the lease line modem are shown in Figures 1 and 2.

Black Box

V. 3 4 1 9 2 0 0 YES NO TALK/DATA

ONL I NE 108 106 105 109 104 103

TR CS RS CD RD TD

MODEM 3600

Figure 1. Lease Line Modem Front View.

FU 3/16
AMP S.B. ON

SE
USE
F

TELSET POWER
LEASED LINE DIAL
OFF
DTE

115 VAC
60 HZ
14W

Figure 2. Lease Line Modem Rear View.


1.1 EST3
When the modem is operating, the display will indicate the current settings. For
example, it might read V.34 19200 ON LINE. If you press the NO button, you
will enter the modem setup mode. The modem will ask you a series of questions
which reflect its current setting. If you wish to change a setting, you will press YES.
Otherwise, you will press NO to leave the setting unchanged. All changes are
dynamic. As soon as an entry is made, the modem will begin using it. When
finished, you may store your options as a User Option Set. These options must
be set up on both the IRM modem and the EST3 modem as indicated below.
NOTE: Even though the modem functions properly, the TR LED on the EST3 field side
lease line modem will NEVER illuminate.
1) Enter the setup mode by pressing the NO button.
2) The display will ask DIAL STORED NUMBER? Press NO.
3) The display will ask DISPLAY STATUS? Press NO.
4) The display will ask SELECT TEST? Press NO.
5) The display will ask MODIFY CONFIGURATION? Press YES.
When you press YES, you enter the configuration setup. From here, several
sets of options may be changed.

400 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix J: Modem Setup Guide

1.1 EST3 - (continued)


6) The display will ask CHANGE MODEM OPTIONS? Press YES.
If the option that displays is correct, press NO. If you wish to change the
option, press YES. Use the list below to set the parameters on the two modems.
After the modem reaches the end of this parameter list, it will again ask
CHANGE MODEM OPTIONS? If you wish to go through the list one more
time, press YES. Otherwise, press NO.
IRM Modem:
LEASE LINE
4 WIRE
MODULATION V.34
DCE MAX RATE 19200
DCE MIN RATE DISABLED
V.34 RATE THRESH HIGH BER
V.34 ASYM RATES ENABLED
NORMAL FORCED ANSWER
V.32B FAST TRAIN DISABLED
AUTO RETRAIN ENABLED
SQ AUTO RATE DISABLED
INTERNAL CLOCK
DIAL TX LEVEL -10 DBM
RING FREQ LIMIT ENABLED
LEASE TX LEVEL 0 DBM
LINE CURRENT DIS LONG
MANUAL DIAL BACKUP
LOOKBACK TIME 15 MIN
EST3 Modem:
Same as IRM, except the FORCED ANSWER should be NORMAL
ORIGINATE.
7) The display will ask CHANGE PROTOCOL OPTIONS? Press YES.
If the option that displays is correct, press NO. If you wish to change the
option, press YES. Use the list below to set the parameters on the two modems.
After the modem reaches the end of this parameter list, it will again ask
CHANGE PROTOCOL OPTIONS? If you wish to go through the list one
more time, press YES. Otherwise, press NO.
IRM Modem:
LAPM PROTOCOL ENABLED
MNP PROTOCOL DISABLED
PROTOCOL FALLBAK DISABLED
NORMAL DATA COMPRESSION
CONSTANT DTE SPEED
DTE FLOW CONTROL RTS
DCE FLOW CONTROL CTS
XON/OFF PASSTHRU DISABLED
INACTIVITY TIMER OFF
BREAK OPTION #5
V.42 FAST DETECT ENABLED
EST3 Modem:
Same as IRM.

2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 401


Appendix J: Modem Setup Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

1.1 EST3 - (continued)


8) The display will ask CHANGE DTE OPTIONS? Press YES.
If the option that displays is correct, press NO. If you wish to change the
option, press YES. Use the list below to set the parameters on the two modems.
After the modem reaches the end of this parameter list, it will again ask
CHANGE DTE OPTIONS? If you wish to go through the list one more time,
press YES. Otherwise, press NO.
IRM Modem:
ASYNC DATA
DTE RATE
8-BIT CHAR SIZE
NO PARITY
AT COMMAND SET ENABLED
IGNORE DTR CHANGE
DSR FORCED HIGH
DCD NORMAL
CTS FORCED HIGH
DTE FALLBACK DISABLED
OPTIONS RETAINED AT DISC.
EST3 Modem:
Same as IRM.
9) The display will ask CHANGE TEST OPTIONS? Press NO.
10) The display will ask CHANGE DIAL LINE OPTIONS? Press NO.
11) The display will ask CHANGE SPEAKER OPTIONS? Press NO.
12) The display will ask LOAD OR STORE OPTION SET? Press YES.
You may save your settings as USER OPTION #1. After the modem reaches
the end of this question series, it will again ask LOAD OR STORE OPTION
SET? If you wish to go through the list one more time, press YES. Otherwise,
press NO. When the modem asks:
LOAD FACTORY OPTION SET, press NO.
LOAD FROM USER OPTION SET, press NO.
STORE PRESENT OPTIONS, press YES.
STORE TO USER OPTION SET #1, press YES.
ARE YOU SURE, press YES.
USER OPTION 1 AT RESET CHANGE, press NO.
LOAD OR STORE OPTION SET, press NO.
13) Again, the display will ask MODIFY CONFIGURATION? Press NO.
14) The display will ask CHANGE PHONE NUMBERS? Press NO.
15) The display will ask FRONT PANEL FEATURES? Press NO.
16) The display will ask DIAL STORED NUMBER? Press NO.
17) The display will ask DISPLAY STATUS? Press NO.
18) When the display asks SELECT TEST?, youve reached the beginning
again. Press the Talk/Data button.
The display should return to normal operation mode. For example, it might say
V.34 19200 ON LINE.

402 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix J: Modem Setup Guide

2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved. 403


Appendix J: Modem Setup Guide Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

404 2000 Electronic Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.


Appendix K: I/O Extender

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will discuss:
I/O Extender and how it functions
I/O Extender hardware
UNITY installation of the I/O Extender

2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

(1) Overview

The I/O Extender is a hardware device that monitors the UPS used by Unity. It notifies
the Unity Workstation when a power-out situation has occurred and the UPS is now
the primary power source for the system. This allows you time to correct the power-
out problem, perform emergency control sequences, or shut the system down
properly. It is typically used on sites that require this additional measure of protection,
such as UL listed configurations.
Refer to the B&B Electronics Digital I/O Extender Instruction Manual, document #
IOEXT4395, for device specific information.

(2) General Requirements


The following list of steps must be implemented to assure proper operation.

1. The I/O Extender can be placed on any PC in the system except a Serial User.
2. If the IRM PC is heavily loaded with communications, place the I/O Extender on a
Remote User PC. Failure to do so will cause the IRM and UI to crash.
3. The I/O Extender is designed to fail with all inputs in alarm and all outputs to turn on
- in the subsystem. (Loss of communication or loss of power to the I/O Extender
hardware)
4. All inputs must be programmed as alarmable or the IRM will crash when the I/O
Extender is started.
5. Non-inverted outputs are to be used.
6. DO NOT USE the OUTPUTS when using this device for a primary power source
monitor.
7. IOEXTEND.EXE does support the E flag for capturing of CXC files.

Hardware Requirements

PC
1. A COM Port from either the Mother Board, DigiBoard, or Equinox must be available.
2. Communication setup on COM Port 19200 baud, 8 databits, 1 stop bit, no parity

I/O Extender Hardware - B&B Electronics


1. Digital I/O Extender Model 232IOEXT
2. Digital Buffer Module Model DBM16
3. DBM16 Enclosure Model BPDBM
4. 12VDC Power Supply Model 232PS2

CABLE PC to I/O EXTENDER


A DB-25 male, each end, cable with pins 2,3,7 straight wired max. 50 ft.

CABLE UPS to I/O EXTENDER


A cable using pins 1,6,10,15,17,18 of a DB-25 male on one end and tinned wire on the
other max. 50 ft.

406
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender
Supported UPS Models
Liebert UPStation GXT Several Models are available, below are the GXT Types:
1. Model 1000VA-120V P/N GXT1000RT-120 w/Intellislot AS400 Card P/N AS400CARD
2. Model 1500VA-120V P/N GXT1500RT-120 w/Intellislot AS400 Card P/N AS400CARD
3. Model 2000VA-120V P/N GXT2000RT-120 w/Intellislot AS400 Card P/N AS400CARD
4. Model 3000VA-120V P/N GXT3000RT-120 w/Intellislot AS400 Card P/N AS400CARD
5. Model 1000VA-230V P/N GXT1000RT-230 w/Intellislot AS400 Card P/N AS400CARD
6. Model 1500VA-230V P/N GXT1500RT-230 w/Intellislot AS400 Card P/N AS400CARD
7. Model 2000VA-230V P/N GXT2000RT-230 w/Intellislot AS400 Card P/N AS400CARD
8. Model 3000VA-230V P/N GXT3000RT-230 w/Intellislot AS400 Card P/N AS400CARD

Software Requirements
Required software files include:
As viewed from an OS/2 Window.
1. IOEXTEND.EXE 317546 2-16-01 9:53A
2. CPPOM30.DLL 363472 6-8-95 1:52A
3. CPPOOB30.DLL 799211 6-10-95 3:12A
4. CPPOOU3.DLL 1627527 6-10-95 3:15A
5. A default PIPE.DAT (either a Local or Remote PIPE.DAT)
6. IOMAP.TXT

(3) Creating Required Files for IOEXTEND.EXE Single IOEXTENDER

Calc Group
You must create a calc group and then program in specific points for I/O Extenders
use. I/O Extender uses these calc group points to monitor and report the UPSs
functioning.

With Unity Running:


1. Create a calc group. Example below: Group p34.

Figure 1. Edit Groups Window

2. Add the following digital points:


Point 1 - Primary Utility Status - Alarmable - PWR for engineering unit
Point 2 - Backup Battery Status - Alarmable - BATT for engineering unit
Point 3 - Bypass Mode Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 4 - UPS Fault Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 5 - Summary Alarm Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit

407
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
Point 6 - Spare I/O Input#5 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 7 - Spare I/O Input#6 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 8 - Spare I/O Input#7 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 9 - IOEXTENDER Output#1 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 10 - IOEXTENDER Output#2 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 11 - IOEXTENDER Output#3 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 12 - IOEXTENDER Output#4 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 13 - IOEXTENDER Output#5 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 14 - IOEXTENDER Output#6 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 15 - IOEXTENDER Output#7 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 16 - IOEXTENDER Output#8 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit

Screens for the first two points are shown below:

Figure 2. Editing Point #001 Figure 3. Editing Point #002

3. Once you have entered the required 16 points, save them.


4. Turn all of these points to Alarm/On which ever is applicable.

Figure 4. Calc Group with Points Entered

408
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender

PIPE.DAT
The PIPE.DAT file must be in the same directory as the IOEXTEND.EXE and
IOMAP.TXT files. The PIPE.DAT file must also have the COM port set to match the
IOEXTENDER.

From an OS/2 Window


1. Change directory to Unity.
2. Make a directory called IOEXTnn, Where nn = The number of the IOEXTEND.
Example: MD IOEXT01 and hit "Enter".
3. Copy the default PIPE.DAT to the IOEXT01 Directory.
Note: Copy the correct pipe.dat remote or local.
4. Copy TDUMP.EXE to the IOEXT01 Directory.
5. Change the COM port to the correct COM port number (leave everything else alone).
A. From the Edit Menu select HEX EDIT.
B. Click on Row10 / Column 2 and enter the hex number for the Com port.
C. From the Edit Menu select Exit With Save.
D. Hit Save.

Figure 5. Local IOEXTENDER PIPE.DAT Screen

Available Hex numbers for the Com ports are:


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F
10 11 12 13 14

409
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Figure 6. Remote IOEXTENDER PIPE.DAT Screen

Available Hex numbers for the Com ports are:


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F
10 11 12 13 14

IOMAP.TXT
The IOMAP.TXT file must be edited to reflect the new mapping settings for the
IOEXTENDER. The procedure is listed below:

From an OS/2 Window


1. Change directory to Unity
2. Change directory to the IOEXT01 directory.
3. Type E and hit "Enter"
4. Type the following:
P,34,001=1,I
P,34,002=2,I
P,34,003=3,I
P,34,004=4,I
P,34,005=5,I
P,34,006=6,I
P,34,007=7,I
P,34,008=8,I
P,34,009=1,O
P,34,010=2,O

410
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender
P,34,011=3,O
P,34,012=4,O
P,34,013=5,O
P,34,014=6,O
P,34,015=7,O
P,34,016=8,O
5. Save as IOMAP.TXT
6. Close the OS2 window

(4) Creating required files for IOEXTEND.EXE Multi IOEXTENDER

You can have more than one IOEXTENDER. When multiple IOEXTENDERs are
used, a separate directory (IOEXTxx) must be created for each IOEXTENDER. The
IOMAP.TXT and PIPE.DAT files must be in the associated IOEXTxx directory. Points
can be in a single calc group or in a completely different group. It does not matter which
way you choose to map the points. The I/O Extender uses these calc points to monitor
and report the UPSs functioning.

Calc Groups
You have two Calc Group choices when a multiple IOEXTENDER setup is used.
1. You can create a separate Calc Group for each specific IOEXTENDER and then
map in Calc Points for each specific IOEXTENDER.

IOEXT01 IOEXT02 IOEXT03


Directory Directory Directory

CALC Group 01 CALC Group 02 CALC Group 03

IOMAP.TXT IOMAP.TXT IOMAP.TXT

PIPE.DAT PIPE.DAT PIPE.DAT

Figure 7. Multiple IOEXTxx Directories With A Calc Group For Each IOEXTENDER

2. You can create a single Calc Group and then map each individual IOEXTENDERs
Calc Points from that single Calc Group.

IOEXT01 IOEXT02 IOEXT03


Directory Directory Directory

CALC Group ALL

IOMAP.TXT IOMAP.TXT IOMAP.TXT

PIPE.DAT PIPE.DAT PIPE.DAT

Figure 8. Multiple IOEXTxx Directories With A Single Calc Group For All IOEXTENDERs

411
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
With Unity Running
1. Edit each calc group you have chosen and add the following points (Example: Group
P34)
2 Point 1 - Primary Utility Status - Alarmable - PWR for engineering unit
Point 2 - Backup Battery Status - Alarmable - BATT for engineering unit
Point 3 - Bypass Mode Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 4 - UPS Fault Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 5 - Summary Alarm Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 6 - Spare I/O Input#5 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 7 - Spare I/O Input#6 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 8 - Spare I/O Input#7 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 9 - IOEXTENDER Output #1 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 10 - IOEXTENDER Output #2 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 11 - IOEXTENDER Output #3 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 12 - IOEXTENDER Output #4 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 13 - IOEXTENDER Output #5 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 14 - IOEXTENDER Output #6 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 15 - IOEXTENDER Output #7 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 16 - IOEXTENDER Output #8 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
3. Save these points and turn on or alarm these points which ever is applicable.
4. Edit each calc group you have chosen and add the following points (Example: Same
Group P34).
5. Point 20 - Primary Utility Status - Alarmable - PWR for engineering unit
Point 21 - Backup Battery Status - Alarmable - BATT for engineering unit
Point 22 - Bypass Mode Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 23 - UPS Fault Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 24 - Summary Alarm Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 25 - Spare I/O Input#5 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 26 - Spare I/O Input#6 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 27 - Spare I/O Input#7 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 28 - IOEXTENDER Output#1 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 29 - IOEXTENDER Output#2 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 30 - IOEXTENDER Output#3 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 31 - IOEXTENDER Output#4 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 32 - IOEXTENDER Output#5 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 33 - IOEXTENDER Output#6 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 34 - IOEXTENDER Output#7 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 35 - IOEXTENDER Output#8 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
6. Save these points and turn on or alarm these points which ever is applicable

-OR-

4. Edit each calc group you have chosen and add the following points (Example: Diff
Group P37)
5. Point 1 - Primary Utility Status - Alarmable - PWR for engineering unit

412
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender
Point 2 - Backup Battery Status - Alarmable - BATT for engineering unit
Point 3 - Bypass Mode Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 4 - UPS Fault Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 5 - Summary Alarm Status - Alarmable - Supervisory for engineering unit
Point 6 - Spare I/O Input#5 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 7 - Spare I/O Input#6 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 8 - Spare I/O Input#7 - Alarmable - Gen Alarm for engineering unit
Point 9 - IOEXTENDER Output#1 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 10 - IOEXTENDER Output#2 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 11 - IOEXTENDER Output#3 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 12 - IOEXTENDER Output#4 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 13 - IOEXTENDER Output#5 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 14 - IOEXTENDER Output#6 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 15 - IOEXTENDER Output#7 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
Point 16 - IOEXTENDER Output#8 - Status Only - OFF/ON for engineering unit
6. Save these points and turn on or alarm these points which ever is applicable
7. Continue until all points are saved.

PIPE.DAT
From an OS2 Window
1. Change directory to Unity
2. Make a directory called IOEXTnn, Where nn = The number of the IOEXTEND
(Example: MD IOEXT01), and hit "Enter"
3. Copy the default PIPE.DAT to the IOEXt01 Directory (copy the correct pipe.dat - remote
or local)
4. Copy TDUMP.EXE to the IOEXT01 Directory
5. Change the COM port to the correct COM port number (leave everything else alone)
6. Change directory to Unity
7. Make a directory called IOEXTnn, Where nn = The number of the IOEXTEND
(Example: MD IOEXT02), and hit "Enter"
8. Copy the default PIPE.DAT to the IOEXT01 Directory (copy the correct pipe.dat -
remote or local)
9. Copy TDUMP.EXE to the IOEXT02 Directory
10. Change the COM port to the correct COM port number (leave everything else alone)
11. Continue until all directories and pipe.dat files are created.

413
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

IOMAP.TXT
The IOMAP.TXT file must be edited to reflect the new mapping settings for the each
individual IOEXTENDER. Note that a different directory is used for each
IOMAP.TXT file. The procedure is listed after the graphic below:

Figure 9. Multiple IOMAP.TXT Files


From an OS2 Window
1. Change directory to Unity
2. Change directory to the IOEXT01 directory.
3. Type E and hit "Enter"
4. Type the following :
P,34,001=1,I
P,34,002=2,I
P,34,003=3,I
P,34,004=4,I
P,34,005=5,I
P,34,006=6,I
P,34,007=7,I
P,34,008=8,I
P,34,009=1,O
P,34,010=2,O
P,34,011=3,O
P,34,012=4,O
P,34,013=5,O
P,34,014=6,O
P,34,015=7,O
P,34,016=8,O

5. Save as "IOMAP.TXT"
6. Change directory to Unity
7. Change directory to the IOEXT02 directory.
8. Type E and hit "Enter"
9. Type the following :
P,34,020=1,I
P,34,021=2,I
P,34,022=3,I

414
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender
P,34,023=4,I
P,34,024=5,I
P,34,025=6,I
P,34,026=7,I
P,34,027=8,I
P,34,028=1,O
P,34,029=2,O
P,34,030=3,O
P,34,031=4,O
P,34,032=5,O
P,34,033=6,O
P,34,034=7,O
P,34,035=8,O

5. Save as "IOMAP.TXT".
6. Repeat as necessary until all IOMAP.TXT are created.
7. Close the OS2 window.

(5) IOEXTEND.EXE
IOEXTEND.EXE is the executable file for the IOEXTENDER. The IOEX-
TENDER hardware must be setup through switch settings, jumpers, and cable
connections.

Set Up the IOEXTENDER


With Unity Running
1. Remove the cover from the IOEXTENDER.

Figure 10. IOEXTENDER and DBM 16 Hardware

NOTE: When using the IOEXTENDER for a UL Listed system DO NOT use the onboard
outputs.

415
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
2. On the front side of the board - locate SW1 and set all switches to the OFF position,
except switch 3 which is set to ON.
3. On the back side of the board place the jumpers to DCE.
4. Connect the cable to the COM Port on the PC.
5. Connect the other end of the cable to the IOEXTENDER RS-232 end.

Set Up the DBM16

With Unity Running:


1. Place the jumpers to the following positions - I/O 0 thru 7 to IN, I/O 8 thru 15 to Out
2. Connect the wiring from the field points (normally closed) to the BDM16 Inputs
Do not use the outputs.
3. Connect the power supply to the DBM16.

Figure 11. IOEXTENDER Cable Connection To UPS

4. Connect the DBM16 to the IOEXTENDER.


5. Plug in the power supply and look for the LED to flash on the IOEXTENDER.
6. Place the cover on the DBM16.

Place Code in the Unity Directory


With Unity Shut Down:
1. Copy the IOEXTEND.EXE and the CPP*.DLL files to the C:\Unity Directory.
2. In the Unity Directory, edit the SYSTEM.CMD and add the following:
Start "IOEXTEND - Primary AC Power Monitor #01" /n IOEXTEND IOEXT01.
3. Continue to add the lines as necessary to start all of your IOEXTENDERS.

(6) IOEXTENDER Check Out

416
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender

START UP
Restart Unity
1. Hit Ctrl+Esc and look at the window list as Unity starts up.
2. Look for the lines - IOEXTEND - Primary AC Power Monitor #01 and any others for
this PC.

DEBUG SCREEN
With Unity Running
1. Look at DEBUG screen for normal communication.

Figure 12. Debug Screen


2. Check to see if the IRM is talking to the subsystem.
3. Check to see if the Field is talking with the subsystem.
4. Check to see the points loaded.
5. Check to see the status of the calc points.

Normal Operation
With Unity Running:
1. Check to see that all the points have Cleared and turned OFF for each applicable
group.
2. During normal operation the subsystem will get the status from the field and send
it to the IRM.
3. Since the outputs are not used for the POWER MONITOR no commands should go
to the field.

417
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Check Alarming on Inputs


With Unity Running:
1. Check to see that all the points have Cleared and turned OFF for each applicable
group
2. Open the input lines to I/O 1 and 2
3. Check that the alarm has printed in the alarm region and on the printer (if applicable)
4. Run a group log and check that points for inputs 1 and 2 are in alarm
4. Repeat this as necessary for all points and associated groups.

Check Return to Normal on Inputs


With Unity Running
1. Check to see that all the points are still in alarm for each applicable group
2. Short the input lines to I/O 1 and 2
3. Check that the return to normal has printed in the alarm region and on the printer (if
applicable)
4. Run a group log and check that points for inputs 1 and 2 are normal
5. Repeat this as necessary for all points and associated groups.

(7) Header Data Setup


The Header Point that will display the status of the AC Power must be programmed.
This will display a Primary Power Down message in the header region when the AC
power fails and the UPS takes over. In addition, an alarm will display in the alarm
region.

Programming the AC Pwr Point


With Unity Running
1. From the Setup -> Header Data Menu select the point for AC Pwr (Primary Utility Status
point).

Figure 13. Set Header Data

2. Hit OK to save.

418
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender

Testing the Primary Power Monitoring


With Unity Running:
1. Open the input lines to I/O 1 Calc Point P34001 (check both P34001 and P34005 have
alarmed).
2. Check that the alarm has printed in the alarm region and on the printer (if applicable).
3. Check in the upper left hand corner of the Header Region for "Primary Power Loss".
4. Check that you receive a pop up box and "Primary PC Power Failure" is printed.
5. Check for a beep every ten seconds with a duration of a 1/2 second continuing as
long as the input is open.
6. Short the input lines to I/O 1 Calc Point P34001.
7. Check the return to normal is received for point P34001 and has printed in the alarm
region and on the printer (if applicable). Check also that P34005 has cleared as
well.
8. Check in the upper left hand corner of the Header Region that the "Primary Power
Loss" has disappeared.
9. Check that you receive a pop up box and "Primary PC Power Restored" is printed.
10. Check to see if the beeping has stopped.

Figure 14. Primary Power Down Message Displayed in the Header Region

Figure 15. Primary Power Down Popup Message

419
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Figure 16. Primary Power Restored Displays OFF Point Status in the Header Region

Figure 17. Primary Power Restored Popup Message

(8) COM Loss Setup

Programming the COM Loss Points


With Unity Running:
1. From the group that contains your IOEXTENDER points, use the last points in the
group to program the following points:
COM MONITOR #1 - Status Only - Off/On
COM MONITOR #2 - Status Only - Off/On
COMMUNICATION - Alarm Only - Off /On

Figure 18. Edit COM Loss Points Group

420
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender

Figure 19. Point 1 Figure 20. Point 1 Calc Screen

Figure 21. Point 2 Figure 22. Point 2 Calc Screen

Figure 23. Point 3 Figure 24. Point 3 Calc Screen

Figure 25. Calc Group After Programming COM Loss Points 1, 2 and 3

2. Set up the EMS in the same fashion as in the following figures.


3. Make a program "IOEXTENDER COM LOSS"
4. In this program Add a point Command that will turn on your COMMUNICATION point
and the two monitor points.
5. Assign this program to all outputs of the IOEXTENDER COS - ON.
6. Make a message "IOEXTENDER COM LOSS" that includes the following:

421
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
Communication has been lost to the IOEXTENDER that is monitoring the Primary
AC Power Source.
1. Check the communication cables.
2. Check the COM port operation.
3. Check the power on the IOEXTENDER.
4. Check that no one has turned on any of the IOEXTENDER outputs.

Figure 26. IOEXTENDER COM Loss Message Creation

7. Make a message "IOEXTENDER COM RETURN TO NORMAL"


Communication has been restored between Unity and the IOEXTENDER
Normal monitoring of the Primary AC Power Source has been restored.

Figure 27. IOEXTENDER Return To Normal Message Creation

422
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender

Figure 28. COM Loss Messages

8. Assign the COM LOSS message to the COS - ON of all outputs of the IOEXTENDER
Points - EIM.

Figure 29. IOEXTENDER COM Loss Message Assignment

423
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
9. Assign the RETURN TO NORMAL message to the NORMAL - EIM of the COMMUNI-
CATION Point.

Figure 30. IOEXTENDER Return To Normal Message Assignment

Testing COM Loss Points


With Unity Running:
1. Turn ON an output watch for the EIM and the alarm of the COMMUNICATION Point.

Figure 31. Primary AC Power Source COM Loss Message

424
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender
2. Turn OFF the same output point and watch for the EIM and the return to normal of the
COMMUNICATION Point.

Figure 32. IOEXTENDER Return To Normal

3. Repeat this for all outputs.


4. Turn on all the outputs, look for the EIM and alarm - now power down the IOEX-
TENDER.
5. Watch for all of the inputs to go into alarm, all of the outputs are already ON, the alarm
of the COM point, the EIM, and the loss of primary power events.
6. Restore power back to the IOEXTENDER.
7. Watch for all of the inputs to return to normal, all the outputs turn OFF, the return to
normal of the COM point, the EIM, and the return to normal of primary power events.
8. Power down the IOEXTENDER again.
9. Watch for all of the inputs to go into alarm, all of the outputs go into alarm, the alarm
of the COM point, the EIM, and the loss of primary power events.
10. Restore power back to the IOEXTENDER.
11. Watch for all of the inputs to return to normal, all the outputs turn OFF, the return
to normal of the COM point, the EIM, and the return to normal of primary power
events.
12. Pull the cable off the COM port or the IOEXTENDER.
13. Watch for all of the inputs to go into alarm, all of the outputs go into alarm, the alarm
of the COM point, the EIM, and the loss of primary power events.
14. Restore power back to the IOEXTENDER.
15 Watch for all of the inputs to return to normal, all the outputs turn OFF, the return
to normal of the COM point, the EIM, and the return to normal of primary power
events.

425
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Figure 33. IOEXTENDER I/O Communication Loss

(9) Low Battery Setup

Low Battery Alarm Setup


When the Unity Workstation is running on the backup battery power source the battery
will eventually run down. This time is based on the power draw of the equipment being
powered, as well as the reserve capacity of the UPS. The Low Battery Setup section
shows you how to create and implement a warning message that will display when the
UPSs reserve capacity is approaching its minimum operable voltage. The steps are
shown below:

With Unity Running:


1. Create a message "IOEXTENDER BU BATT LOW".
The Backup Power Source Battery at LOW CAPACITY!
***Less than 2 minutes remaining on Battery Power***

Figure 34. Battery Low Alarm Message

426
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender
2. Assign the BATT LOW message to the ALARM - EIM of the "Backup Battery Status"
IOEXTEND points.

Figure 35. Assign Battery Low Message to an Alarm Event

3. Create a message "IOEXTENDER BU BATT LOW NORMAL".


The Backup Power Source Battery is at NORMAL charge level.

Figure 36. Backup Battery Normal Charge Level Message

427
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
4. Assign the BATT LOW NORMAL message to the NORMAL - EIM of the "Backup Battery
Status" IOEXTEND points.

Figure 37. Assign Battery Low Normal Message to a Normal Event

Testing Low Battery Alarm


The following steps list the procedure to test the Low Battery Alarm.

With Unity Running:


1. Open the Pins for I/O #1 for Point - P34002 Backup Battery Status.
2. Check for alarming on the Backup Battery Status point and on the Summary Alarm
Status point.
3. Check that the pop up message "IOEXTENDER BU BATT LOW" appears.

Figure 38 Backup Battery Low Message

4. Short the Pins for I/O #1 for Point - P34002 Backup Battery Status.
5. Check for return to normal on the Backup Battery Status point and on the Summary
Alarm Status point.

428
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender
6. Check that the pop up message "IOEXTENDER BU BATT NORMAL" appears.

Figure 39. Backup Battery Normal Charge Level Popup Message

7. For this step you will need a stop watch, with everything normal state, all wiring in
place, the AS400 card.
is in the UPS, UPS charged - remove power from the UPS and start the stop watch.
8. Check for Primary Power Loss indications as seen in the steps above.
9. Monitor time and watch for the Backup Battery Status point and Summary Alarm
Status Points to ALARM, check for the message to pop up.
10. Stop the stop watch, quickly restore power back to the UPS.
11. Record the amount of time it took from a power loss to low battery - use this number
as reference for approximate battery time in the event of a power loss.
12. Check for the return to normals on the Power Loss, BU Battery , and Summary Alarm
Points.
13. Check for the Return To Normal message.

429
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

(10) Bypass Setup

Bypass Alarm Setup


With Unity Running:
1. Make a message "IOEXTENDER UPS BYPASS"
The Backup Power Source is in BYPASS! In the
Event of a power loss you will not be protected.

Figure 40. Bypass Message

2. Assign the BYPASS message to the ALARM - EIM of the "Bypass Mode Status"
IOEXTEND points.

Figure 41. Assign Bypass Message to Alarm

430
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender
3. Make a message "IOEXTENDER UPS BYPASS NORMAL"
The Backup Power Source is supplying power from the UPS normally.

Figure 42. Bypass Normal Message

4. Assign the BYPASS NORMAL message to the NORMAL - EIM of the "Bypass Mode
Status" IOEXTEND points.

Figure 43. Assign Bypass Normal Message

431
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Testing Bypass Alarm


With Unity Running:
1. Open the Pins for I/O #2 for Point - P34003 Bypass Mode Status .
2. Check for alarming on the Bypass Mode Status point and on the Summary Alarm
Status point.
3. Check that the pop up message "IOEXTENDER UPS BYPASS" appears.

Figure 44. UPS Bypass Mode Message

4. Short the Pins for I/O #1 for Point - P34003 Bypass Mode Status.
5. Check for return to normal on the Bypass Mode Status point and on the Summary
Alarm Status point.
6. Check that the pop up message "IOEXTENDER UPS BYPASS NORMAL" appears.

Figure 45. UPS Bypass Normal Message

7. On the UPS press the OFF/BYPASS button for at least a second.


CAUTION : IF YOU HIT THIS BUTTON AGAIN WITHIN 4 SECONDS THIS WILL CAUSE
POWER TO BE SHUT OFF TO THE OUTPUT RECEPTACLES!!!!!
8. Check for the proper indications at the UPS (LED's and beeping).

432
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender
9. Check for alarming on the Bypass Mode Status point and on the Summary Alarm
Status point.
10. Check that the pop up message "IOEXTENDER UPS BYPASS" appears.
11. On the UPS press the ON/ALARM SILENCE/MANUAL BATTERY TEST button for at
least a second.
12. Check for the proper indications at the UPS (LED's and beeping stopped).
13. Check for return to normal on the Bypass Mode Status point and on the Summary
Alarm Status point.
14. Check that the pop up message "IOEXTENDER UPS BYPASS NORMAL" appears.

(11) UPS Internal Fault Setup

UPS Fault Alarm Setup


With Unity Running:
1. Make a message "IOEXTENDER UPS Fault"
The Backup Power Source has a UPS Internal Fault
Consult UPS Indication for the source of the problem.

Figure 46. UPS Internal Fault Message

433
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
2. Assign the UPS Fault message to the ALARM - EIM of the "UPS Fault Status"
IOEXTEND points.

Figure 47. Assign UPS Internal Fault Message to Alarm

3. Make a message "IOEXTENDER UPS Fault Normal"


The Backup Power Source is clear of all internal faults.

Figure 48. UPS Internal Fault Normal Message

434
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender
4. Assign the UPS Fault NORMAL message to the NORMAL - EIM of the "UPS Fault
Status" IOEXTEND points.

Figure 49. Assign UPS Internal Fault Normal

Testing UPS Fault Alarm


With Unity Running:
1. Open the Pins for I/O #3 for Point - P34004 UPS Fault Status
2. Check for alarming on the UPS Fault Status point and on the Summary Alarm Status
point.
3. Check that the pop up message "IOEXTENDER UPS Fault" appears.

Figure 50. IOEXTENDER UPS Fault Popup Message

4. Short the Pins for I/O #3 for Point - P34004 UPS Fault Status.
5. Check for return to normal on the Summary Alarm Status point and on the Summary
Alarm Status point.

435
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
6. Check that the pop up message "IOEXTENDER UPS Fault Normal" appears.

Figure 51. IOEXTENDER UPS Fault Normal Popup Message

7. Since this alarm is an internal alarm you can not test the true functionality of it. The
UPS must have an internal fault for this one to come in.

(12) UPS Information/Operation


This section shows the UPS switch operation as well as the three UPS modes; Normal
Mode, Battery Mode, and Fault Mode.

UPS Switch Operation


There are two buttons on the UPS. The upper button is the On/Alarm Silence/
Manual Battery Test Button and the lower button is the Off/ Bypass Button.
Pressing the ON/Alarm Silence/ Manual Battery Test Button will start the UPS and
provide conditioned power to the output sockets.
Pressing the Off/ Bypass Button one time will cause the load to be transferred to
bypass power.

Warning: Pressing the button again, within 4 seconds of the first press, will
shut off power to the output sockets.

436
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender

Figure52. UPS Switch Operation

UPS Normal Mode


During Normal Mode operation utility power provides electricity to the UPS to maintain
its batteries fully charged condition.
The UPS supplied power to the PC through its inverter and filter circuits.
Four green LEDs indicate, in 25% increments, the approximate load on the UPS.
If the UPS becomes loaded beyond its full rating, the fifth (amber) LED will illuminate
and the UPS will sound an alarm.

Figure 53. UPS Normal Mode

437
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

UPS Battery Mode


Battery Mode indicates the percentage of usable battery power left.
During Battery Mode an alarm sounds every 10 seconds. This will change to 2 beeps
every 5 seconds when the battery runs low (approximately 2 minutes remaining).

Warning: Turning OFF the UPS will result in Total loss of power.

When the utility power is restored, the UPS resumes normal operation and the battery
charger begins to recharge the battery.

Figure 54. UPS Battery Mode

438
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix K: I/O Extender

UPS Fault Mode


Fault Mode indicates the type of fault the UPS has detected. Faults are noted by
illuminating the red Fault LED or the yellow E, Bypass, or Battery LEDs.
UPS faults will also cause an alarm beeper to sound, with different beep timing for
different fault types.
Fault conditions with beeper and LED indicators are listed below:
All LEDs On - On bypass due to output overload (beeper every 1/2 sec.)
A LED On - On bypass due to temperature condition (beep every 4 sec.)
B LED On - On bypass due to DC bus overvoltage (beep every 4 sec.)
C LED On - On bypass due to control power supply failure (beep every 4 sec.)
D LED On - On bypass due to PFC failure (beep every 4 sec.)
E LED On - On bypass due to inverter failure (beep every 4 sec.)
A&C LEDs On - UPS failed battery test (long beep every minute)
C&E LEDs On - UPS shutdown due to command from com port (SNMP) (no beep)

Figure 55. UPS Fault Mode

439
Appendix K: I/O Extender Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

440
Appendix L: User Down

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will discuss:
User Down and how it functions
User Down setup
Testing User Down operation

2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


Appendix L: User Down Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

(1) Overview of User Down

This User Down appendix is comprised of a series of procedure lists. These


procedures are used to assign and setup the User Down alarm screens and to verify
the User Down alarms work as they should.
The User Down feature comes into play when a Unity PC, either local or remote, loses
communication. Notification of the affected PCs status is displayed in the header
region, the alarm region, and as a pop up message. When the affected PC comes back
on line, depending on the PCs Station Configuration settings, the header region, alarm
region and pop up message all report the event. The Station Setup and Station
Configuration screens are used to assign the Station names and whether the station is
a Status Only PC. Status Only PCs are usually remote PCs that are not required to be
online at all times.

(2) Requirements

Hardware
PC
1. No changes required.
Cabling or External Hardware
1. No changes required.

Software
OS2
1. None Required
Unity
1. Changes to the UI required.
2. Changes to the Beep duration and Frequency required (a beep that will sound every
10 seconds with a duration of 1/2 second, that will continue until the IRM is
reconnected.
3. Use of Pop Up Boxes required.
4. Changes to the IRM required.

(3) Required Setup

UnityINI
From an OS2 Window:
1. Change to the unity directory.
2. Type UNITYINI and hit Enter.
3. From the IRM Section:
Select YES for BROADCAST UI UP CHANGE

442
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix L: User Down

Figure 1. Broadcast UI Up Change

Select YES for POPUP BOX FOR UI UP MESSAGE

Figure 2. Popup Box For UI Up Message

Select YES for BROADCAST UI DOWN CHANGE

Figure 3. Broadcast UI Down Change

443
Appendix L: User Down Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
Select YES for POPUP BOX FOR UI DOWN MESSAGE

Figure 4. Pop Up Box For UI Down Message

4. Hit EXIT to save changes.

Place Code in the Unity Directory


With Unity Shut Down:
1. Copy IRM.EXE to C:\Unity\Directory
2. Copy UI.EXE and the UI*.DLL to C:\Unity Directory

Unity Setup with New Code in place


Restart Unity
1. Restart the IRM PC and all users.
2. From the Setup->Station menu, ensure that the Station name is the same as you want
to appear on the header (with this change the only place to change the header name
is in the Station Setup Menu).

Figure 5. Station Setup Showing Available Station Choices

3. If this station is to be an alarmable station (when it is off-line) the do not check the
Status Only box.

444
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix L: User Down
If this station is not alarmable check the Status Only Box. I.E. a dial-in user would
be considered a status only user, as well as a user who is not required to stay
connected all the time. A Status Only user will not show a USER DOWN alarm
message in the header when not connected to the IRM, but will show in the SYSTEM
STATUS window when it is not connected.

Figure 6. Station Configuration - No Status Figure 7. Station Configuration - With Status

4. Save the information and in the list (if this is a status only user) you will see Yes in
the column for Status Only.
5. Once all the information is correct for all users, select the station at the PCs that will
correspond to that particular user. Ensure all PCs have a station selected.
6. As you save the information, each PC will show a pop up box showing that the PC
is up and on-line.
7. Once all stations have been setup shut down Unity.

(4) System Checkout

Start Up
Restart Unity
1. Restart Unity on the IRM PC in start mode.
2. Hit Ctrl+Esc and look at the window list as Unity starts up.
3. Everything should come up normal.
4. When the UI starts up DO NOT attempt to log on before the IRM connects test to
see if the IRM will connect without any user interface from a shutdown condition.
5. Look for the POP UP BOXES for USER UP.

Figure 8. User Up Pop Up Message

6. Check in the header region for USER DOWN.

Figure 9. User Down Header Message

445
Appendix L: User Down Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
7. Check in the Misc->System Status window Check for subsystem status.
- Check for the IRM Up and Logged On.
8. Start all users one at a time and check the System Status window for them.

Figure 10. System Status Window

9. After all the users are on line the USER DOWN alarm will clear in the header.

Note: The NEW System Status Window also has new colors:
SYSTEM DOWN - Red
CPU DOWN - Purple.

446
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix L: User Down

Debug Screen
IRM
1. Look at the IRM DEBUG screen for normal communication.
2. Check to see if the IRM is talking to the UIs.
3. Check to see if there are USER and OTHER PIPES for all users.
4. Check for the broadcast of user status when user is connecting.
5. Check for the broadcast of user status when logging in.

Figure 11. NETUSER4 Connecting with IRM

Figure 12. Logging On to NETUSER4

447
Appendix L: User Down Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Normal Operation
With Unity Running:
1. The header alarm for USER Down has cleared.
2. The debug screen has normal communication.

Figure 13 All Users Connected and Logged In.

Alarmable User Down


With Unity Running:
1. Check to see that the user does not have a check mark for Status only.
2. Shut that user down, look for the Pop Up and the header alarm USER DOWN.
Check the System Status Window to verify that Users status indicates Down.
3. While that user is off-line, from the Station setup menu (on another PC) select status
only for the User that is down.
4. Check to see that the USER DOWN header alarm is clear.
Check the System Status Window to verify that Users status still indicates Down with
an * beside down.
5. While the user is still off-line, from the station setup menu (on another PC) unselect
status only for the user that is down.
6. Check to see that the User Down header alarm is present.
Check the System Status Window to verify that Users status still indicates Down with
no * beside down.
7. Restart the user that is down.
8. Look for the Pop Up and the header alarm USER DOWN cleared.
Check the System Status Window to verify that Users status indicates UP.
9. Repeat these steps for all alarmable users.

448
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix L: User Down

Status Only User Down


With Unity Running:
1. Check to see that the user has a check mark for Status Only in the Station
Configuration Menu..

Figure 14. Status Only Box Checked

2. Shut that user down, look for the Pop Up and the header alarm USER DOWN is not
present.
Check the System Status Window to verify that Users status indicates Down and an
* beside DOWN.

Figure 15. System Status Showing User Down* (Status Only)

3. While the user is still off-line, from the station setup menu (on another PC) unselect
status only for the user that is down.
4. Check to see that the User Down header alarm is present.

Figure 16. User Down Header Alarm

449
Appendix L: User Down Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7
Check the System Status Window to verify that Users status still indicates DOWN
with no * beside DOWN.

Figure 17. User Down System Status

5. While the user is still off-line, from the Station setup menu (on another PC) select
status only for the User that is down.
6. Check to see that the USER DOWN header alarm is clear.

Figure 18. User Down Alarm Cleared From Header


Check the System Status Window to verify that Users status still indicates DOWN
with an * beside DOWN.

Figure 19. System Status Showing User Down* (Status Only)


7. Restart the user that is down.
8. Look for the Pop Up and the header alarm USER DOWN is still cleared.
Check the System Status Window to verify that Users status indicates UP with an
* beside UP.

Figure 20. System Status Showing User Up* (Status Only)


9. Repeat these steps for all status only users.

450
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix L: User Down

User Log Off / On


With Unity Running:
1. With a user logged on to a station, log off the station.

Figure 21. Logoff Status Screen

2. Check the System Status Window to verify that Users Station status indicates Up
and there is a blank under the CPU/USER column.
3. With a user logged off the station, log on with a different name than the original person
that logged on.
4. Check the System Status Window to verify that Users Station status indicates UP
and the name of the newly logged on user is displayed under the CPU/USER
column.
5. With a user logged on to a station, log off the station.
6. Check the System Status Window to verify that Users Station status indicates UP
and there is a blank under the CPU/USER column.
7 With a user logged off to a station, log on with the original person who was logged
on before the test.
8. Check the System Status Window to verify that Users Station status indicates UP
and there is the name of the logged on user under the CPU/USER column.

451
Appendix L: User Down Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

452
Appendix M: IRM Down

Chapter Overview
This appendix to the Users Guide to UNITY will discuss:
IRM Down and how it functions
IRM Down setup
Testing IRM Down operation

2001 Johnson Controls, Inc.


Appendix L: User Down Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

(1) Overview of IRM Down

The IRM Down appendix is comprised of a series of procedure lists. These


procedures are used to verify the IRM Down alarms work as it should. The IRM
Down feature is built into Unity and comes into play when the IRM loses communi-
cation. The IRMs status is displayed in the header region, the alarm region, and as a
pop up message. When the IRM comes back on line the header region, alarm region
and pop up messages all report the event.

(2) Requirements

Hardware
PC
1. No changes required.
Cabling or External Hardware
1. No changes required.

Software
OS2:
1. None Required.
Unity:
1. Changes to the UI required.
2. Changes to the Beep duration and Frequency required (a beep that will sound every
10 seconds with a duration of 1/2 second, that will continue until the IRM is
reconnected.
3. Use of Pop Up Boxes required.

(3) Required Setup

Place Code in the Unity Directory


With Unity Shut Down:
1. Copy UI.EXE and the UI*.DLL to C:\Unity Directory.

(4) System Check Out

Start Up
Restart Unity:
1. Restart Unity on the IRM PC in start mode.
2. Hit Ctrl+Esc and look at the window list as Unity starts up.
3. Everything should come up normal.
4. When the UI starts up DO NOT attempt to log on before the IRM connects test to
see if the IRM will Connect without any user interface from a shutdown condition.
5. Look for the POP UP BOX for USER UP, the beeping will not be long enough to test
at this time.

454
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix L: User Down

Normal Operation
With Unity Running:
1. No pop up boxes are present for the USER or the IRM.
2. No beeping for IRM Down.

Disconnect User from IRM


With Unity Running:
1. Disconnect the Com Line or Network from the test user.
2. Check that the pop up for IRM communication down is present, check that IRM DOWN
alarm is present in the header on all other PCs check for the pop up USER DOWN.

Figure 1. IRM Down Alarm Message

Figure 2. User Down Popup Message

3. While that user is off-line, listen for a beep that will occur every 10 seconds with a
duration of a second.
4. Check to see that the beep will continue to occur for 2 minutes with the above
frequency.
5. Reconnect the COM line or the network to the user.
6. Check that the Normal Communication with IRM and the pop up USER UP
messages are present.

455
Appendix L: User Down Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Figure 3. Normal Communication with IRM Message

Figure 4. User Up Popup Message

7. Check that the IRM Down header alarm clears.


8. Check that the beeping has stopped.
9. If there is a printer on this PC check that IRM DOWN and IRM UP has been printed.
10. Check on all PCs for the USER UP pop up message.
11. Repeat the above steps for all connected users.

456
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Appendix L: User Down

Shut down the IRM


With Unity Running:
1. Shut down the IRM.
2. Check that the pop up for IRM communication down is present, check that IRM DOWN
alarm is present in the header on all other PCs check for the pop up IRM
Communication Down.
3. While the IRM is off-line, listen for a beep that will occur every 10 seconds with a
duration of a second.
4. Check to see that the beep will continue to occur for 2 minutes with the above
frequency.
5. Restart the IRM.
6. Check that the pop up USER UP and Normal Communication with IRM are present
on all PCs.
7. Check that the IRM Down header alarm clears an all PCs.
8. Check that the beeping has stopped on All PCs.
9. If there is a printer on any PC check that IRM DOWN and IRM UP have been printed.

457
Appendix L: User Down Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

458
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Index

UNITY User's Guide Index


A Changing or Deleting 332
Alarm Manager Report 128
About Comcall 354 Alarm Report Parameters
ABS 194, 205 Changing 118, 119
ABS DIFF 194, 203, 204 Alarms Colors 40
Absolute difference (abs diff) Alarms Pending 34
Calculation Point Function 203, 204 Alert Boxes 37
Calculation Point Operator 194 ALFAPAGE
Absolute Value (ABS) Installation 339, 340, 341
Calculation Point Operators 194 Modem Tips 342
Accumulator Pager Tips 342, 343
Calculation Point Function 206 Points 343
Acknowledge Printer Tips 342
Alarms 35, 53 Screen Setup 343
Auto EIM 56 Analog Commands 93
EILGs 37, 57 Analog Point
EIMs 56, 57 Definition 312
Acknowledged Alarms 122 ANDNOT 197
Acknowledges 93 AO 312
ACM 312 ASC 312
Addition 200 Auto EIM 36, 40
Calculation Point Function 207 Acknowledging 56
Address Setup 88
Definition 312 Starting 55
Advance Schedules 49, 175 Stopping 55
Adding 50, 51 Average
Deleting 52 Calculation Point Function 208
AHU 312
AI 312 B
Alarm
Back Up Files to Floppy Disks 320
Acknowledge 35, 53
Backtrace 376, 377
Clear 42
Backup 319
Colors 87
Beeper 40
Definition 312
Beeper Setup 82, 83
Printing 53, 54
BI 312
Selecting Alarms to be Stored 284
BO 312
Storing Alarm Data 284
Btrieve 32
Types 54
Building Automation 312
Window
Buttons 26
Clearing the 54
Alarm Condition C
Calculation Point Input 192
Alarm Manager 40, 41 C to F 194, 208, 209
Database Files 114 Calculation Group Setup 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275
Description 328 Calculation Point Programming 280
Refreshing 335 Adding a Calculation Group 280
Responding 333 Adding a Calculation Point 281
Respondor 328, 333 Deleting a Calculation Point 282
Adding 329 Calculation Points 300
Changing or Deleting 330 Calculation Point Functions 202, 203
Response 328, 334 Absolute (abs) 205
Adding 331 Absolute difference (abs diff) 203, 204
Absolute Value (abs) 205

459
Index Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Accumulator 206 Equal (=) D 195


Addition 207 Exponent (exp) A ,D 195
Average 208 Fahrenheit to Centigrade (F to C) D 195
Centigrade to Fahrenheit (C to F) 208, 209 Flow Rate (flow) A, D 195
Change of state 209, 210 Flow Rate using Square Root (flowsqrt) A, D 195
Consumption 210, 211, 212 Greater Than (>) D 196
Degree day 212 Greater Than or Equal (>=) D 196
Degree days 213 Heat Index (heat) A, D 196
Demand Control 214 Less Than (<) D 196
Dew point to relative humidity (dp to rh) 214, 215 Less Than or Equal (<=) D 196
Division 215 Logical and (and) D 197
Enthalpy using dew point (ent_dp) 216, 217 Logical ANDNOT (ANDNOT) D 197
Enthalpy using relative humidity (ent_rh) 217, 218 Logical Exclusive or (XOR) D 197
Exponent (exp) 218, 219 Logical not and (NAND) D 198
Fahrenheit to centigrade (F to C) 219, 220 Logical not or (nor) D 198
Flow rate (flow) 220, 221, 222 Logical or (or) D 198
Flow rate using square root (flowsqrt) 222, 223 Logical ORNOT (ORNOT) D 199
Heat index (heat) 223, 224 Maximum (MAX) A, D 199
Maximum (MAX) 225 Minimum (MIN) A, D 199
Minimum (MIN) 226 Minus () A, D 199
Multiplication 227 Modulo (MOD) A 199
Natural log (ln) 227, 228 Multiply (*) A, D 200
Optimum Start Time 228, 229 Natural Log (ln) D 200
Optimum Stop Time 229, 230 Not Equal (<>) D 200
Percent of scale 230, 231 Plus (+) A, D 200
Random (rand) 231, 232 Random (rand) A 200
Relative humidity to dew point (rh to dp) 233, 234 Relative Humidity to Dew Point (rh to dp) A 200
Rolling Average 234, 235, 236 Select High 238
Run time 236, 237 Square Root (sqrt) D 200
Select Low 239 Time Delay (delay) D 201
Square root (sqrt) 240 Truncation (trunc) D 201
Subtraction 241 Wind Chill (wind) A, D 201
Totalizer difference 242 Detailed ACP Information 255
Truncate (trunc) 243 ACP Statement Structure 255
Wind chill (wind) 244, 245 Formula Format 255
Calculation Point Inputs 192, 193 Detailed DCP Information 246
Alarm Condition 192 If Statement Structure 247
Constant 192 If-Then-Else Format 246, 247
Day of Month 193 Then & Else Commands 247
Digital Eng. Unit 192 Detailed FCP Information 265
Digital Last Command 192 CAM 312
Hour 193 Cancel Printing 298
Minute 193 Canceling a Menu Selection
No Data 192 with keyboard 25
Point Data 192 with mouse 24
Season 193 Card
Time 193 Database Files 113
Year 193 Card Activity Report 129
Calculation Point Operators 194 Card Command 125
Absolute Difference (abs diff) A, D 194 Card Commands 93
Absolute Value (ABS) D 194 Card Commands Report 122
Centigrade to Fahrenheit (C to F) D 194 Centigrade to Fahrenheit (C to F)
Dew Point to Relative Humidity (dp to rh) A 194 Calculation Point Function 208, 209
Divide (/) A, D 194 Calculation Point Operator 194
Enthalpy using Dew Point (ent_dp) A, D 195 Central Processing Unit
Enthalpy using Relative Humidity (ent_rh) A, D 195 Definition 312

460
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Index

Change of State Database Edits Report 122


Calculation Point Function 209, 210 Day of Month
Check Boxes 26 Calculation Point Input 193
ChipChat 343 Daylight Savings Time 76
Clear Alarms 42 DDA 312
Clicking 20 DDC 312
Client DDE 312
Definition 312 DDF 312
Comcall 346. See Dial-Out Pager DDL 312
Activate 355 Degree Day
Deactivate 355 Calculation Point Function 212, 213
Printer Setup 347 Degree Days
Comcall Help 352 Calculation Point Function 213
Command Errors from EMS 93 DELAY 201
Command Errors from Programs 93 Deleting a Report 120
Command Time Out 326 Demand Control 299
Command Trace 40, 90 Calculation Point Function 214, 300
Options 93 Point 1 Setup 302, 303, 304
Setup 90 Point 2 Setup 304, 305
Command Trace Report 122 Point 3 Setup 305
Command Trace Setup 91, 92 Point 4 Setup 306
Command/Residual Priority 304 Point 5 Setup 306, 307
Commanded By 123 Point 6-99 Setup 307, 308
Commanded By Any User 93 Programming Forms 309
Commanded By Auto Restore 93 Demand Interval 303
Commanded By Calc Point 93 Demand Terms 301
Commanded By CIP 93 Desktop 21
Commanded By Demand Control 93 Dew point to relative humidity (dp to rh)
Commanded By EIP 93 Calculation Point Function 214, 215
Commanded By Field Operator 93 Calculation Point Operator 194
Commanded By Report 122 DI 312
Commanded By TIP 93 Dial-Out Pager
Commanded By TOD 93 Pager Setup 348
Commands Point Setup 349
Point 41 Screen Setup 349
REXX Script 41 Setting Up 347
Commands Menu 41 Dial-Up Pager
Company Name 34 Modem 347, 348
Conditional Cascade Window 25 Dial-up Pager
Constant View Log 351
Calculation Point Input 192 Dialog boxes 26, 35
Consumption Acknowledge Alarms 35
Calculation Point Function 210, 211, 212 Alert Boxes 37
COS 312 Auto EIM 36
Current Scan Usage 302, 309 Miscellaneous Dialogs 37
Current Usage 301 Point Command 36
Current User 34 Warning Boxes 37
Cursor 22 Digital Commands 93
Digital Eng. Unit
D Calculation Point Input 192
Data file Backup 42 Digital Last Command
Data Gathering Panel (DGP) 312 Calculation Point Input 192
DataBase Dump Digital Point
Installing 324 Definition 312
Using 324, 325 Direct Digital Control Panel (DDC)
Definition 312

461
Index Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Directory 42 Energy Management System


Divide Defaults 40, 86
Calculation Point Function 194 Engineering Unit 326
Division ent_dp 195, 216, 217
Calculation Point Function 215 ent_rh 195, 217, 218
DO 312 Enthalpy using dew point (ent_dp)
DOS Window. 112 Calculation Point Function 216, 217
Double-Clicking 20 Calculation Point Operator 195
dp to rh 194, 214, 215 Enthalpy using relative humidity (ent_rh)
Dragging 20 Calculation Point Function 217, 218
Dropdown Lists 26 Calculation Point Operator 195
DST 76 Equal
Dual Clicking 20 Calculation Point Operators 195
Duty Cycle Strategy 170 EST Commands 93
Event Initiated Activities 178
E Event Initiated Graphic. See Event Initiated Logical
E-Mail 41 Graphic
E-mail 63 Acknowledge. See Event Initiated Logical Graphic:
Deleting 66 Acknowledge
Printing 65 Event Initiated Logical Graphic 37
Reading 64, 65 Acknowledge 37, 57
Receiving 64 Event Initiated Logical Group Displays (EILGs) 313
Sending 63, 64 Event Initiated Messages 55
Edit 38 Acknowledge 56, 57
Events 38 Auto EIM 36
Groups 38 Acknowledge 56
Schedules 38 Starting 55
TIP Schedules 38 Stopping 55
Edit Of Cards 93 Event Initiated Programs (EIP) 132
Edit Of Groups 93 Exiting Unity 33
Edit Of Misc. 93 EXP 195, 218, 219
Edit Of Programs 93 Exponent (exp)
Edit Of Schedules 93 Calculation Point Function 218, 219
Edit Point EIAs 179, 180 Calculation Point Operator 195
EIA 312 F
EIA Information
Print 178, 179 F to C 195, 219, 220
EIG 312. See EILGs (Event Initiated Logical Graphics) F1 37
Add/Modify 185, 186 F11 37
Copy Activities to Other Events 187, 188 F12 37
Delete 186, 187 F2 37
EILG 312 F5 37
EIM 312. See EIMs (Event Initiated Messages) F9 37
Add/Delete 180, 181 Fahrenheit to Centigrade (F to C)
EIMs (Event Initiated Messages) Calculation Point Operator 195
Auto EIM Fahrenheit to Centigrade (F to C)
Setup 88 Calculation Point Function 219, 220
Definition 313 Fields 26
EIP. See EIPs (Event Initiated Programs) Fire & Security 313
Add/Delete 182, 183 Definition 312
Disable 183, 184 Flood Fill 99, 100
EIPs (Event Initiated Programs) Floppy Diskette Drive
Definition 313 Clean 317
EMS 312. See Energy Management System FLOW 195, 220, 221
Energy Management 312 Flow rate (flow)

462
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Index

Calculation Point Function 220, 221, 222 I


Calculation Point Operator 195
Flow rate using square root (flowsqrt) IMS 313, 321
Calculation Point Function 222, 223 IMS (Information Management System) 39, 284
Calculation Point Operator 195 Cancel Printing 39
FLOWSQRT 195, 222, 223 Detailed IMS information
Form Feed 145 Storing Alarm Data 284
IMS Reports 287
G Viewing the IMS Data File Statistics 298
Viewing the IMS Directory 298
GPL 313 Setting up the IMS
Graphic User Interface 16 Adding Trend Points 285, 286
Graphics 106, 313 Deleting Trend Points 286
creating 106 Selecting Alarms to be Stored 284
Setup 106 Setup 302
Graphics Directory 29 Statistics 39
Graphics Editor 106, 107 Data File 284
Greater Than IMS ASCII Report 296, 297
Calculation Point Operators 196 IMS Directory 29
Greater Than or Equal IMS Graph Report 293, 294, 295
Calculation Point Operators 196 IMS Report
Group Print 297
Definition 313 IMS Reports
Group Address 326 Run 291
Group Type 326 Set up 287, 288, 289, 290, 291
GUI 313 IMS Screen Report 292
H IMS SDF Report 296
Installing the DataBase Dump Utility 324
Hardware 313 Intercom
Header Point 34 Definition 313
Header Window 34 Interval 301
Header Data 39 Interval Demand 301
Setup 75 IRM 313, 358
HEAT 196, 223, 224 IRM (Information Routing Manager)
Heat index (heat) Definition 313
Calculation Point Function 223, 224 IRMCMD.EXE 359
Calculation Point Operator 196 IRMLST.DAT 359
Highlighting 20 IRMRESTR.CMD 359
Holiday Schedules 80, 81
Hot Backup 17 K
HotBackup 358 Key functions
Definition of Files 359 Acknowledge Alarms 37
Hardware Requirements 359 Acknowledge EILGs 37
Run SETPIPES.EXE 369 On-Line Help 37
Software Requirements 359 Keyboard
STATECHG.CMD 369 Canceling a Menu Selection with 25
UNITYINI.EXE 364, 365, 366, 367 Clean 317
HotBackup Status 370 Operation in Dialog Boxes 26
Reset the Masters 370, 371, 372 Selecting a Pull-Down Menu with
View 370 Cursor keys 24, 25
Hour Text keys 25
Calculation Point Input 193 Kill Logs 42
HVAC 313 kw Load of Equipment 307

463
Index Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

L Generating 58
Group Type 60, 61
LAN 17, 313 Groups 59, 60
Last Interval Demand 304 Kill 42
Last Interval Usage 309 Logical Group 61, 62
Less Than Print Tree 62
Calculation Point Operators 196 Single Group 58
Less Than or Equal Lookup 45
Calculation Point Operators 196
Limit Commands 141 M
Lists 26
LN 200, 227, 228 Maintenance
Log Commands 142 Annual 316
Log Off 43 Hardware 317
Logging Off from Unity 33 Monthly 316
Auto Log Off feature 33 Scheduled 316
Logging On to Unity 32 Semi-Annual 316
Logical AND Software 319
Calculation Point Operators 197 Manual Shed 301, 310
Logical And Not (ANDNOT) Manual Shed Amount 306
Calculation Point Operators 197 MAX 199, 225
Logical Exclusive Or Max kwh reading per scan 304, 305, 306, 307
Calculation Point Operators 197 Maximum (MAX)
Logical Graphics (EILGs) 178 Calculation Point Function 225
Logical Group Calculation Point Operator 199
Adding 94 Maximum Off Time 308
Adding a Bar Chart to 96, 97 Menus 37
Adding a Cut Out to 97 Card 39
Adding a Point to 95, 96 Edit 38
Adding Text to 100, 101 IMS 39
Modifying Points in 103 Log Off 43
Removing 101, 102 Logical 41
Removing a Point from 102 Logs 38
Renaming 102, 103 Misc 42
Using Flood Fill in 98 Setup 39, 40
Logical Group Displays System 42
Definition 313 Message
Logical Group Tree 17, 41, 313 Add/Modify 152, 153
Moving Groups in 104, 105 Copy 154
Opening/Closing Groups in 103 Delete 153
Print Tree 62 Print text 155
Setup 94 Message Directory 29
Tree Colors Messages 152, 313
Setup 87 Automatically Displayed 152
Logical Not And Event Initiated (EIM) 152
Calculation Point Operators 198 Messages (EIMs) 178
Logical Not Or Meter 301
Calculation Point Operators 198 Meter Constant 304, 305, 306, 307
Logical Or Meter Factor 301
Calculation Point Operators 198 MIN 199, 226
Logical Or Not Minimum (MIN)
Calculation Point Operators 199 Calculation Point Function 226
Logon/Logoff 124 Calculation Point Operator 199
Logon/Logoff Report 122 Minimum Off Time 308
Logs 38 Minimum On Time 308
Definition 313 Minus

464
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Index

Calculation Point Operators 199 Optimized Duty Cycle Strategy 170


Minute Optimized Start strategy 170
Calculation Point Input 193 Optimized Stop strategy 170
Misc. Optimum Start Time
Clear Alarms 42 Calculation Point Function 228, 229
Data file Backup 42 Optimum Stop Time
Directory 42 Calculation Point Function 229, 230
Kill Logs 42 OR 198
Revision 42 ORNOT 199
System Map 42 OS/2
System Status 42 Desktop 112
Misc. Commands 93, 127 OS/2 WARP 18
Misc. Commands Report 122 OS/2 Window 18
Misc. System Activity 93
MOD 199 P
Mode 301 Pager, Dial-Out. See Dial-Out Pager
Modem 17 Password
Dial-Up Pager 347, 348 Add/Edit 68, 69, 70
Modulo Copy 72, 73
Calculation Point Operators 199 Remove 71
Monitor Passwords 39
Clean 318 Changing 71, 72
Mouse 19, 20, 318 Printing the Password File 72
Canceling a Menu Selection with 24 Setup 68
Operation in Dialog Boxes 27 PC
Selecting a Pull-Down Menu with 24 Clean 317
Multi-Tasking 18 Peak Time 301
Multiplication Percent of Scale
Calculation Point Function 227 Calculation Point Function 230, 231
Multiply Peripherals
Calculation Point Operators 200 Definition 313
N PID Loop 313
PIPE.DAT 359
NAND 198 Plus
Natural log (ln) Calculation Point Operators 200
Calculation Point Function 227, 228 Point
Calculation Point Operator 200 Commanding a 47
Networking 17 from a Log 48, 49
No Data Requesting Status for a 46
Calculation Point Input 192 Point Address 44, 326
NOR 198 Field 44
Not Equal Lookup Arrow 44
Calculation Point Operators 200 Point Address Lookup 45
Number of Meters 304, 305, 306, 307 Point Address of the equipment 307
Point Command 36, 313
O Definition 313
oint Commands Report 122 Point Commands 123, 139, 140
OIP 313 Point Data
OIPs (Operator Initiated Programs) Calculation Point Input 192
Definition 313 Point Descriptor 44, 326
Operating Mode 303 Field 44
Operating System Lookup Arrow 44
Definition 313 Point Descriptor Lookup 46
Operator Initiated Programs (OIP) 132 Point Details 326
Operator Logon/Logoff 93 Point Number 304, 305, 306, 307

465
Index Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Point Segregation 40, 83, 84 Report Parameters


Add/Modify 84, 85 Change 118, 119
Copy 85 Set 114, 115, 116, 117, 118
Delete 86 Restore Files from Floppy Disks 320
Point Status Revision 42
Definition 313 Revision Number 28
Point Type 326 REXX 76
Pointing 20 REXX Program Template 189
Points REXX Programs 189
Unity 44 REXX Script 41
Print Text 145, 146 rh to dp 200, 233, 234
Printer Right Clicking 20
Definition 313 Rolling Average
Printer Ribbon 318 Calculation Point Function 234, 235, 236
Printers 39 RTU 313
Setup 74, 75 Run Programs 143
Priority 304 Run REXX 148
Program Run Time
Add commands to 137, 138 Calculation Point Function 236, 237
Add/Modify 133
Copy 134, 135 S
Delete 134 Scan Time 301
Delete commands from 138 Schedule
Enable/Disable 136 Add a program to 157
Print Commands 135, 136 Delete a program from 158
Run 136 Scheduled Maintenance 316
Program Activity 93 Schedules
Program Commands 139 Advance 49
Program Directory 28 Holiday 39, 80, 81
Program Execution 126 Time-of-Day 38
Program Execution Report 122 Scroll Bars 23
Program Number 303 Season
Program Scan Time 304 Calculation Point Input 193
Program Start Time 303 Segregation Files
Program Stop Time 304 Alarm Manager 328
Program Types 132 Select High
Programming Procedures 133 Calculation Point Operator 238
Programs Select Low
Definition 313 Calculation Point Operator 239
Programs (EIPs) 178 Selecting 20
Programs Priority 159, 184, 185 Selecting a Pull-Down Menu
Projected Peak 301, 305, 309 with keyboard
Projected Peak Occurence 306, 310 cursor keys 24, 25
Pull-Down Menus 24 text keys 25
Purge IMS Files 321 with mouse 24
R Sensor
Definition 313
Radio Buttons 26 Server
RAND 200, 231, 232 Definition 313
Random (rand) Set Segregation 147
Calculation Point Function 231, 232 Setback Strategy 171
Calculation Point Operator 200 Setup
Relative humidity to dew point (rh to dp) Alarm Colors 87
Calculation Point Function 233, 234 Auto EIM 88
Calculation Point Operator 200 Command Trace 90

466
UNITY 5.7 Users Guide to UNITY Index

EMS Defaults 40, 86 System Status Changes 93


Graphics 106 System Status Report 122
Header Data 39, 75 SYSTEM.CMD 376
Holiday Schedule 39
IMS 302 T
Logical Group Tree 94 TCP/IP 17
Passwords 68 Time 34
Point Segregation 83, 84 Calculation Point Input 193
Printers 39, 74, 75 Time Delay
Station 88 Calculation Point Operator 201
Time/Date 76 Time Delay between on commands 308
Tree Colors 87 Time Delays 144
Unity 68 Time Initiated Program Schedules 156
Update Intervals 88 Time Initiated Programs (TIP) 132
User Interface 94 Time of Day Schedule 164
Setup Strategy 170 Time/Date 76
Shed Item 310 TIP 314
Shed Limit 301, 303 TIP Schedule
Shed Priority 308 Add/Modify 156, 157
Software 313 Copy 160
Spin Boxes 26 Delete 159, 160
SQRT 200, 240 Print 161
Square root (sqrt) TIP Schedules 38, 314
Calculation Point Function 240 TIPs (Time Initiated Programs)
Calculation Point Operator 200 Definition 314
Start Strategy 170 TOD 314
Start Time 301 TOD Information
Start Unity 32 Print 167, 168
STATECHG.CMD 359, 364 TOD Schedule
Station Add 164, 165, 166
Assigning to a Terminal 89 Delete a Strategy 169
Modifying Descriptor 89 Display 167
Station Setup 40, 88 Edit a Strategy 168, 169
Status TOD Strategy Information 170
System 42 Totalizer 314
Stop Strategy 170 Totalizer Difference
Stop Time 301 Calculation Point Function 242
Subsystem TRACEDB 113
Multiple Tree Path 45
menu 42 Trend
Single Adding Trend Points 285, 286
menu 42 Deleting Trend Points 286
Subsystems TRUNC 201, 243
Definition 314 Truncate
Subtraction Calculation Point Function 243
Calculation Point Function 241 Truncation
Swiping 20 Calculation Point Operators 201
System Data Trace 112
Database Edits Report U
Reading the Report 124
Enter the Utility 112 UI 314
Programs Report Unity
Reading the Report 126 Definition 314
Setup 113, 114 Unity Point Command dialog 44, 45
System Map 30, 42 Unity Points 44
System Status 30, 34, 42, 125 Looking up by Descriptor 46

467
Index Users Guide to UNITY UNITY 5.7

Unity Setup 68 X
Unity User Interface 34
Unity Windows 34 XOR 197
Alarm Window 35
Header Window 34
Y
Logical Group Tree/Graphics Window 34 Year
UNITYINI 358 Calculation Point Input 193
UNITYINI.EXE 359
Update Intervals 40
Setup 88
User Interface 314
Setup 94

V
VAV 314
VREXX 338
VROBJ.DLL 359

W
WAN 314
Warning Boxes 37
WARP Center 21
Watchdog Timer Board 358
CPU Reset Output 360
External Device Reset 360
Switch Pack S1 360
Timer Reset Input 360
Watchdog Timer Board Setup 370
WIND 201, 244, 245
Wind chill (wind)
Calculation Point Function 244, 245
Calculation Point Operator 201
Window 22
Alarm 35
Clearing the Alarm 54
Header 34
Logical Group Tree/Graphics 34
viewing multiple 109
Window List 23

468

You might also like